Rasexpress User Guide P/N S0000118, Revision G Copyright © 1997–2000 by Multi-Tech Systems, Inc

User Guide RASExpress User Guide P/N S0000118, Revision G Copyright © 1997–2000 by Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced, in whole or in part, without prior expressed written permission from Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Furthermore, Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the con- tent hereof without obligation of Multi-Tech Systems, Inc., to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes.

Revision Date Description A 6/5/97 Manual released for RASExpress 5.10. B 10/8/97 Updated for RASExpress 5.20. C 3/15/98 Updated for RASExpress 5.29. D 7/17/98 Updated for RASExpress 5.30. Replaced “Windows Remote Utilities” chapter with “MultiManager” chapter; added Telnet command appendix. E 12/1/98 Updated for RASExpress 5.31. Deleted “Quick Start” and “WSN Hardware Redirector Software” chapters and references to RNI08 and RD301PC; revised “MultiManager” chapter to describe new features. F 12/17/99 Updated for RASExpress 5.50 and MultiManager 1.30. Added filter appendix; updated MCSI chapter; rearranged chapters and appendixes. G 8/28/00 Updated for RASExpress 5.60 and MultiManager 1.40.

Multi-Tech, CommPlete, RASExpress, MCSI, MultiArray, MiniArray, MultiManager, MultiModemManager, and the Multi-Tech logo are trademarks of Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft in the U.S. and other countries. Novell is a registered trademark, and IPX is a trademark of Novell Inc. pcANYWHERE is a registered trademark of Symantec Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this publication belong to their respective owners.

Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. 2205 Woodale Drive Mounds View, Minnesota 55112 (763) 785-3500 or (800) 328-9717 Fax (763) 785-9874 Technical Support (800) 972-2439 Internet Address: http://www.multitech.com Software User License Agreement

RASExpress software is licensed by Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. to the original end-user pur- chaser of the product, hereafter referred to as “Licensee.” The License includes the distribution disc, other accompanying programs, and the documentation. The RASExpress software, hereafter referred to as “Software,” consists of the computer program files included on the original distribution disc. Licensee agrees that by purchase and/or use of the Software, he hereby accepts and agrees to the terms of this License Agreement. In consideration of mutual covenants contained herein, and other good and valuable con- siderations, the receipt and sufficiency of which is acknowledged, Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. does hereby grant to the Licensee a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use the Software and accompanying documentation on the following conditions and terms: The software is furnished to the Licensee for execution and use on a single computer system only and may be copied (with the inclusion of the Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. copyright notice) only for use on that computer system. The Licensee hereby agrees not to provide or otherwise make available any portion of this software in any form to any third party without the prior express written approval of Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Licensee is hereby informed that this Software contains confidential proprietary and valuable trade secrets developed by or licensed to Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. and agrees that sole ownership shall remain with Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. The Software is copyrighted. Except as provided herein, the Software and documentation supplied under this agreement may not be copied, reproduced, published, licensed, sub- licensed, distributed, transferred, or made available in any form, in whole or in part, to others, without expressed written permission of Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Copies of the Software may be made to replace worn or deteriorated copies for archival or backup procedures. Licensee agrees to implement sufficient security measures to protect Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. proprietary interests and not to allow the use, copying or transfer by any means, other than in accordance with this agreement. Licensee agrees that any breach of this agreement will be damaging to Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. Licensee agrees that all warranties, implied or otherwise, with regard to this Software, including all warranties of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose are expressly waived, and no liability shall extend to any damages, including consequential damages, whether known to Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. It is hereby expressly agreed that Licensee’s remedy is limited to replacement or refund of the license fee, at the option of Multi-Tech Systems, Inc., for defective distribution media. There is no warranty for mis- used materials. This package contains a compact disc. Neither this software nor the accompanying documentation may be modified or translated without the written permission of Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Minnesota. The terms and conditions of this agreement shall prevail regardless of the terms of any other submitted by the Licensee. This agreement supersedes any proposal or prior agreement. Licensee further agrees that this License Agreement is the complete and exclusive statement of Agreement, oral, written, or any other communications between Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. and Licensee relating to the subject matter of this agreement. This agreement is not as- signable without written permission of an authorized agent of Multi-Tech Systems, Inc.

iii iv Table of Contents

1 Introduction Introduction...... 2 How to Use This Manual...... 3 Typographic Conventions ...... 4 How RASExpress Works with LANs and Data Communications...... 5 RASExpress Hardware Configuration...... 5 Redirector Programs ...... 5 LAN Operation with RASExpress...... 6 RASExpress Dial-Out and Dial-In Operation ...... 6 Dial-Out Operation ...... 6 Remote Control Dial-In Operation...... 7 Remote Control Dial-In Security ...... 7 Using PPP and TCP/IP with the RASExpress Server...... 8 IP Addressing...... 8 IP Addresses...... 8 Address Mask ...... 8 Default Route Configuration...... 9 Specifications...... 10 2 Quick Start RASExpress Quick Start...... 14 3 Terminal and Telnet Management Introduction...... 18 How to Access RASExpress ...... 18 Using a Terminal ...... 18 Using Telnet ...... 18 Main Menu ...... 19 Quick Configuration of Server...... 19 Dial Out...... 21 Configuration of Server ...... 23 Server Setup ...... 23 General Setup...... 23 IP Remote Access...... 25 IPX Remote Access...... 27 Point-to-Point Protocol ...... 28 Multilink PPP...... 31 MAC Layer Bridging ...... 31 Telnet...... 32 SNTP Client...... 33 SNMP Agent ...... 34 SMTP Client ...... 35 Virtual Port Information...... 36 Physical Port Information...... 38 Applications ...... 38 Security ...... 39 Config File Setup ...... 41

v OSPF Configuration...... 41 User Setup ...... 43 User Information...... 44 Edit Permissions...... 45 Communication Setup...... 48 ISI Setup ...... 48 Board Information...... 48 Edit Line Information ...... 49 ISDN Primary Rate Interface ...... 50 Modem Setup...... 51 Administrator Setup ...... 52 Filter Setup ...... 53 Management of Server...... 55 Server Information ...... 55 General Information ...... 55 Statistics Summary...... 56 Version...... 57 Reboot Server...... 57 Current Log Status...... 57 Set Server Time...... 57 Restart Server...... 57 User Information ...... 58 Line Information...... 58 Statistics...... 60 Display General Statistics...... 60 Display IP Statistics...... 60 Display IPX Statistics...... 63 Display PPP Statistics ...... 64 Display Port Statistics...... 65 Display Dial In/Dial Out Statistics...... 66 Display Line Usage Statistics...... 66 Display Modem Connect String Table ...... 67 Display Line Utilization Table...... 67 Display Call History ...... 68 4 Browser Management Introduction ...... 72 Main Page...... 72 Configuration of Server Menu...... 74 Server Configuration ...... 75 User Configuration ...... 77 User Information Form...... 78 Edit Permissions...... 79 Administrator Configuration...... 82 IP Remote Access ...... 84 IPX Remote Access...... 87 Point to Point Protocol...... 88 Multilink PPP...... 92 MAC Layer Bridging ...... 93 Virtual Port Setup...... 94 Physical Port Setup ...... 96 Telnet ...... 97 SNTP Setup ...... 98

vi SNMP Setup ...... 100 SMTP Setup...... 102 Applications ...... 103 Security ...... 104 ISI Setup...... 106 ISI Card Setup...... 106 Add a Card...... 107 Delete a Card...... 107 Modify Card Settings...... 107 Edit Line Information ...... 108 ISDN PRI Setup ...... 109 Modem Setup...... 110 OSPF Setup...... 112 OSPF Area Settings ...... 113 OSPF Areas...... 113 OSPF Area Configuration...... 114 OSPF Area Address Range Settings...... 114 OSPF Interface Settings...... 116 Filter Setup ...... 117 Config File Setup ...... 120 Management of Server Menu...... 121 Server Information ...... 122 User Information ...... 123 Serial Line Control...... 124 Reboot Server ...... 124 Restart Server ...... 124 General Statistics...... 125 Router/PPP Statistics...... 126 Calls/Line Usage Statistics...... 127 Modem Connect String Table ...... 128 Statistics Summary ...... 129 IPX Route Table ...... 129 IPX SAP Table ...... 130 ARP Statistics ...... 130 TCP/UDP Statistics...... 131 IP Route Table...... 131 Port Statistics...... 132 Display EIA Signals...... 133 Display Port Addresses ...... 134 Inbound Users...... 134 Line Utilization ...... 135 Call History ...... 136 TCP Connection Table ...... 137 5 MultiManager Introduction...... 140 Installation ...... 140 Starting MultiManager...... 140 Main Window ...... 141 File Menu...... 142 New ...... 142 Open...... 142 Save ...... 142

vii Save As ...... 142 Print...... 142 Print Preview ...... 143 Logout...... 143 Exit ...... 143 Edit Menu...... 143 Properties ...... 143 LAN and WAN Links...... 143 Groups...... 143 Text...... 143 Devices...... 144 Select All...... 146 Delete ...... 146 Auto Detect ...... 146 Change Manager Password ...... 147 First Time Auto Detect ...... 148 View Menu...... 148 Grid Lines...... 148 Toolbars ...... 148 Status Bar...... 148 Reduce Graph ...... 148 Graph Grid...... 149 Graph Forward...... 149 Graph Backward...... 149 Server Files...... 149 Periodic Download Status...... 150 Customize Tool Bars ...... 150 Filter Setup ...... 151 Draw Menu ...... 153 Selection Tool...... 153 RAS Tool...... 154 LAN Link Tool...... 155 WAN Link Tool ...... 155 Group Tool...... 156 Text Tool...... 156 Auto LAN Links Tool...... 157 Auto Group Tool ...... 157 Auto WAN Links Tool...... 157 Paper Color Tool ...... 158 Line Color Tool...... 158 Configuration Menu ...... 159 Server Setup...... 159 IP Setup...... 161 IPX Setup...... 164 PPP Setup ...... 165 Multilink PPP...... 168 MAC Layer Bridging ...... 169 Communication Setup...... 170 Card Setup ...... 170 Physical Port Setup ...... 171 Virtual Port Setup ...... 173 ISDN PRI Setup ...... 174 SNMP Setup...... 175 SNTP Setup ...... 177 viii SMTP Client Setup ...... 179 OSPF Configuration ...... 180 Area Configuration ...... 181 Address Range Configuration ...... 181 Interface Configuration ...... 182 Telnet Setup...... 183 Applications ...... 184 Security Setup ...... 185 User Setup ...... 187 Modem Setup...... 190 Administrator Setup...... 192 Configuration File Setup...... 193 Management Menu ...... 194 Server Management ...... 194 Line Management...... 195 EIA Signals ...... 196 Trap Setup ...... 196 Reboot History...... 198 Trap View ...... 199 Bundle Information ...... 200 Statistics Menu ...... 201 Summary Statistics ...... 201 General Statistics...... 202 IP ARP Statistics...... 202 IP ICMP Statistics ...... 203 IP RIP Statistics ...... 203 IP TCP Statistics...... 204 IP UDP Statistics ...... 204 IP General Statistics...... 205 IP Port Statistics ...... 205 IPX Port Statistics...... 206 PPP Statistics ...... 206 Port Status...... 207 Port Summary ...... 207 Port Statistics...... 208 Connect String Table...... 208 TCP Connection Table ...... 209 Call History ...... 210 Analyzer Menu ...... 211 Offline Statistical Analyzer...... 211 Online Statistics ...... 214 ARP Statistics ...... 214 UDP Statistics...... 214 TCP Connection Statistics...... 214 TCP Packet Statistics ...... 214 Port Throughput...... 214 Dial In Dial Out...... 214 IP Port Statistics ...... 214 IPX Port Statistics ...... 214 Connect String Statistics ...... 215 Log Storage Settings...... 215 MIB-II Menu...... 216 System Table ...... 216 IP Route Table...... 217

ix IP Address Table ...... 219 TCP Connection Table ...... 220 UDP Table ...... 221 PPP Link Status ...... 221 PPP Link Configuration ...... 223 PPP IP Table...... 224 PPP IP Configuration...... 225 PPP LQR Table ...... 226 ARP Table...... 227 Window Menu...... 227 Help Menu ...... 228 6 Remote Node Client Software Windows Dial-Up Networking ...... 230 Windows 95/98 ...... 230 Windows NT 4.0...... 231 7 The WinMCSI Redirector Introduction ...... 234 WinMCSI Installation ...... 234 Running the WinMCSI Redirector ...... 235 Checking Connectivity ...... 238 8 RASExpress Script Language Introduction to the RASExpress Script Language...... 240 An Overview of the RASExpress Script Language...... 240 Commands ...... 240 Arguments ...... 241 Variables...... 241 Format String and Format Control Characters...... 241 Script Language Execution Notes ...... 242 Operator Precedence...... 242 Creating, Compiling, and Executing a Script File...... 242 RASExpress Script Language Command Format ...... 244 Script Command Summary...... 245 Format Conversion...... 245 Communication Parameter Settings ...... 245 Display...... 246 Arithmetic Conversion ...... 246 File/Directory Manipulation ...... 246 Connection Information and Control ...... 248 String Manipulation...... 249 Miscellaneous ...... 250 RASExpress Script Commands...... 251 Appendix A Reinstalling RASExpress Introduction ...... 275 Reinstalling RASExpress ...... 275 RASExpress Server Configuration Utility...... 278 Main Menu...... 278 Server Setup...... 279

x General Setup...... 279 Administrator Setup ...... 281 IP Remote Access Configuration...... 282 IPX Remote Access Configuration ...... 283 PPP Configuration...... 285 Multilink PPP...... 287 MAC Layer Bridging ...... 288 Telnet...... 289 SNTP Client...... 290 SNMP Agent ...... 291 Virtual Port Information...... 293 Physical Port Information...... 294 SMTP Client ...... 295 Applications ...... 296 Security ...... 297 OSPF Configuration...... 299 User Setup ...... 302 User Information ...... 302 Access List ...... 304 Communication Setup ...... 306 Intelligent Serial Interface (ISI)...... 307 Line Information...... 308 ISDN Primary Rate Interface ...... 309 Modem Setup...... 310 Filter Setup ...... 311 RASExpress Server...... 313 Function Keys...... 314 Options Menu ...... 314 Server Information ...... 314 User Information ...... 315 User Information Window...... 315 Access List ...... 316 Serial Line Control...... 319 Shutdown Server...... 320 Display Statistics...... 320 Display EIA Signals...... 322 Display Port Addresses ...... 322 Inbound User List...... 322 Reset SBC Processors ...... 323 RASExpress Server Color Utility...... 324 General Setup...... 324 Menu Color Setup ...... 325 Form Color Setup ...... 326 Directory Color Setup ...... 327 Appendix B Upgrading RASExpress Introduction...... 328 Before You Start ...... 328 How to Upgrade RASExpress...... 328

xi Appendix C Telnet Commands Introduction ...... 330 Telnet Configuration Commands...... 330 General Commands ...... 330 Application Commands ...... 331 IP Commands ...... 332 IPX Commands...... 333 Multilink PPP Commands ...... 334 MAC Layer Commands ...... 334 Telnet Commands ...... 335 SNTP Commands...... 336 SNMP Commands...... 337 Security Commands...... 338 PPP Commands...... 339 ISI Commands ...... 342 ISDN Commands ...... 344 Virtual Port Commands ...... 345 Physical Port Commands ...... 346 SMTP Commands ...... 347 Statistics Commands...... 348 Server Commands...... 351 Line Commands ...... 351 User Commands...... 352 Administrator Commands...... 353 Modem Commands ...... 354 OSPF Commands ...... 355 Filter Commands...... 357 Miscellaneous Commands ...... 361 Variable Definitions ...... 362 Appendix D Creating Filter Templates Introduction ...... 365 Patterns ...... 365 Definitions ...... 366 Examples ...... 367 Appendix E Error Messages Server Error Messages ...... 368 RASCON Error Messages ...... 372 RASExpress Install Error Messages ...... 372 Appendix F Warranty and Technical Support Limited Warranty...... 374 Online Warranty Registration...... 374 Technical Support...... 374 Internet Sites...... 375

Index...... 377

xii 1 Introduction RASExpress User Guide

Introduction

This manual describes how to configure and manage RASExpress on MiniArrayIII and CommPlete 4000 servers and MultiArrayIII server farms. RASExpress is remote access server software for dial-in and dial-out communications on an IPX or IP network. Pre-installed on the server are three DOS programs: the RASExpress server program (RASEXP.EXE), a local configuration utility (RASCON.EXE), and a color utility with which the administrator can change RASExpress window and menu colors (SETCOLOR.EXE). These utilities are explained in Appendix A. RASExpress has built-in remote configuration and management utilities for terminal and Telnet access (Chapter 3) and browser access (Chapter 4). Also included is MultiManager, a Windows management utility with which you can remotely configure the RASExpress server, view and control current server activity, and review logs of RASExpress server activity. MultiManager is explained in Chapter 5. Remote users can link their client PCs to the LAN-based RASExpress server by running remote control software, such as pcANYWHERE® or the Windows® Dial- Up Networking remote node client, and calling into the RASExpress server. With RASExpress, a modem and phone line creates an electronic “extension cord” to the LAN. Client computers can use the CommPlete 4000 to dial out by running a redirector program. Redirector programs intercept data intended for a modem and redirect it to the client computer’s network interface card, which sends the data to the RASExpress server’s communication lines. The WinMCSI redirector program for Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT 4.0 is included with RASExpress. The client computer must have a minimum of 640 KB of RAM, and must run Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows NT 4.0.

2 1 Introduction

How to Use This Manual

Following is a brief description of each chapter and appendix. Chapter 1 Introduction to RASExpress Summarizes the features of the RASExpress server. Chapter 2 Quick Start Describes how to initialize the RASExpress server. Chapter 3 Terminal and Telnet Management Describes how to use the terminal and Telnet interfaces to configure and manage a RASExpress server. Chapter 4 Browser Management Describes how to use a Web browser to configure and manage a RASExpress server. Chapter 5 MultiManager Describes how to use MultiManager, a Windows SNMP configuration and management utility, to configure and manage a RASExpress server. Chapter 6 Remote Node Client Software Describes how to install Dial-Up Networking, the Windows 95, 98, and NT 4.0 dial- up network remote node client. Chapter 7 The WinMCSI Redirector Describes the WinMCSI redirector, which allows communication software that uses INT6B, INT14, or standard ports COM1 through COM8 to connect the client computer to the RASExpress server. Chapter 8 RASExpress Script Language Describes script language commands that are used to perform various LAN-to-LAN login operations. A script file can be used for simple or for complex operations, such as dialing a number, logging onto a server, or downloading files. Appendix A Reinstalling RASExpress Describes how to reinstall RASExpress on a server, and how to configure and manage it using the DOS interface. Appendix B Upgrading RASExpress Describes how to obtain upgrades and install them. Appendix C Telnet Commands Describes the commands used in Telnet command mode. Appendix D Creating Filter Templates Describes how to create templates for forwarding or filtering packets. Appendix E Error Messages Lists error messages, their likely causes, and recovery actions. Appendix F Warranty, Service, and Technical Support Contains the text of the warranty. It also provides information on how to return equipment for service or repair, and how to contact Multi-Tech technical support by telephone, BBS, CompuServe, or the Internet.

3 RASExpress User Guide

Typographic Conventions

Certain typographic conventions have been adopted throughout the text of this manual to illustrate keyboard input, screen display dialogs, and special vocabulary. • Text entered by you is shown in bold. Example: supervisor. • Code examples and screen messages are shown in a monospace font. • Italics are used for important new terms, for book and manual titles, and when terminology is explained, introduced, or emphasized. Example: “The word bit is a contraction of the words binary digit.”).

• Names of keyboard keys are shown in small caps. Example: SHIFT. • Certain keys and key combinations may be abbreviated as follows: Means press the carriage return key, which can be represented on the keyboard by a broken left-pointing arrow or the words Enter or Return. The ENTER key, or carriage return, is used to activate most commands.

ALT+X Means to hold down the ALT key while you press the key represented by X.

CTRL+X Means to hold down the CTRL (control) key while you press the key represented by X. • Please notice the difference between the capital letter O and the number 0.

4 1 Introduction

How RASExpress Works with LANs and Data Communications

A RASExpress server allows you to share modem services on a LAN. Services are shared by running a redirector program on the client PC that allows the user to connect to and log onto the RASExpress server. The DOS version of this program is a terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program, which runs in the background until it is required. The DOS redirector used with RASExpress is MCSIWSN.EXE. The Windows version is WinMCSI. When run by a user at a client PC, MCSIWSN requests all active RASExpress servers to broadcast their presence on the LAN. After MCSIWSN loads, the user logs onto the RASExpress server by typing logon, a user name, and an optional password. The user can then run data communications software from the DOS prompt. To dial out through the RASExpress server, the user runs the redirector, enters the user name and password, runs the communications software, and selects an available modem. The modem operates just as if it were connected directly to the user’s PC. To dial in for remote control, a remote caller dials one of the RASExpress server modems. The RASExpress server displays a List of Hosts screen from which the remote caller can select a host. The remote caller then types a password, if one is required. The remote caller then is connected through the RASExpress server to a client PC that is running a remote control communications program. To dial in for a remote node session, a remote caller goes through a similar procedure.

RASExpress Hardware Configuration

RASExpress requires a dedicated 486-66 MHz or faster computer with at least two ISA slots, a minimum of 16 MB of RAM, a floppy drive, and a hard drive. The RAS- Express software is provided on two floppy disks. The RASExpress server is connected to the LAN by a network interface card (NIC). A multiport Intelligent Serial Interface (ISI) card is installed into one of the RASExpress server’s ISA expansion slots. The server’s shared modems are connected to the server through RS-232 connectors on the supplied cabling. However, if the ISI3334/8 modem card is installed, the phone lines connect directly to the card through RJ-11 connectors. A client PC accesses a modem through the RASExpress server by running the MCSI redirector for DOS, or WinMCSI for Windows.

Redirector Programs

A redirector allows a communications program on a client PC to use the RASExpress server’s communications lines as if they were local modems. A redirector program, such as MCSIWSN for DOS (for IPX networks) or WinMCSI for Windows (for IPX or TCP/IP networks), is installed in a client PC. MCSIWSN can be used with any LAN data communications software that has a MCSI-compatible interface (INT6B ACS API). WinMCSI is used with any data communications software that supports COM1 through COM8.

5 RASExpress User Guide

LAN Operation with RASExpress

Using any of the RASExpress configuration utilities, the system administrator can name the RASExpress server, assign user access privileges, and configure each port for operation. User privileges are established by assigning user names and passwords to users (limited only by the amount of RAM), and then specifying which users are to have access to which modem ports. For a client PC on the LAN to use the RASExpress server, it must run a redirector program such as WinMCSI. The redirector program works with a communications program to redirect asynchronous data to one of the RASExpress server’s communications lines. When the asynchronous data is redirected, it is converted into LAN packets for routing to the RASExpress server (outbound operation), or it is received as packets from the LAN and converted to asynchronous data for the communications program (inbound operation). The client PC operates with the MCSIWSN redirector for DOS or the WinMCSI redirector for Windows. To use the LAN version of a communications program, MCSI must be installed to redirect data to the LAN instead of to the client PC’s serial port. Any LAN communications program with the MCSI-compatible INT6B ACS API, such as NASI™ or NCSI™, can operate with the RASExpress server. A client PC can also dial out using an IP protocol such as Telnet. Before the client can dial out, however, the user must load TCP/IP and have the TCP/IP protocol configured for the IP router address, which is the local IP address of the RASExpress server.

RASExpress Dial-Out and Dial-In Operation

Dial-in and dial-out asynchronous communications is the transmission of data over a LAN to and from remote sites via asynchronous gateways. Most gateways perform only dial-in or dial-out functions, but not both. In contrast, the RASExpress server provides high speed dial-in and dial-out capabilities with the added benefits of eco- nomical modem pooling and shared phone lines.

Dial-Out Operation To dial out, the user can use either Telnet or WinMCSI for Windows. To use Telnet, or to use WinMSCI on some networks, the user must first load TCP/IP. To use WinMCSI, the user must log on to the LAN and run WinMCSI from the client PC. (To use WinMSCI on some networks, the user must first load IPX.) Then the user must log on to the RASExpress server using the assigned user name and password. Running a data communications program then allows the selection of an available outbound modem. The outbound modem operates as if it were directly connected to the client PC. Modem configurations can be changed, terminal emulation performed, and files transferred. When data is sent from the client PC to the modem, the transfer begins with the communications software, which sends asynchronous data to the redirector, which then sends it to the client PC’s NIC. There it is converted to packets and addressed to the RASExpress server. The data is received at the RASExpress server’s network interface and sent to the RASExpress software. The software sends it to the modem card, where it is converted back to asynchronous data and sent to the selected modem.

6 1 Introduction

Remote Control Dial-In Operation Before a remote user can dial in, a client PC on the LAN must be set up for remote computing. To do this from a Windows client using ComMap for Windows, select Port Type for the port number and select Inbound. Then log on to the RASExpress server, using the assigned user name and password, and run the host portion of the communication software (such as pcANYWHERE®) that is installed on the client PC. The RASExpress Connection Manager monitors all inbound lines for an incoming call, and connects the remote user with the host PC that the user selects from the Connection Manager list. The remote caller runs the remote portion of the communications software, dials in to one of the assigned RASExpress server modems, and receives the List of Hosts screen, which requests a valid user name and password. The caller is then connected to the client PC and the remote communications session begins. As part of the inbound operation, the inbound modem sends asynchronous data to the server. RASExpress then sends the data to the RASExpress server’s network interface, where the data is converted to LAN packets and addressed to the destination client PC. At the client PC’s NIC, the data is sent to the redirector, converted into an asynchronous data stream, and sent to the communications software.

Remote Control Dial-In Security You can increase the security of your LAN by using a dual-level security system. The first level of security is the user name and password. When passwords are selected, the user name and password are encrypted before being sent to the server. The second level is the callback feature found in RASExpress. Callback security works by configuring the RASExpress server to hang up when it receives a valid user name and password, and then to call a predetermined number that is stored in the user’s profile. For mobile users, RASExpress can be configured to request the user to enter the number of the telephone that the user is calling from. RASExpress also allows the use of RADIUS or TACACS+ security and accounting if there is a RADIUS or TACACS+ server on the network.

7 RASExpress User Guide

Using PPP and TCP/IP with the RASExpress Server

IP Addressing

IP (Internet Protocol) addresses are 32-bit addresses used to uniquely identify devices on a diversified network. An IP address is formatted as four groups of three digits separated by periods, e.g., 204.220.153.001. There are three classes of Internet addresses: A, B and C. Class A networks use the first byte of the IP address for the network number, and the remaining three bytes for the host number. The first byte must have a value from one through 127. Class B networks use the first two bytes of the IP address for the network number, and the last two bytes for the host number. The first byte must have a value from 128 through 191. Class C networks use the first three bytes of the IP address for the network number, and the last byte for the host number. This scheme provides for a very large number of networks, each with up to 255 addressable devices. The first byte must have a value from 192 through 223. The part of the IP address that refers to the network is called the network address. A network mask is a bit pattern that yields the network address in a Boolean AND operation with the IP address. For example, in Class C networks, network addresses take the form X.X.X.0. The network mask for Class C networks is 255.255.255.0. In all IP addresses on a given network, the network address is the same, while the host part of the address is different for each host or workstation.

Table 1. Internet Address Classes

Class Range Mask No. of Hosts Remarks A 0–127 255.0.0.0 16,000,000 127 is reserved for loopback. None left. B 128–191 255.255.0.0 65,384 16,384 possible networks C 192–255 255.255.255.0 254 224-255 are reserved. 2,097,152 possible networks.

IP Addresses

If the RASExpress server is to be used on an existing IP network, make certain that the network can allot an IP address for the RASExpress server and one IP address for each line that will be configured for IP accessibility. Within the port configuration there is an entry for IPCP that enables or disables the ability to use IP and/or TCP/IP.

Address Mask

The mask configuration is typically set as the default mask for the network class. For example, 255.0.0.0 is the mask for Class A, 255.255.0.0 for Class B, and 255.255.255.0 for Class C.

8 1 Introduction

Default Route Configuration

If the RASExpress server is connected to a network with an Internet connection, you should configure the IP default route address to the address of the router that interfaces the customer’s network. Mainly, this parameter is offered to accommodate non- RIP routers. All packets will be directed to this device for distribution.

Internet

T1-MUX IP Address = 199.24.15.244

Router or T1 IP Address = 206.16.196.254 Unix Host IP Address = 206.16.196.253

IP Address = 206.16.196.250 IP Address = 206.16.196.252 IP Address = 206.16.196.251 Mask = 255.255.255.0 Default Route = 206.16.196.254 (Address of router attaching Internet)

Novell File WinNT Web Server Server

Port 4 RASExpress Port 1 IP Address = server 206.16.196.104 IP Address = Port 3 206.16.196.101 IP Address = Port 2 206.16.196.103 IP Address = 206.16.196.102

PPP Client (Trumpet, Win95) IP Address = 206.16.196.101 WLink w/ IP Win95 w/Netware Client and PPP Remote Node with TCP/IP IP Address = IP Address = 206.16.196.104 IP Address = 206.16.196.102 206.16.196.103

Figure 1. Typical network configuration.

9 RASExpress User Guide

Specifications

Software Features

• Dial-in: Supports dumb terminal; Telnet; remote-node, remote-control, or PPP dial-in network access (including third-party PPP clients); Windows 95/98/NT callback and dial-up networking; and login security based on the dial-in protocol used (e.g., NetWare login, remote-control host security, PPP PAP and CHAP, RADIUS, or TACACS+ ). • Dial-out: Supports dial-out communications from CP/IP clients (Telnet and WinMCSI are Windows redirectors) via an encrypted user database file. • Supports separate supervisor and RADIUS or TACACS+ shared secret passwords. • Can function as a basic FTP server, allowing you to FTP upgrade and other files to the RASExpress server. • Supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP), allowing the RASExpress server to synchronize its clock with a time server. • Supports client-to-LAN or LAN-to-LAN access with full-featured routing. • Routs IP and IPX packets; bridges other protocols. • Supports simple scripting for login; IP and IPX filtering; IPX/SPX spoofing; data compression; and dial-on-demand link establishment. • Displays server, line, and user information. • Tracks number, type, and duration of connections. • Separately tracks users waiting for inbound remote-control sessions. • Logs the number of packets sent and received over the LAN and passes user ID information to MultiModemManager. • Supports remote management and configuration via Telnet (IP), a Web browser, or the MultiManager SNMP manager for Windows (IP). • Windows-based MultiManager SNMP management utility allows the administrator to monitor activity, start or stop the server log, disconnect users, and shut down the gateway from any node PC on the network. • Supports DHCP for dynamic IP address allocation for PPP clients.

Server Requirements

• 486DX-66 MHz or faster processor. • 1 MB of RAM per port, 16 MB minimum • One CD-ROM drive. • DOS 6.22 or later. • Dedicated operation. • Novell® (IPX), TCP/IP, or Microsoft (NDIS) over Ethernet.

10 1 Introduction

Administration Computer Requirements

• 486DX-66 or faster processor. • 16 MB of RAM minimum • One CD-ROM drive. • Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0, or 2000 to run the MultiManager SNMP utility.

Client Requirements

• 486DX-66 or faster processor. • One CD-ROM drive. • 16550 UART or better recommended. • TCP/IP network client. • Windows 95 or above, Windows NT Workstation, or Windows 2000.

11 RASExpress User Guide

12 2 Quick Start

13 RASExpress User Guide

RASExpress Quick Start

Each MiniArray III and CommPlete 4000 comes with RASExpress pre-installed. However, RASExpress cannot communicate with your LAN until it is set up with the correct IP address.

Required Equipment • A MiniArray III or CommPlete 4000 server. • A dumb terminal or a PC that can communicate in terminal mode. • A shielded RS-232C null cable with a female DB-9 on one end and a connector to match the terminal’s serial port on the other end. • An IP address assigned to the MiniArray III or CommPlete 4000 server.

Quick Start Procedure 1. Connect the MiniArray III or CommPlete 4000 server to power and the LAN. 2. Make sure the server is turned off. 3. Connect a terminal to the serial port on the rear of the SBC card. 4. Turn on the server.

Note: The server takes a few moments to load the RASExpress software and initialize the modems after it is turned on.

5. Turn on the terminal and press ENTER. The RASExpress server main menu appears.

6. Type 1 and press ENTER to select Quick Configuration of Server. 7. Enable IP Remote Access (option 1), and type the IP address for the RASExpress server (option 2). You will receive error messages that the remote addresses of the WAN ports are not on the same subnet; this is normal for the initial setup.

Note: For detailed descriptions of menu options, see "Quick Configuration of Server" on page 19.

8. Fill in the rest of the requested information. IP Default Route (option 4) is the router address for the LAN’s file server. 9. If you set Remote Client IP Address (option 10) to Use DHCP, Use Address Pool, or Use Radius, skip to step 10. If you set Remote Client IP Address (option 10) to Configure Per Port, when you are done with the quick configuration, from the main menu select Configuration of server (option 3), then Communication Setup (option 3), and then ISI Setup (option 1). Delete all ISI cards before saving and rebooting the server. This corrects the initial subnet error the next time the server loads.

10. When you are done, press ESC and save the changes. You will be asked to reboot the server.

11. Type Y and press ENTER. The connection closes while the RASExpress server reboots. A new menu appears after the RASCard has rebooted.

14 2 Quick Start

12. To complete the configuration of the RASExpress server, select option 3, Configuration of server, from the main menu. For detailed information about the menu options, see Chapter 3. Alternately, you can disconnect the dumb terminal, and then use the Telnet interface (Chapter 3), the Web interface (Chapter 4), or MultiManager (Chapter 5) to complete the configuration from an off-site or a client computer.

15 RASExpress User Guide

16 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

17 RASExpress User Guide

Introduction The CommPlete 4000 single-segment server and MultiArrayIII server farm ship with RASExpress pre-installed. (Throughout this user guide, the segment with RASExpress installed is referred to as the RASExpress server.) All you need to do to get RASExpress up and running is to configure it for your particular operation. Should the hard disk become damaged or the software corrupted, you can reinstall and configure RASExpress following the instructions in Appendix A. You can configure and manage the RASExpress server either locally, using a terminal, or remotely, using Telnet, a World Wide Web browser, or the MultiManager Windows SNMP utility included with RASExpress. This chapter describes the menus for the terminal and Telnet interfaces. For remote management using Telnet commands, see Appendix C. For remote management using a Web browser, see Chapter 4. For remote management using the MultiManager, see Chapter 5.

How to Access RASExpress

Using a Terminal To enable remote configuration of the RASExpress server, you must first configure the server’s IP settings, including the server’s IP address. To do this, you must connect a terminal to the server’s serial port (COM1). Once IP is configured and working, you can complete the server configuration either locally, through the terminal, or remotely, through Telnet, a browser, or MultiManager. 1. Using an DB9 to DB9 serial cable, connect a terminal to the RASExpress server’s serial port.

2. Turn on the RASExpress server and the terminal, and then press ENTER. The RASExpress main menu appears.

Using Telnet Using Telnet for access requires a TCP/IP protocol stack to be loaded on the client. Telnet access is possible both by dialing in through the RASExpress server and, more commonly, through the LAN or Internet.

Dial-In Access 1. Dial in to the RASExpress server using a terminal program. A login prompt appears. 2. Enter a valid user name and password. A menu appears. 3. Select Telnet Session from the menu. 4. Enter the IP address of the RASExpress server. 5. The RASExpress main menu appears.

TCP/IP Access 1. Run your Telnet software, and connect to the IP address of the RASExpress server. 2. The RASExpress main menu appears.

18 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Main Menu When you access the RASExpress server using either a terminal or Telnet, the main menu appears. The terminal and Telnet main menus are identical except for the first item. To select an item from this or any other menu, type the item number and press ENTER. To exit a menu, press ESC. The menus are described on the following pages.

Terminal main menu [ 1] Quick Configuration of server [ 2] Management of server [ 3] Configuration of server [Esc] Close the session

Telnet main menu Services provided by the telnet server [ 1] Dial out [ 2] Management of server [ 3] Configuration of server [Esc] Close the telnet session

Quick Configuration of Server

This option is available only when you connect a dumb terminal to the RASExpress server. Its purpose is to set up the RASExpress server to communicate with your network. Once the RASExpress server is communicating with the network, you can either continue to configure the RASExpress server with the terminal or you can use MultiManager (Chapter 5) or another utility to complete the configuration from a client computer. When you select Quick Configuration of Server, you must enter a user name and password following the prompts, after which the IP Remote Access menu appears. The parameters that you can set in this menu apply to IP routing on all ports of the RASExpress server.

[ 1] IP Remote Access :enabled [ 2] IP Address :192.168.090.004 [ 3] IP Subnet Mask :255.255.255.000 [ 4] IP Default Route :192.168.090.001 [ 5] IP RIP :enabled [ 6] IP Auto Learn Default Gateway :disabled [ 7] Primary Name Server :000.000.000.000 [ 8] Secondary Name Server :000.000.000.000 [ 9] DNS Caching Server :disabled [10] IP Frame Type :TYPE_II [11] Remote Client IP Address :Use Address Pool [12] Configure IP Address Pool [13] IP Static Route [ESC] to go to prev menu

IP Remote Access Shows the IP port status. When it is enabled, the RASExpress server provides remote access on IP, allowing any remote PPP-compatible client to call in and access local TCP/IP hosts.

IP Address Shows the IP network address for the RASExpress server’s Ethernet interface. It can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled. The IP address must be assigned by the system administrator, and it must be unique on the TCP/IP network.

19 RASExpress User Guide

IP Subnet Mask Shows the IP subnet mask of the RASExpress server. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled. The mask shown in the example is the standard mask for a Class C network (see page 8).

IP Default Route Shows the IP address to which packets are sent that cannot be routed by the RASExpress server. If there is no router on the network, the address should be filled with zeroes. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

IP RIP Enables or disables the IP Routing Information Protocol (RIP-2). Enable IP RIP if you want the RASExpress server to use RIP-2 for IP routing.

IP Auto Learn Default Gateway Enables or disables RASExpress to learn the correct default gateway if you have configured the default gateway incorrectly or if the configured gateway goes down and a different router starts acting as a default router. This feature requires a RIP-2 router that supports default gateway broadcasting.

Primary Name Server Shows the address of the primary name server that is used by the RASExpress server to resolve names to IP addresses for Telnet and RLOGIN clients dialing in from a dumb terminal. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

Secondary Name Server Shows the address of the secondary name server that is used by the RASExpress server to resolve names to IP addresses for Telnet and RLOGIN clients dialing in from a dumb terminal. The secondary name server is used when the primary name server does not respond. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

DNS Caching Server Enable to have the RASExpress server act as a DNS server. When this option is enabled, the RASExpress server gives out its IP address as the DNS server to dialing PPP clients.

IP Frame Type Shows the RASExpress server’s IP frame type. It can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled. Two frame types are available: TYPE_II (the default) and SNAP.

Remote Client IP Address Shows how the RASExpress server allocates IP addresses to remote client-to-LAN users. Select Use DHCP if you have a DHCP server on your LAN. Select Use Address Pool if the IP addresses you assign to the clients are mostly contiguous. Select Configure Per Port (the default) if you want to assign a specific address to each of the remote ports. For LAN-to-LAN ports you must configure all IP addresses manually. Select Use Radius if you want to use your RADIUS server to assign IP addresses.

Configure IP Address Pool Select this option to configure a range of IP addresses. In the address pool menu, type the IP address range from which the IP address will be allocated. If the range includes one or more addresses that you want to exclude from allocation, you can type their address ranges in the second and third sets of menu options.

20 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Static Routes Select this optionto display or configure a list of permanent routes for use when WAN ports are set up for LAN-to-LAN operation. A static route is a manually configured route that specifies the transmission path a datagram must follow, based on the datagram's destination address. Static routes are useful when selecting a preferred route to a remote host. To add a static route to the list, type A and press ENTER. The following menu appears:

[ 1] Address :000.000.000.000 [ 2] Mask :000.000.000.000 [ 3] Metric :0 [ 4] Gateway :000.000.000.000 [ESC] to go to previous menu

Address. The destination of the static route. The destination must be an IP address entered in dotted decimal notation. If the destination is a network, the node portion of the IP address is 0. If the destination is a host, the mask must be 255.255.255.255. Mask. The IP network mask. It indicates the network and subnet portion of the IP address with non-zero numbers; the node portions are shown with zeros. Metric. The number of hops to the destination IP address. The number of hops is the number of routers that traffic must travel through to reach the destination. Gateway. The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the next-hop router.

When you have finished configuring the static route, type F and press ENTER to add it to the list. Dial Out

This option appears only on the Telnet main menu. Use it to dial out through the RASExpress server: 1. Select Dial out from the Telnet main menu. 2. Enter your user name and password when requested. A list of lines appears: SrNo Server Name General Name Specific Name Status 1 SERVER_1 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_1 FREE 2 SERVER_1 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_2 FREE 3 SERVER_1 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_3 FREE 4 SERVER_1 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_4 FREE 5 SERVER_1 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_5 FREE 6 SERVER_1 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_6 FREE 7 SERVER_1 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_7 FREE 8 SERVER_1 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_8 FREE 9 SERVER_1 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_1 FREE 10 SERVER_1 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_2 FREE 11 SERVER_1 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_3 FREE 12 SERVER_1 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_4 FREE 13 SERVER_1 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_5 FREE 14 SERVER_1 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_6 FREE 15 SERVER_1 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_7 FREE 16 SERVER_1 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_8 FREE N: Next Page A: Select Any Line ESC: Prev Menu Choose a line :

3. Type A and press ENTER to select any available line, or select a specific line by typing the number of the line.

21 RASExpress User Guide

4. In the menu that appears, set the baud, stop bits, data bits, and parity for the call. If you do not need to make any changes, type F and press ENTER. 5. A message similar to the following appears: USER1 Connected to line MODEM:B1_5634_PCI_3 at 115200 8N1 6. You can now dial out by using the AT command ATDTxxxxxxx, where xxxxxxx represents the telephone number.

22 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Configuration of Server

The Configuration of Server menu gives the system administrator complete control over the RASExpress server. The administrator can use it to view the current status of the RASExpress server, change network addresses, change a user’s connection parameters, and open, close, or change the duration of the server log. Use the Configuration of Server menu to make fundamental changes to the server’s configuration. Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server. [ 1] Server Setup [ 2] User Setup [ 3] Communication Setup [ 4] Modem Setup [ 5] Administrator Setup [ 6] Filter Setup [ESC] to go to main menu

Server Setup

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup. [ 1] General Setup [ 2] IP Remote Access [ 3] IPX Remote Access [ 4] Point-to-Point Protocol [ 5] Multilink PPP [ 6] MAC Layer Bridging [ 7] Telnet [ 8] SNTP Client [ 9] SNMP Agent [10] SMTP Client [11] Virtual Port Information [12] Physical Port Information [13] Applications [14] Security [15] OSPF Configuration [ESC] to go to previous menu

Use the Server Setup menu to configure the basic operations of the RASExpress server.

General Setup Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ General Setup.

[ 1] Server Name : SERVER_1 [ 2] Supervisor Password : **************** [ 3] Log Status : enabled [ 4] Log Start Date(MM-DD-YYYY) : 6-1-2000 [ 5] Log Start Time(HH:MM:SC) : 00:00:00 [ 6] Log Number of Days : 1 [ 7] Write Error Messages into file : enabled [ 8] Message File : C:\RAS560\SERVER.MSG [ 9] Screen Saver : disabled [10] Configuration Files To Keep : 5 [11] Connection manager menu : disabled [12] Command to MultiModem Manager : disabled [ESC] to go to previous menu

23 RASExpress User Guide

Server Name Use this field to assign a unique name to the RASExpress server. The server name is broadcast on the Novell network. It is also used by MultiManager to monitor RASExpress server statistics.

Supervisor Password Use this field to assign a supervisor password. The password is case-sensitive. It locks the local console and prevents regular users from running MultiManager and making changes to the RASExpress server.

Log Status Use this field to enable or disable the call log. The default is disabled. When enabled is selected, RASExpress logs all calls for one hour in the file yyyymmdd.LOG, where yyyymmdd is the year, month, and day the log was created. The 24 saved logs for each date are given the extensions .L00–.L23. When disabled is selected, RASExpress does not log calls.

Log Start Date You can start the call log automatically, if it is disabled, by entering the start date in the format month-day-year. When the date arrives, the log begins at the time specified in the Log Start Time field.

Log Start Time Enter the time at which you want the log to automatically start, in the format hours:minutes:seconds.

Log Number of Days Specify the number of days ,up to seven, that you want log files to remain on the server’s hard disk. Log files older than the specified number of days are automatically deleted. This option prevents old log files from filling the disk.

Write Error Messages into File Select enabled to have RASExpress save all error and other messages it receives into a message file. The default is disabled.

Message File If you select enabled in the previous field, you can assign a name to the message file in this field. The default file name is SERVER.MSG.

Screen Saver RASExpress has a built-in screen saver. Select disabled if you do not want the screen saver. Select enabled if you do want to use the screen saver. The screen saver appears only on the monitor connected to the RASExpress server.

Configuration Files to Keep When you change the configuration of a RASExpress 5.60 or later server, the new configuration is automatically saved in a sequentially-numbered file. Use this option to define how many configuration files will be saved. To activate a saved configuration file, see “Configuration File Setup” on page 41.

Connection Manager Menu Select enabled to display the Connection Manager menu to a user calling into the RASExpress server for remote control operation. Select disabled to display the Host List to the user.

24 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Command to MultiModemManager Select enabled to have the RASExpress server send the LOGON user name to a MultiModemManager rack or PC. It enables you to determine, via the Call Status window in MultiCommManager, which users are dialing out. Select disabled if MultiCommManager is not installed.

Note: This command applies only to RNI08 and RNGCOM servers connected to MultiModemManager racks. It does not apply to MiniArray, MultiArray, or CommPlete 4000 servers.

IP Remote Access Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ IP Remote Access.

Use the IP Remote Access menu to set up parameters that apply to IP routing on all ports.

IP Remote Access Shows the IP remote access status. When it is enabled, the RASExpress server provides remote access on IP. This allows any remote PPP-compatible client to call in and access local TCP/IP hosts, such as WWW, FTP, Telnet, etc.

IP Address Type the IP network address for the RASExpress server’s Ethernet interface. You can edit this field only if IP Remote Access is enabled. The IP address must be assigned by the system administrator, and it must be unique on the TCP/IP network.

IP Subnet Mask Shows the IP subnet mask of the RASExpress server. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

IP Default Route Shows the IP default route on the network on which the RASExpress server is installed. Any IP packets that cannot be routed by the RASExpress server are sent to this address. If there is no router on the network, the address should be filled with zeroes. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

IP RIP Enables or disables the IP Routing Information Protocol (RIP-2). Enable IP RIP if you want the RASExpress server to use RIP-2 for IP routing.

25 RASExpress User Guide

IP Auto Learn Default Gateway Enable to have RASExpress learn the correct default gateway if you have configured the default gateway incorrectly or if the configured gateway goes down and a different router starts acting as a default router. This feature requires a RIP-2 router that supports default gateway broadcasting.

Primary Name Server Shows the address of the primary name server used by the RASExpress server to resolve names to IP addresses for Telnet and RLOGIN clients dialing in from a dumb terminal. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

Secondary Name Server Shows the address of the secondary name server used by the RASExpress server. The secondary name server is used when the primary name server does not respond. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

DNS Caching Server Enable to have the RASExpress server act as a DNS server. When this option is enabled, the RASExpress server gives out its IP address as the DNS server to dialing PPP clients.

IP Frame Type Shows the RASExpress server’s IP frame type. It can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled. Two frame types are available: TYPE_II (default) and SNAP.

Remote Client IP Address Shows how the RASExpress server allocates IP addresses to remote client-to-LAN users. Select Use DHCP if you have a DHCP server on your LAN. Select Use Address Pool if the IP addresses you assign to the clients are contiguous. Select Configure Per Port (the default) if you want to assign a specific address to each of the remote ports. Select Use Radius if you want to use your RADIUS server to assign IP addresses. For LAN-to-LAN ports you must configure all IP addresses manually.

Configure IP Address Pool Select to configure a range of IP addresses. In the address pool menu, type the IP address range from which the IP address will be allocated. If the range includes one or more addresses that you want to exclude from allocation, you can type their address ranges in the second and third sets of menu options.

[ 1] Address :000.000.000.000 [ 2] Mask :000.000.000.000 [ 3] Metric :0 [ 4] Gateway :000.000.000.000 [ESC] to go to previous menu

26 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

When you have finished configuring the static route, type F and press ENTER to add it to the list.

IPX Remote Access Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ IPX Remote Access. [ 1] IPX Routing :enabled [ 2] Learning Network numbers :enabled [ 3] Route Netbios Over IPX :disabled [ 4] Internal Network Number :00abcdef [ 5] 802.3 Routing :enabled [ 6] 802.3 Network Number :12345000 [ 7] 802.2 Routing :enabled [ 8] 802.2 Network Number :12345001 [ 9] TYPE_II Routing :enabled [10] TYPE_II Network Number :12345002 [11] SNAP Routing :enabled [12] SNAP Network Number :12345003 [ESC] to go to prev menu

From the IPX Remote Access menu, you can change the following parameters:

IPX Routing Select enabled to allow the RASExpress server to use the IPX protocol for remote access.

Learning Network Numbers Select enabled to allow the RASExpress server to automatically detect and use the network’s numbers.

Note: The server needs some time to learn the IPX address of the LAN segment it is attached to. If it is unable to learn the address, it will use the default network address as configured. If the RASExpress server comes up before the file server and uses the default address, you will get a warning on your file server about conflicting network numbers. If this happens, reboot the RASExpress server.

Route NetBIOS Over IPX This option enables the routing of NetBIOS over IPX packets. Select enabled if you are running applications on NetBIOS over IPX. Select disabled if you do not need this option.

Internal Network Number Type the IPX internal network number for the RASExpress server. This number should be unique on the network.

27 RASExpress User Guide

802.3 Routing Select enabled to enable routing of 802.3 IPX packets on the LAN.

802.3 Network Number Type a network number for the 802.3 frame type.

802.2 Routing Select enabled to enable routing of 802.2 IPX packets on the LAN.

802.2 Network Number Type a network number for the 802.2 frame type.

Type_II Routing Select enabled to enable routing of Ethernet_II IPX packets on the LAN.

Type_II Network Number Type a network number for the Ethernet_II frame type.

SNAP Routing Select enabled to enable routing of Ethernet SNAP IPX packets on the LAN.

SNAP Network Number Type a network number for the Ethernet SNAP frame type.

Point-to-Point Protocol Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ Point-to- Point Protocol. Select this option to edit the PPP parameters for a selected WAN port. The List of Lines appears. Type the number of the line whose PPP parameters you want to edit, and press ENTER. The following menu appears.

Port Name : WAN3 1.SLIP : enabled 2.Port Type : Client to LAN 3.Maximum Receive Unit : 1534 4.Async Control Map : 00000000 5.Compression : disabled 6.Authentication Protocol : Password Authentication Protocol 7.User Name : 8.User Password : *********************************************** 9.Dial On Demand : disabled 10.Log Connection Trace : enabled 11.IPXCP : enabled 17.IPCP : enabled 12. Network Number : 1234500c 18. Local Address : 192.168.090.004 13. Node Number : 000012345070 19. Remote Address : From Address Pool 14. CIPX Compression : disabled 20. Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.000 15. Netbios Over IPX : disabled 21. VJ Compression : disabled 16.BCP : disabled 22. Forward Broadcast : disabled

Port Name Shows the name of the port you are configuring. Press ESC to select another port to configure.

SLIP Shows the status of the SLIP protocol for the port. Enable SLIP if you have SLIP clients dialing into the RASExpress server.

28 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Port Type Select the type of connection the port is to be used for. Select Client-to-LAN if the PPP peer is a dial-up client. Select LAN-to-LAN if the PPP peer is a dial-up client or another router. If you change the connection type, be sure to also change the IP address.

Maximum Receive Unit Type the PPP Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) for the port, in the range 0–1534. The MRU is the maximum packet size in bits.

Async Control Map (ACCM) Type the PPP Asynchronous Control Character Map (ACCM) for the port, in the range 0–FFFFFFFF.

Compression Select enabled to enable PPP data compression for the port. Enable data compression only if the data link is slower than 57,600 bps and the modem is not doing any data compression. Disable it if the data link is 57,600 bps or faster or if the modem is doing data compression.

Authentication Protocol Select the PPP authentication protocol for the port. You can choose Password Authentication Protocol (PAP), Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP), or None.

User Name Type a user name here for use in LAN-to-LAN security. For a client-to-LAN configuration, leave this field blank.

User Password Type a password here for use in LAN-to-LAN security. The password is case- sensitive, and must match the password at the other end of the PPP connection. For a client-to-LAN configuration, leave this field blank.

Dial on Demand This field is used only for LAN-to-LAN operations. Enable it if you want to disconnect the line during idle times and connect only when you need to transfer data. If this option is enabled, RASExpress spoofs all watchdog and serialization packets.

Log Connection Trace Select enabled to enable a PPP connection log, which is stored in the RASExpress working directory. All information on the connection is included in the log.

IPXCP Select enabled to enable IPX for remote dial-in clients on the port. Select disabled to disable IPX. IPXCP is a PPP network control protocol for IPX. It is responsible for configuring, enabling, and disabling the IPX protocol modules on both ends of the point-to-point link.

Network Number This field shows the IPX network number of the port. There is a unique number for each port that does not correlate with the existing network number. You can edit this field only if IPXCP is enabled for the port.

29 RASExpress User Guide

Node Number This field shows the IPX remote node number of the port. Each port must have a unique node number. You can edit this field only if IPXCP is enabled for the port.

CIPX Compression Select enabled to enable CIPX (Compressed Internetwork Packet Exchange) compression of IPX headers for the port. Select disabled if you do not want CIPX compression. If you select enabled, CIPX compression must also be enabled on the server for your choice to have an effect. You can edit this field only if IPXCP is enabled for the port.

NetBIOS over IPX This field allows you to enable or disable routing of NetBIOS over IPX packets on the port. Enable it if you are using applications that require NetBIOS over IPX support. You can edit this field only if IPXCP is enabled for the port.

BCP This field shows the status of the Bridge Control Protocol (BCP) for the port. Enable BCP if the other end of the PPP link supports BCP.

IPCP Select enabled to enable IP for the port. Select disabled if TCP/IP or PPP is not used.

Local Address This field shows the IP local network address of the port. This address can be edited only for LAN-to-LAN ports, and only if IPCP is enabled. For all client-to-LAN connections, the local address is the same as the IP address of the LAN port. For LAN-to-LAN ports, make sure the IP address is on a different network or a subnet of any of the existing networks.

Remote Address This field shows the IP network address of the port. It is the address assigned to the remote PPP client. It must be on the same network as the IP local address. This field can be edited only if IPCP is enabled for the port. It cannot be edited for client-to- LAN ports if DHCP is enabled.

Subnet Mask This field contains the mask used to specify the subnetwork part of the IP address. For all client-to-LAN connections it is the same as the LAN network. See “IP Addressing” on page 8.

VJ Compression Select enabled to enable Van Jacobson compression of TCP/IP headers on the PPP link. VJ compression is used by many PPP clients. Select disabled to disable Van Jacobson compression. If IPCP and VJ Compression are enabled, a dial-in PPP client that uses this compression method may experience greater speed than with VJ Compression disabled.

Forward Broadcast This field allows you to enable or disable forwarding of UDP broadcast packets onto the port. Enable it if your UDP applications depend on the broadcasts. When forwarding is enabled, the RASExpress server forwards to the selected port all UPD broadcast packets that come from the LAN and from the client-to-LAN ports. For- warding broadcasts on remote links increases the traffic on the links, so enable forwarding only if necessary.

30 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Multilink PPP Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ Multilink PPP. [ 1] Multilink PPP : enabled [ 2] GroupEPD : c0a85a04 [ 3] Bundle Server IP Address : 000.000.000.000 [ 4] Bundle Server UDP Port : 582 [ESC] Previous Menu

Use this menu to set up Multilink PPP on the RASExpress server. The Multilink PPP protocol bonds two physical ports to one IP address for greater bandwidth. RASExpress 5.40 introduced MultiChassis Multilink support, which enables the bundling of multilink connections across different RASExpress servers, as would be the case in a typical ISP setup, where there might be one telephone number and several RASExpress servers.

Note: All MultiChassis Multilink servers must have IP and PPTP turned on to enable the servers to talk to each other. Also, all MultiChassis Multilink servers should point to the same RADIUS or TACACS+ server.

Multilink PPP Select enabled to enable Multilink PPP (MLPPP) support on the RASExpress server. RASExpress supports Multilink PPP for both analog and ISDN channels.

Group EPD Identifies the bundle group that the RASExpress server belongs to. The EPD (End Point Descriminator) is an arbitrary four-byte hexadecimal value. By default RASExpress initializes it to the IP address of its Ethernet interface. However, all servers that belong to the same bundle group should have the same EPD.

Bundle Server IP Address Type the IP address of the Bundle Server. The Bundle Server is the RASExpress 5.40 or later server chosen to manage the multichassis multilinks. Though it can be any RASExpress 5.40 or later server on the network, ideally it is one that is equidistant from all RASExpress servers in the bonding group. If the servers are on different networks, then the hop count from the Bundle Server to all the other servers should be more or less equal. Alternately, the one that is least busy can function as the Bundle Server.

Bundle Server UDP Port Identifies the UDP port number that the RASExpress server uses to communicate between itself and the Bundle Server.

MAC Layer Bridging Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ MAC Layer Bridging. [ 1] Bridging : disabled [ 2] Spanning Tree : disabled [ESC] to go to previous menu

Use this menu to configure MAC (Media Access Control) layer bridging for the RASExpress server.

31 RASExpress User Guide

Bridging Select enabled to enable the server to bridge all MAC layerpackets. The default is disabled. If you do not use networking protocols other than IP and IPX, you should disable bridging, since it slows down the RASExpress server by requiring the router to examine each and every packet on the connected LAN segment. However, you need bridging to support networking protocols like NetBIOS. Note that if you enable bridging for the RASExpress server but disable routing of IP or IPX on a specific port, bridging of those protocol packets will not take place on that port. However, if you disable IP or IPX entirely for the RASExpress server, then those packets will be bridged.

Spanning Tree Spanning Tree bridging is used to detect looped back links. The default is disabled. This option is unavailable when Bridging is disabled.

Telnet Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ Telnet. [ 1] Telnet Administration : enabled [ 2] Telnet Client : enabled [ 3] Telnet Dialout : enabled [ 4] Telnet Auto Dialout : disabled [ 5] Auto Dialout Port Number : 8000 [ 6] Message Update Port Number : 6900 [ 7] Interface Type : Menu [ESC] to go to previous menu

Telnet Administration Select enabled if you want to be able to configure and manage the RASExpress server from any Telnet client.

Telnet Client Select enabled to allow a remote user who has dialed in to the RASExpress server to Telnet to different hosts on the network.

Telnet Dialout Select enabled to allow users to use any Telnet client to select a modem on the RASExpress server and dial out to UNIX hosts and BBSs.

Telnet Auto Dialout Select enabled to allow a Telnet client to connect to the TCP port number in Auto Dialout Port Number and use any free modem on the RASExpress server

Auto Dialout Port Number Type the TCP port number to be used for Telnet auto dialout.

Message Update Port Number Type the message port number for the RASExpress server. You can then Telnet to this port to see current status messages

Interface Type Choose the Telnet interface type; the choices are Menu and Command. Menu mode allows the RASExpress server to be configured using the menus in this chapter. Command mode allows the RASExpress server to be configured by typing Telnet commands (see Appendix C).

32 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

SNTP Client Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ SNTP Client. [ 1] SNTP Client : disabled [ 2] SNTP Server IP Address : 000.000.000.000 [ 3] Time Zone Standard Name : CST [ 4] Offset from UTC : -06:00 [ 5] Daylight Savings : enabled [ 6] Offset During Daylight Savings : 60 [ 7] Start of Daylight Savings Time [ 8] End of Daylight Savings Time [ESC] to go to previous menu

The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is used to synchronize computer clocks in the Internet. RASExpress uses SNTP time signals to synchronize server clocks for accounting accuracy.

SNTP Client Select enabled to enable the RASExpress server to synchronize its clock using SNTP signals.

SNTP Server IP Address Type the IP address of the SNTP server you want to use as a time source.

Time Zone Standard Name Type a one- to three-letter abbreviation for the time zone of the RASExpress server that you are configuring. It is used for display purposes only.

Offset from UTC Type the time difference between the location of the RASExpress server and the prime meridian at Greenwich, U.K. in the format hours:minutes. Sites west of Greenwich have negative numbers, and those east of Greenwich have positive numbers.

U.S. time zone Offset from UTC Eastern Standard (EST) -05:00 Central Standard (CST) -06:00 Mountain Standard (MST) -07:00 Pacific Standard (PST) -08:00

Daylight Savings Select enabled to make RASExpress automatically adjust the clock for daylight- saving time.

Offset During Daylight Savings Type the number of minutes that the clock changes during the shifts to and from daylight-saving time. In most parts of the world it is 60 minutes.

Start of Daylight Savings Time Select to configure the time and day that daylight-saving time begins. A menu appears in which you can change the following items: Ordinal. Daylight-saving time usually starts at the same time on the same day of the week in the same month every year. Each day of the week occurs four or five times a month. Select on which occurrence daylight-saving time starts: the first, second, third,

33 RASExpress User Guide

fourth, or last of the month. In the U.S.A. daylight-saving time starts at 2:00 A.M. on the first Sunday in April. Day of Week. Select the day of the week on which daylight-saving time starts. Month. Select the month in which daylight-saving time starts. Time. Type the time of day that daylight-saving time starts.

End of Daylight Savings Time Select to configure the time and day that daylight-saving time ends. A menu appears in which you can change the following items: Ordinal. Select on which occurrence of the selected day of the week that daylight- saving time ends: the first, second, third, fourth, or last of the month. In the U.S.A. daylight-saving time ends at 2:00 A.M. on the last Sunday in October. Day of Week. Select the day of the week on which daylight-saving time ends. Month. Select the month in which daylight-saving time ends. Time. Type the time of day that daylight-saving time ends.

SNMP Agent Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ SNMP Agent. [ 1] SNMP Agent :enabled [ 2] Trap Manager Community Name : [ 3] Trap Manager IP Address :192.168.090.005 [ 4] Trap Manager Port Number :162 [ 5] SNMP Reboot Required Trap :disabled [ 6] Get Community Name :public [ 7] Get Community Permission :readonly [ 8] Set Community Name :supervisor [ 9] Set Community Permission :readwrite [10] Authentication :Simple Community Name [ESC] to go to previous menu

The RASExpress server can be managed or configured by any standard Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) manager.

SNMP Agent Select enabled to enable SNMP agent support, disabled to disable it.

Trap Manager Community Name Type the community name of the SNMP trap manager. Any SNMP traps that are generated by the RASExpress server will be sent to this manager.

Trap Manager IP Address Type the IP address of the SNMP trap manager.

Trap Manager Port Number Type the port number of the SNMP trap manager. The default port number is 162.

SNMP Reboot Required Trap Enable to send a trap to the manager whenever a configuration change is made that requires a reboot of the server.

34 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Get Community Name The RASExpress server can be configured for Get and Set communities. Type the name of the Get community here. The default is public.

Get Community Permission Select the Get community permission. The choices are readonly and readwrite. The default is readonly.

Set Community Name Type the name of the Set community. The default is supervisor.

Set Community Permission Select the Set community permission. The choices are readonly and readwrite. The default is readwrite.

Authentication Select whether SNMP authentication is simple or encrypted. Set authentication to Simple Community Name if you are using MultiCommManager or a third party manager. This uses plain text for the Get and Set community names. You may also select Simple Community Name if you are using Multi-Tech MultiManager. Set authentication to Encrypted Community Name only if you are using Multi- Manager. When authentication is encrypted, the administrative user name and password and the PDU ID (a field in the SNMP request to the agent) are used to prepare an encrypted sequence used for authentication of the SNMP request by the agent (RAS). It is a combination understood only between the RAS and MultiManager.

SMTP Client Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ SMTP Client. Use this window to configure SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) service on the RASExpress server. [ 1] SMTP Client :disabled [ 2] SMTP Server IP Address :000.000.000.000 [ 3] SMTP Sender Email Address : SMTP Events: [ 4] Send mail on message file full :disabled [ 5] Send mail on log file full :disabled [ 6] Send mail on debug log full :disabled [ 7] Send mail on server upgrade :disabled [ 8] Send ras alive mail :disabled [ 9] Send AT Command Execution mail :disabled [10] SMTP Recipient List [ESC] to go to previous menu

SMTP Client Select enabled to enable SMTP service. Select disabled to disable SMTP service. This option must be enabled to make the other options in the window accessible.

SMTP Server IP Address Type the IP address of the SMTP server.

SMTP Sender Email Address Type the e-mail address of the RASExpress server.

35 RASExpress User Guide

Send Mail on Message File Full Select enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the recipient list when the message file is full.

Send Mail on Log File Full Select enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the recipient list when the log file is full.

Send Mail on Debug Log Full Select enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the recipient list when the debug log is full.

Send Mail on Server Upgrade Select enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the recipient list when the server is upgraded.

Send RAS Alive Mail Select enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the recipient list that the RASExpress server is running. The message is sent once per hour.

Send At Command Execution Mail Select enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the List of Recipients when an At command has been executed. At commands are Telnet commands that run at a specified date and time. For more information, see Appendix C.

SMTP Recipient List Select this option to see the list of e-mail recipients. E-mail alert messages are sent to these recipients if any of the four preceding options are enabled and the conditions are met. To add a new recipient, type A, press ENTER, type the recipient’s e-mail address, and press ENTER again. To select an address for editing, type E, press ENTER, type the line number of the address, and press ENTER again. To delete an address from the list, type D, press ENTER, select the line number of the address, and press ENTER again; the address will be deleted without warning.

Virtual Port Information Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ Virtual Port Information. Use the Virtual Port Information option to configure an individual WAN port. When you select the option, a list of WAN ports appears. Type the line number for the port you want to edit, and press ENTER. The following menu appears. 1. Idle Timeout (mins) : 10 2. Session Timeout (mins) : 0 3. PPP Detect : enabled 4. Auto Login Protocol : None 5. Auto Login Address : 6. Filter Template Name : 7. Tunneling Protocol : None 8. Tunnel Server IP Address : 9. DialType : Analog 10. ConnectType : Answering 11. PhoneNumber : 12. ScriptFile : 13. Bundle with a LAN-to-LAN Port : disabled 14. Bundled Port : WAN1

36 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Idle Timeout Type the number of minutes of no activity allowed before RASExpress disconnects the port. A value of 0 disables idle timeout.

Session Timeout Type the number of minutes allowed per session. When this time is exceeded, RASExpress automatically disconnects the port. A value of 0 disables session timeout.

PPP Detect Select enabled to enable automatic PPP connections on the port. Select disabled to disable automatic PPP connections. When disabled is selected, a PPP client is presented with a menu on connection.

Auto Login Protocol Select the protocol that is to be used for auto login on the port when PPP Detect is enabled. The options are None, Telnet, and Rlogin. When None is selected, a menu is presented to the caller after login.

Auto Login Address Type the Telnet or Rlogin host IP address to be used when PPP Detect is enabled. This field can be edited only if Auto Login Protocol is set to Telnet or Rlogin.

Filter Template Name Type the name of the filter template for the port. For more information about filter templates, see Appendix D.

Tunneling Protocol Select PPTP to enable tunneling on the port. Select None to disable tunneling.

Tunnel Server IP Address Type the IP address of the server used for PPTP tunneling. This field is inactive if tunneling is disabled.

Dial Type Select whether the server will make an analog or an ISDN call. For a client-to-LAN connection, this field is unavailable.

Connect Type Select the type of LAN-to-LAN connection. The options are Answering and Dialing. For a client-to-LAN connection, Answering is the only option.

Telephone Number Type the number the server will dial for a LAN-to-LAN connection. For a client-to- LAN connection, this field is unavailable.

Script File Name Type the name of the login script file, which is processed only on a LAN-to-LAN dialing port. The script must be compiled by the RASExpress script compiler before it can be used, and the compiled file must be stored in the directory where RASExpress is installed (typically C:\RAS560). It is not necessary to type the file name’s .COD extension. For a client-to-LAN connection, this field is unavailable.

37 RASExpress User Guide

Bundle with a LAN-to-LAN Port Select enabled to bundle the port with a PPP port configured as a LAN-to-LAN port. Any call on such a reserved port is mapped to the bundled PPP port. You can do multilink PPP on LAN-to-LAN connections by reserving multiple virtual ports for a single PPP port.

Bundled Port Select the PPP port to be bundled with the virtual port.

Physical Port Information Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ Physical Port Information. Use the Physical Port Information menu to configure an individual physical port. When you select the option, a list of ports appears. Type the line number for the port you want to edit, and press ENTER. The following menu appears. 1. Auto Dial Out : disabled 2. TCP Port Number : 9001 3. Raw TCP Connection : disabled

Auto Dialout Select enabled to enable auto dialout for the port. Select disabled to disable auto dialout.

TCP Port Number Type the auto dialout TCP port number. This field is unavailable if Auto Dialout is disabled.

Raw TCP Connection Select disabled to disable all Telnet negotiations on the port, so that the connection is treated as a “raw” TCP data stream. When a standard Telnet connection is made, certain parameters are negotiated, such as terminal type and screen size. However, some applications use Telnet for faxing or credit card validation for which negotiation is neither required nor recommended. It is for such applications that you should disable this option.

Applications Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ Applications. [ 1] Web Server : enabled [ 2] FTP Server : enabled [ 3] TFTP Server : enabled [ 4] RLOGIN Client : enabled [ESC] to go to previous menu

Use this menu to enable or disable applications that are installed with RASExpress.

Web Server Enable this option to allow the RASExpress server to be managed by a Web browser.

FTP Server Enable this option to allow File Transfer Protocol (FTP) file transfers between the RASExpress server and the management console. You can use FTP to send upgrade

38 3 Terminal and Telnet Management files to the RASExpress server (see Appendix B). Unlike TFTP, FTP has password protection.

TFTP Server The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is used by host computers to exchange files. It is used by RASExpress for its remote management programs. Leave this option enabled if you want RASExpress server to be managed by these programs.

RLOGIN Server Enable this option to allow the RASExpress server to be used as an RLOGIN client for connecting to an RLOGIN server.

Security Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ Security [ 1] Security Protocol : Local [ 2] Accounting : disabled [ 3] TACACS+ Encryption : disabled [ 4] Shared Secret : **************** [ 5] Allow call if security server down : disabled [ 6] Primary Server Address : 000.000.000.000 [ 7] Backup Server Address 1 : 000.000.000.000 [ 8] Backup Server Address 2 : 000.000.000.000 [ 9] Backup Server Address 3 : 000.000.000.000 [10] Call back delay attribute value : 224 [11] Remote User Enter Number attribute value : 225 [12] Protocol Permissions attribute value : 226 [13] Inbound user service type value : 10 [14] Shell user service type value : 11 [ESC] to go to previous menu

Use this menu to configure the RASExpress server to work with your security server. The RASExpress server supports the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) and TACACS+ protocols for authentication.

Security Protocol Select the security protocol you are using on your network. If you do not have a security server on your network, select Local. The other two options are RADIUS and TACACS+.

Accounting This field enables or disables accounting support in the security server. Enable it if you want your RADIUS or TACACS+ server to keep track of accounting information such as number of bytes sent, number of bytes received, log in time, log out time, port number, etc.

TACACS+ Encryption Select enabled to enable encryption of TACACS+ packets between the RASExpress server and the TACACS+ security server. Enable only if your TACACS+ server supports encryption.

Shared Secret Type the shared secret used for communication between the RASExpress server and the security server. It must match the shared secret configured at the security server.

39 RASExpress User Guide

Allow Call If Security Server Down Enable to provide access by any user if the primary and all backup security servers are down. Disable to prevent any user from logging on if the security servers are all down.

Primary Server Address Type the IP address of your primary security server.

Backup Server Address 1–3 Type the IP address of your backup security server. You can specify up to three backup security servers.

Call Back Delay Attribute Value Type the value you have chosen for the Callback Delay attribute. You must set up the same attribute in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique attribute value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS attributes nor any other custom attributes. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Remote User Enter Number Attribute Value Enter the value you have chosen for the Remote User Enter Number attribute. You must set up the same attribute in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique attribute value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS attributes nor any other custom attributes. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Protocol Permissions Attribute Value Enter the value you have chosen for the Protocol Permissions attribute. You must set up the same attribute in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique attribute value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS attributes nor any other custom attributes. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Inbound User Service Type Value Enter the service type value you have chosen for Inbound User. You must set up the same service type value in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique service type value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS service types or any other custom service types. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Shell User Service Type Value Enter the service type value that you have chosen for Shell User. You must set up the same service type value in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique service type value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS service types or any other custom service types. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

40 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Config File Setup Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ Config File Setup Serial_No ConfigFileName ModifiedDate ModifiedTime 1 config.001 06-23-2000 11:16:50 2 config.002 06-23-2000 11:17:30

S:Select Esc: Prev Menu

When you change the configuration of a RASExpress 5.60 or later server, the new configuration is automatically saved in a sequentially-numbered file. To return the server to a previous configuration, use this menu to select the appropriate file. To select the file, type S, and then type its serial number. To select the maximum number of saved configuration files, see “Configuration Files to Keep” on page 24.

OSPF Configuration Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Server Setup ➔ OSPF Configuration [ 1] OSPF : disabled [ 2] Router ID : 192.168.090.004 [ 3] Area Configuration [ 4] Interface Configuration [ESC] to go to previous menu

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is an internal gateway protocol. Designed for IP networks, OSPF supports variable length subnet masks (VLSM), which allows more efficient allocation of IP addresses than RIP-1, and tagging of externally derived routing information. OSPF also allows packet authentication and uses IP multicast when sending or receiving packets. Use the OSPF menus to create an OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) database for the RASExpress server.

OSPF Routing Select enabled to enable OSPF routing on the server.

Router ID Type the identifier for the OSPF router. It has the same format as an IP address, but identifies the router independent of its IP Address.

Area Configuration Use Area Configuration to review or configure OSPF areas. An OSPF area is made up of internal routers linked to other areas within an autonomous system (AS) by area border routers. When you select Area Configuration, the List of Areas menu appears. To edit an area in the List of Areas, type its serial number and press ENTER. To create a new area, Type A and press ENTER. In both cases, the Area Configuration menu appears with the following options: [ 1] Area ID : 000.000.000.000 [ 2] Stub Area : disabled [ 3] Inject Default Route : disabled [ 4] Stub Metric : 1 [ESC] to go to previous menu

41 RASExpress User Guide

Area ID. The identification number assigned to the area. It has the same format as an IP address, but has the function of defining a summarization point for Link State Advertisements. The default value is 0.0.0.0, the same as the backbone. Stub Area. Determines whether AS external advertisements will be flooded through the area. Cannot be enabled for backbone areas. Inject Default Route. Determines whether a default route is summarized into a stub area if the OSPF router is connected to multiple areas. Stub Metric. Shows the cost of the default route summarized into a stub area.

List of Address Ranges The List of Address Ranges specifies the address ranges in an OSPF area. Although an area can be loosely defined as a collection of networks, in actuality an area is specified as a list of address ranges. Each address range is defined as an address and mask pair. Many separate networks may be contained in a single address range, just as a subnetted network is composed of many separate subnets. To access the List of Address Ranges menu, select Area Configuration, type R for “ranges,” and then press ENTER. To edit the address ranges in an area, type the area’s serial number and press ENTER. Then type A to add a new address range or E to edit an address range and press ENTER. In either case, the Address Range Configuration menu opens with the following options. [ 1] Address : 000.000.000.000 [ 2] Mask : 000.000.000.000 [ 3] Status : Advertise [ESC] to go to previous menu

Address. Type the IP address part of the IP address and IP mask pair. The IP address and IP network mask pair specify the IP addresses contained in the address range. For example, the class B address range of X.X.X.X with a network mask of 255.255.0.0 includes all IP addresses from X.X.0.0 to X.X.255.255. Mask. Type the IP mask part of the IP address and IP mask pair. Status. Select Advertise to have the networks contained in the address range advertised in other areas. Select Do Not Advertise to have the networks contained in the address range hidden from other areas.

Interface Configuration Use Interface Configuration to review or configure an OSPF interface. When you select Interface Configuration, a list of OSPF interfaces appears. To edit an interface, type E and press ENTER, then type the interface’s line number and press ENTER. The Interface Configuration menu then appears with the following options: [ 1] Interface : disabled [ 2] AreaID : 000.000.000.000 [ 3] Metric : 1 [ 4] RouterDeadInterval : 60 [ 5] TransmitDelay : 1 [ 6] Priority : 1 [ 7] HelloInterval : 15 [ 8] RetransmitInterval : 15 [ 9] AuthenticationType : None [10] PlainTextPassword : ******** [ESC] to go to previous menu

42 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Interface. Indicates whether OSPF routing is enabled on this interface. OSPF can be enabled on LAN and WAN ports of type LAN-toLAN. Area ID. The area to which this interface belongs. Metric. Indicates the cost of sending a packet on the interface, expressed in the link state metric. Router Dead Interval. The number of seconds to wait before the neighbors should declare the OSPF router down if they do not receive any Hello packets from it. Transmit Delay. The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link State Update packet over this interface. Priority. Indicates the priority for the OSPF router to become the Designated Router on the connected interface. Hello Interval. The number of seconds between the Hello packets sent on the interface by the OSPF router. Retransmit Interval. The number of seconds between link state advertisement transmissions. Authentication Type. The authentication scheme used on the attached network. The choices are Simple and None. Plain Text Password. The simple password to be used for the attached network.

User Setup

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ User Setup. If you have created a list of users, selecting User Setup causes the list to appear. 1. USER1 2. USER2 3. USER3 4. USER4 5. USER5 6. USER6 7. USER7 8. USER8 A: Add D: Delete E: Edit R: Edit Permissions ESC: Prev Menu Enter Your Choice :

Use the following menus to set up user names, passwords, callback numbers, and permissions. First select an action, then select a user by typing the user line number. To add a user to the list, type A and press ENTER. To delete a user from the list, type D, press ENTER, and follow the prompts. To edit a user, type E and press ENTER. To edit permissions for a user, type R and press ENTER.

43 RASExpress User Guide

User Information Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ User Setup ➔ Add or Edit. When you type A to add or E to edit a user, the following menu appears. 1. User Name : USER1 2. Password : ****************************** 3. Remote User Enter Number (On/Off) : OFF 4. Call Back Number : 5. Call Back Delay (secs) : 15 6. Concurrent Logins : 0 7. Static IP Address : 000.000.000.000 Select field to modify (S to Save, ESC to Cancel):

User Name Type the user name in this field. This is the name that a remote caller uses to log into the RASExpress server. It may not duplicate any other user name.

Password Type the password the user will use to log into the RASExpress server. The password is case-sensitive. It should be unique and easy for the user to remember. To enter a new password, type the new password and press ENTER, then type it again to verify it. For security, the actual characters are replaced by asterisks.

Remote User Enter Number Select ON to indicate that the user is mobile. When the user calls into the RASExpress server, RASExpress prompts the user to type the user’s local telephone number. The server then disconnects and calls back the user at that number after the delay specified in the Call Back Delay field. If the Remote User Enter Number field is set to OFF, you can enter a fixed callback number in the Call Back Number field. If the Remote User Enter Number is set to ON, then the Call Back Number field is unavailable because the remote number is variable.

Call Back Number To enable callback security, type the user’s callback security phone number in this field. When a user calls in with a valid user name and password, the RASExpress server hangs up. Then, after the delay specified in the Call Back Delay field, the RASExpress server calls back the user at the callback number. This field is valid only if the Remote User Enter Number field is disabled by selecting OFF.

Call Back Delay This field sets the time in seconds that the RASExpress Server must wait before calling back the user. The value entered in this field is valid only if the Remote User Enter Number field is set to On, or if a phone number has been entered in the Call Back Number field.

Concurrent Logins The number of concurrent logins the user is permitted. A value of 0 indicates that there is no limit on the number of concurrent logins.

Note: For multilink connections, the number of concurrent logins permitted should be at least the number of links in the multilink bundle.

44 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Static IP Address The user’s static IP address. A value of 000.000.000.000 indicates no static address.

Edit Permissions Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ User Setup ➔ Edit Permissions Use the Edit Permissions menu to control the user’s access to the RASExpress server. To edit user permissions, type R in the User Setup menu and select the user name. The following menu appears. [ 1] Mode Permissions [ 2] Line Permissions [ 3] Protocol Permissions [ 4] Time of day Logins [ 5] Connection time limits [ 6] Terminal Login [ 7] Tunneling F: To Save Modifications [ESC] to go to previous menu

Type a number to select the user permissions you want to edit. When you have finished editing permissions for the user, type F to save your modifications. To exit the menu without saving your modifications, press ESC.

Mode Permissions Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ User Setup ➔ Edit Permissions ➔ Mode Permissions. 1. Dial Out 2. Dial In Remote Node 3. Dial In Remote Control 4. Telnet To Host 5. Rlogin To Host D: Delete Esc: Prev Menu

The Mode Permissions menu lists the types of connections the user is permitted to use. If there are less than five modes listed in the Modes Permitted list, you can add a missing mode by typing A and pressing ENTER. The Add Permission menu appears with a list of options that are not on the Modes Permitted menu. Type the number of the mode you want and press ENTER to add it to the Mode Permissions list. Press ESC to close the Add Permission menu. To delete a line from the Modes Permitted list, type D, press ENTER, and select the line number; the line will be deleted with no additional prompting.

Line Permissions Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ User Setup ➔ Edit Permissions ➔ Line Permissions. Line Name 1. WAN1 2. WAN2 3. WAN3 4. WAN4 . . 13. WAN13 14. WAN14 15. WAN15 16. WAN16 D: Delete Esc: Prev Menu

45 RASExpress User Guide

The Lines Permitted menu lists the WAN ports the user is permitted to use. If any ports have been deleted, type A and press ENTER to add to the list of lines. The Add Permission menu appears with a list of deleted ports. Type the number of a deleted port and press ENTER to add it to the Lines Permitted list. Press ESC to close the Add Permission menu. To delete a port from the Lines Permitted list, type D, press ENTER, and select the port number; the port is deleted with no additional prompting. Press ESC to quit the Lines Permitted list.

Protocol Permissions Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ User Setup ➔ Edit Permissions ➔ Protocol Permissions. 1. Internet Protocol - IP 2. Internetwork Packet Exchange - IPX 3. Spanning Tree Protocol D: Delete Esc: Prev Menu

The Protocols Permitted menu lists the network protocols the user is permitted to use. If one or more of the three protocols have been deleted from the list, type A and press ENTER to add a protocol. The Add Permission menu appears with a list of deleted protocols. To add a deleted protocol to the Protocols Permitted list, type its number and press ENTER. Press ESC to close the Add Permission menu. To delete a line from the Protocols Permitted list, type D, press ENTER, and select the line number; the line is deleted with no additional prompting.

Time of Day Logins Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ User Setup ➔ Edit Permissions ➔ Time of day Logins.

Time of Day Logins Setup 00:00 06:00 12:00 18:00 Sunday ----******************************************** Monday --********************************************** Tuesday --********************************************** Wednesday --********************************************** Thursday --********************************************** Friday --********************************************** Saturday --********************************************** Press ESC to return to prev menu

The Time of Day Logins Setup display shows the times during which the user is allowed to dial in or out. RASExpress divides the week into half-hour blocks, starting at midnight. An asterisk (*) indicates that the user is allowed to call during the half hour block. A hyphen (-) indicates that the user is not allowed to call during the half hour block. By default, the user is allowed to call at any time.

Note: Time of day logins can be changed only through Telnet command mode (Appendix C), the RASCON utility for DOS (page 305), or MultiManager (page 187).

46 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Connection Time Limit Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ User Setup ➔ Edit Permissions ➔ Connection time limits. Current connection time limit is 0 minutes Enter new value for connection time limit for user in minutes:

Use Connection Time Limit to limit how long the user can remain connected. If the user exceeds the time limit shown in this screen, the RASExpress server automatically disconnects the user. A value of zero (the default) indicates no limit. To save your changes, press ENTER. To return to the previous menu, press ESC.

Terminal Login Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ User Setup ➔ Edit Permissions ➔ Terminal Login. [ 1] Auto Login Protocol : None [ 2] Login Host Name : [ESC] to go to previous menu

Select Auto Login Protocol to choose the protocol the user will use to automatically log on to a host computer. Choose Telnet, Rlogin, or None. None disables auto login altogether. Select Login Host Name to type the IP address of the host computer.

Tunneling Menu Path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ User Setup ➔ Edit Permissions ➔ Tunneling [ 1] Tunneling Protocol : PPTP [ 2] Tunnel Server IP Address :

Select Tunneling Protocol to choose a tunneling protocol for the user. You can select PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) or None, which disables tunneling altogether. If you select PPTP, type the IP address of the PPTP server in the Tunnel Server IP Address option.

47 RASExpress User Guide

Communication Setup

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Communication Setup. [ 1] ISI Setup [ 2] ISDN Primary Rate Interface

From the Communication Setup menu, select the type of communications card you want to configure: ISI (analog modem) or ISDN Primary Rate Interface.

ISI Setup Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Communication Setup ➔ ISI Setup. ISI608 Card Setup Card No Base Address Irq Level Number Of Ports

1 210 10 8 2 220 11 8 3 230 12 8

A: Add a card D: Delete a card M: Modify card settings E: Edit Line Information ESC: Prev menu

When you select ISI (intelligent serial interface) from the Communication Setup menu, the ISI608 Card Setup menu appears. This menu shows the card number, base address, IRQ level, and number of ports for each installed ISI card. To modify the card settings, first select the action, then select the card you want to modify. To add a card to the list, type A and press ENTER. To delete a card, type D, press ENTER and follow the prompts. To modify a card setting, type M and press ENTER. To edit line information, type E and press ENTER.

Board Information Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Communication Setup ➔ Multitech ISI Setup ➔ Add or Modify. 1. Base Address : 210 2. Irq : 10 3. Number of Ports : 08 4. CardType : ISA_4608 Select the field to modify (ESC Prev Menu)

Use the Board Information menu to create or modify the port settings for an ISI card. The port settings consist of a base address, IRQ number, and the number of ports on the card. To change any setting, select the option and type a new value.

Note: Setting the wrong base address and IRQ value can lead to unpredictable results.

Base Address The base I/O address for the ISI card in hexadecimal format. It provides the RASExpress server with information about card activity, and allows the card to use one interrupt for all ports on the card. Each card must have a unique base I/O address number.

48 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

IRQ Number This is the interrupt number for the ISI card. An IRQ requests the attention of RASExpress and the server’s microprocessor. The IRQ number used for each card must be unique.

Number of Ports This is the number of ports on the ISI card.

Card Type The type of modem card installed at the base address.

Edit Line Information Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Communication Setup ➔ ISI Setup ➔ Edit Line Information. When you select Edit Line Information and select a card, the List of Lines menu appears. The List of Lines menu lists the physical ports on the selected card. Type the number of the line you want to edit, and press ENTER. The Line Information menu appears. The Line Information menu lists the parameters that can be configured for the selected port. To edit a parameter, type its number, press ENTER, and type or select the new value. 1. Line Status : enabled 2. General Name : MODEM 3. Specific Name : B1_5634_PCI_1 4. Modem Name : MultiISI5634-PCI 5. Connection Started By : Data Carrier Detect 6. Baud Rate : 115200 7. Data Bits : 8 8. Stop Bits : 1 9. Parity : NONE 10. RTS/CTS Flow control : enabled Select the field to modify (ESC Prev Menu):

Line Status Shows whether the port is enabled or disabled.

General Name Describes the general name for the port. The general name is used by the workstation MCSI software to take the line.

Specific Name Shows the specific name for the port. The specific name shows the card number (B1), the card type (5634_PCI), and the modem number on the card (1).

Modem Name Shows the model name of the modem used for the port. To change the modem name, select Modem Name and press ENTER. When the List of Modems window appears, select the new modem name and press ENTER.

Connection Started By Selects how the RASExpress server detects a dial-in connection. When the Modem Response option is selected, the server starts a dial-in connection when the modem responds with a CONNECT string. When the Data Carrier Detect option is selected, the server starts a dial-in connection when the DCD signal goes high.

49 RASExpress User Guide

Baud Rate Selects the baud rate used by the port. You can select a rate up to 460800 bps.

Data Bits Selects the number of data bits used by the port.

Stop Bits Selects the number of stop bits used by the port.

Parity Selects the type of parity used by the port.

RTS/CTS Flow Control Selects hardware flow control on the port. The options are enabled and disabled.

ISDN Primary Rate Interface Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Communication Setup ➔ ISDN Primary Rate Interface.

[ 1] ISDN Primary Rate Interface : enabled [ 2] I/O Address : 2f0 [ 3] IRQ Number : 7 [ 4] Memory Address : d000 [ 5] No Of Ports : 23 [ESC] to go to previous menu

Use the ISDN Primary Rate Interface menu to modify settings for an ISDN PRI communication card. To change a setting, select the field and type a new value.

ISDN Primary Rate Interface Use this field to enable or disable ISDN PRI support by the RASExpress server. Enable it only if an ISDN PRI card is installed in the server

I/O Address This is the base I/O address for the PRI card in hexadecimal format. It provides the RASExpress server with information about card activity, and allows the card to use one interrupt for all ports on the card. Only one PRI card can be used on a RAS- Express server. The I/O address must be unique.

IRQ Number This is the IRQ number for the PRI card. The IRQ number must be unique. The IRQ requests the attention of RASExpress and the server’s microprocessor.

Memory Address The PRI card shares memory with the RASExpress server for internal communication. Type the shared memory address into this field in hexadecimal format.

Number of Ports Select the number of ports available to the ISDN PRI card. In North America, 23 data channels are standard; in Europe 30 data channels are standard.

50 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Modem Setup

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Modem Setup. Use the Modem Setup menu to create and edit configurations for your modems. A configuration is implemented when you select the modem name. When you select Modem Setup, the List of Modems menu appears. You can add a modem to this list, delete it, or modify the default settings of the modem. If your modem type is not listed, type A and press ENTER. When the Modem Information menu appears, insert the required information.

To edit the settings for a modem, type M and press ENTER. Next, select the modem number. The Modem Information menu appears with the following options. 1. Modem Name : MultiISI ISI5634-PCI 2. Initialization string 1 : AT&FX4&C1&D2V1S91=17&S0S108=0S0=1 3. Initialization string 2 : 4. Initialization string 3 : 5. Initialization string 4 : 6. Initialization string 5 : 7. Dial prefix string : ATDT 8. Dial suffix string : 9. Hangup string : +++ATH0 10. NO CARRIER string : NO CARRIER 11. NO DIALTONE string : NO DIALTONE 12. NO ANSWER string : NO ANSWER 13. Connect response string : CONNECT 14. OK string : OK 15. ERROR string : ERROR 16. RING string : RING 17. BUSY string : BUSY Select the field to modify (S to Save, ESC to Cancel):

Modem Name Shows the model name of the modem. Enter a new modem name only if it is not listed in the List of Modems menu.

Initializing String 1–5 These fields display the initialization string or strings used to configure the modem when power is applied or the modem is reset. Changing preconfigured modem strings is not recommended. If you want to use a custom initialization string, create and name a new modem configuration. Then copy information from one of the listed modems and modify the string as required.

Dial Prefix Displays the dial prefix, which is automatically sent to the modem before the phone number. The default prefix is the tone dialing command ATDT.

Dial Suffix Displays the dial suffix, which is automatically sent to the modem after the phone number. This field is normally empty.

Hangup String Displays the command string used to end a call.

51 RASExpress User Guide

NO CARRIER string, NO DIALTONE string, NO ANSWER string, Connect Response string, OK string, ERROR string, RING string, BUSY string These fields display the modem’s result codes, which are used by RASExpress to monitorg calls. They should be spelled exactly the same as the modem sends them. By default, these fields are set for verbose responses. If your modem is set for terse responses, refer to your modem’s owner’s manual for information about the responses.

Administrator Setup

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Administrator Setup.

Serial_No AdministratorName 1. ADMIN1 2. ADMIN2 A:Add D:Delete E:Edit Esc: Prev Menu

Select Administrator Setup to display or edit a list of administrators. Administrators are users with administrative rights. To add an administrator to the list, type A and press ENTER; to edit an entry, type E and press ENTER. Both actions open a menu in which you can edit the administrator’s user name, password, and configuration and management permissions.

[ 1] Name : ADMIN1 [ 2] Password : **************** [ 3] Permissions [ESC] to go to previous menu

Name The administrator’s user name.

Password The administrator’s password. You must type the password twice to confirm it

Permissions Dislays the administrator’s permissions. Up to two permissions can be listed: Configuration and Management. If Configuration is listed, the administrator can configure the RASExpress server. If Management is listed, the administrator can manage the RASExpress server and view statistics. If neither is listed, the administrator can only view statistics. The default is neither. To add a permission to the list, type A and press ENTER. To delete a permission from the list, type E and press ENTER.

52 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Filter Setup

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Configuration of Server ➔ Filter Setup.

Serial_No List Of Templates [ 1] Filter_SNMP [ 2] Filter_Web [ 3] Forward_only_Web [ 4] Telnet_Filter A: Add D: Delete E: Edit Esc: Prev Menu

Select Filter Setup to add, edit, or delete a filter template. A filter template can be used to selectively forward or filter inbound and/or outbound packets. To add a filter to the list, type A and press ENTER; to edit a filter, type E and press ENTER. Both actions open a menu in which you can edit the filter template name, description, and pattern.

[ 1] Filter Template Name : Filter_SNMP [ 2] Filter Template Description : Filter SNMP packets [ 3] View PatternList [ESC] to go to previous menu

To edit the filter template’s pattern list, type 3 and press ENTER. If you are editing an existing filter template, a list of patterns appears:

Serial_No PatternClass Usage Action [ 1] IP input filter [ 2] IP input filter A: Add D: Delete E: Edit Esc: Prev Menu

To add a new pattern to the list, type A and press ENTER. A list of pattern classes appears:

[ 1] Generic [2]IP [3]IPX [ESC] to go to previous menu

Type the number for the class of filtering you want to do, and press ENTER. The menu that appears depends on your selection; the following one is for an IP filter:

[ 1] Usage : input [ 2] Action : forward [ 3] Operation : or [ 4] IP Source Address Mask : 000.000.000.000 [ 5] IP Source Address Result : 000.000.000.000 [ 6] IP Destination Address Mask : 000.000.000.000 [ 7] IP Destination Address Result : 000.000.000.000 [ 8] IP Protocol : TCP [ 9] IP Source Port Begin : 0 [ 10] IP Source Port End : 0 [ 11] IP Destination Port Begin : 0 [ 12] IP Destination Port End : 0 [ESC] to go to previous menu

To change an option, type its number and press ENTER, and then select the appropriate option from the menu that appears.

53 RASExpress User Guide

For more information about filter templates, see Appendix D, “Creating Filter Templates.”

54 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Management of Server

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server. [ 1] Server Information [ 2] User Information [ 3] Line Information [ 4] Statistics [ 5] Display EIA Signals [ 6] Display Port Addresses [ 7] Inbound UserList [ESC] to go to main menu

Select Management of Server to view current activity on the RASExpress server, to view statistics for a given period, and to change selected settings. The following topics describe submenus that can be selected from the Management of Server menu.

Server Information

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Server Information. [ 1] General Information [ 2] Statistics Summary [ 3] Version [ 4] Reboot Server [ 5] Current LogStatus [ 6] Set Server Time [ 7] Restart Server [ESC] to go to main menu

General Information Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Server Information ➔ General Information.

Supervisor Password : **************** Log Status : enabled Write Error Messages into file : enabled Message File : C:\RAS560\SERVER.MSG Screen Saver : disabled Connection manager menu : disabled Command to MultiModem Manager : disabled ESC : Prev Menu

This screen gives general information about the RASExpress server. None of the parameters can be changed from this screen.

Supervisor Password For security, this field displays only asterisks.

Log Status Shows whether the call log is enabled or disabled. The default is disabled. When enabled is selected, RASExpress logs all calls for one hour in the file yyyymmdd.LOG, where yyyymmdd is the year, month, and date the log was created. Saved logs are given the extensions .L00–.L23 for each date.

55 RASExpress User Guide

Write Error Messages into File When this field is enabled, RASExpress saves all messages into a message file. The default is disabled.

Message File This field shows the name and path of the message file. The default file name is SERVER.MSG.

Screen Saver This field shows the status of the RASExpress screen saver.

Connection Manager Menu When this field is enabled, the Connection Manager menu is displayed to a user calling into the RASExpress server for remote control operations. If it is disabled, the Host List is displayed to the user.

Command to MultiModemManager When this field is enabled, RASExpress sends the LOGON user name to a MultiModemManager rack or PC. You can then determine, via the Call Status window in MultiCommManager, which users are dialing out.

Note: This option applies only to RNI08 and RNGCOM servers connected to MultiModemManager racks. It does not apply to MiniArray, MultiArray, or CommPlete servers.

Statistics Summary Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Server Information ➔ Statistics Summary.

Server Name : SERVER_1 Time Server Invoked : Aug 1, 2000 Tue 14:29:51 Current Time : Aug 8, 2000 Tue 13:35:54 ServerUp Time : 6 Days, 23 Hours, 5 Minutes, 3 Seconds Busy Lines : 0 Total dial in calls : 0 Total dial out calls : 0 Users waiting for dial in : 0 Total pkts sent to LAN : 110315 Total pkts recv from LAN : 138497 Total bytes sent to LAN : 14234006 Total bytes recv from LAN : 15066870 Total bytes sent to lines : 0 Total bytes recv from lines : 0

:Prev Menu :Refresh :Reset

Select Statistics Summary to display a statistical summary of server activity since the server was last started. To refresh the display with current information, type R and press ENTER. To reset the statistics to zero, type U and press ENTER.

56 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Version Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Server Information ➔ Version. ServerName : SERVER_1 Version : 5.60 Number Of Cards : 3 Number Of Lines : 24 Card Number : 1 Base Address : 210 IRQ : 10 Card Number : 2 Base Address : 220 IRQ : 11 Card Number : 3 Base Address : 230 IRQ : 12 ESC: Prev Menu

The Version Information screen displays basic information about the RASExpress server, including the version number of the RASExpress software loaded on the server.

Reboot Server Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Server Information ➔ Reboot Server. To reboot the RASExpress server, select Reboot Server from the Server Information menu, and then answer Y to the confirmation question. If you want only to restart the ISI drivers without rebooting the computer, select the Restart Server option instead.

Current Log Status Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Server Information ➔ Current Log Status.

Log Status : OPEN Log start time : Aug 8, 2000 Tue 14:00:01 Log stop time : Aug 8, 2000 Tue 15:00:00 Current Time : Aug 8, 2000 Tue 14:35:11 Time Left : 0 Hours, 24 Minutes, 49 Seconds T: Toggle Log Status ESC: Prev Menu Enter your choice:

Displays current log information. To start or stop a log, type T and press ENTER.

Set Server Time Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Server Information ➔ Set Server Time. [ 1] Server Time (HH:MM:SC) : 14:35:11 [ESC] Previous Menu

Displays the server time. To set the time, press 1, then press ENTER, and type the new time in the 24-hour format hours:minutes:seconds.

Restart Server Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Server Information ➔ Restart Server. To restart the drivers for the ISI cards, select Restart Server from the Server Information menu, and answer Y to the confirmation question. Use this option to

57 RASExpress User Guide

load new settings that require reloading of the ISI drivers; it is faster than rebooting the server.

User Information

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Server Information ➔ User Information. Select User Information to see a list of users, if you have created a user list: 1. USER1 2. USER2 3. USER3 4. USER4 5. USER5 6. USER6 7. USER7 8. USER8 ESC: Prev Menu

Line Information

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Line Information.

Line General Name Specific Name User Name Status 1 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_1 WAITING FOR CALL 2 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_2 WAITING FOR CALL 3 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_3 WAITING FOR CALL 4 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_4 WAITING FOR CALL 5 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_5 WAITING FOR CALL ...... 12 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_4 WAITING FOR CALL 13 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_5 WAITING FOR CALL 14 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_6 WAITING FOR CALL 15 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_7 WAITING FOR CALL 16 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_8 WAITING FOR CALL D: Disconnect R: Reset Line O: Put Line Out of Service E: Enable Line V: View Line Statistics F: Refresh N: Next Page Esc: Prev Menu Enter the choice:

This menu displays information about the current status of each of the RASExpress server’s phone lines. Through this menu you can disconnect, reset, enable, put out of service, change the settings, or view the statistics of each line.

Line Shows the index number of each line. After you type an action letter (such as R for Reset), you must type the number of the line that you want the action to apply to.

General Name Shows the type of communication device that is on the line.

Specific Name Shows the specific name for the communication device. The specific name is unique to the device. It shows the card number, the card type, and the line number of the device on the card. For example, line 16 (B2_5634_PCI_8) is line 8 of card 2.

58 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

User Name Shows which users are currently online with the RASExpress server.

Status Shows the line type, which can be RN, for remote node; IN, for inbound; or OUT, for outbound. It also shows the line status, which can be WAITING FOR CALL, ON LINE, WAITING TO CALL, CALLING BACK, OUT OF SERVICE, INITIALIZING, or TELNET ON LINE.

Next Page To view more lines, type N and press ENTER.

Disconnect Line To disconnect a line, type D and press ENTER . Type the number of the line you want to disconnect, then press ENTER. The line immediately disconnects, and the message WAITING TO CALL appears in the Status column.

Reset Line To reset a line, type R and press ENTER. Type the number of the line you want to reset, then press ENTER. The word INITIALIZING appears in the Status column as the line’s modem is reset to its initial state.

Put Line Out of Service To put a line out of service, type O and press ENTER. Type the number of the line you want to put out of service, then press ENTER. The message OUT OF SERVICE appears in the Status column the next time you refresh the screen.

Enable Line To enable a line that has been taken out of service, type E and press ENTER. Type the number of the line you want to enable, then press ENTER. The word INITIALIZING appears in the Status column as the line device is enabled.

Refresh Press F to refresh the screen with current information.

View Line Statistics To view the statistics of a single line, type V and press ENTER. Type the number of the line you want to view, then press ENTER. A screen similar to the following one appears. After you view it, press ESC to return to the previous menu.

Line Name : MODEM : B1_5634_PCI_1 Status : WAITING FOR CALL Current time : Aug 8, 2000 Tue 14:45:51 Connect time : Line Parameters : User Name : Calling Party ID : Network Address : 00000000 Node Address : 000000000000 Line tx throughput : 0 Line rx throughput : 0 Bytes tx to line : 0 Bytes rx from line : 0 Packets tx to user : 0 Packets rx from user : 0 Total bytes tx to line: 0 Total bytes rx from line: 0 Total dial in calls : 0 Total dial out calls : 0

:Prev Menu :Refresh :Reset

59 RASExpress User Guide

Statistics

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics.

[ 1] Display General Statistics [ 2] Display IP Statistics [ 3] Display IPX Statistics [ 4] Display PPP Statistics [ 5] Display Port Statistics [ 6] Display DialIn/DialOut Statistics [ 7] Display Line Usage Statistics [ 8] Display Modem Connect String Table [ 9] Display Line Utilization Table [10] Display Call History [11] Display Multichassis Bonding Table

Use the Statistics menu to review RASExpress server activity.

Display General Statistics Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display General Statistics. Port Type Port Throughput Pending Bytes Total Bytes (Line) Send Receive Send Receive Send Receive 1 ANALOG 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 ANALOG 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 ANALOG 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 ANALOG 0 0 0 0 0 0 ...... 21 ANALOG 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 ANALOG 0 0 0 0 0 0 23 ANALOG 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 ANALOG 0 0 0 0 0 0 :Prev Menu :Refresh :Reset

The General Statistics screen displays current statistics for each line that is active. To refresh the display type R and press ENTER. To reset the statistics to zero, type R and press ENTER. The Port Throughput columns display throughput activity (in bytes per second in near real-time) when sending and receiving data to and from the port. The Pending Bytes columns display the number of bytes that are waiting to be processed. The Total Bytes columns display the total number of bytes that have been sent to and received from the port during the current connection. When the line is waiting for a call or is idle, all values in these columns are zero.

Display IP Statistics Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display IP Statistics. [ 1] ARP Statistics [ 2] Router Statistics [ 3] UDP / TCP Statistics [ 4] List Routing Table [ 5] List TCP Connection Table [ESC] to go to previous menu

Use the Display IP Statistics menu to review IP statistics since the RASExpress server was last started.

60 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

ARP Statistics Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display IP Statistics ➔ ARP Statistics . << ARP Statistics >> Requests Received : 620 Replies Sent : 367 Packets with Bad Length Field : 0 Packets with Unsupported Hardware Type : 0 Packets with Unsupported Protocol Type Field : 0 Packets with Bad Address : 0 Requests Sent : 0 : Prev Menu : Refresh The ARP Statistics screen displays ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) statistics since the RASExpress server was last started. To refresh the display press R.

Router Statistics Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display IP Statistics ➔ Router Statistics .

<< IP General Statistics >> Packets Received : 26616 Packets Forwarded : 0 Packets Transmitted : 28570 Packets that could not be Forwarded : 0 Packets Received with Header Errors : 0 << ICMP Statistics >> Echo Request Messages Received : 0 Echo Response Messages Transmitted : 0 Destination Unreachable Messages Received : 0 Destination Unreachable Messages Transmitted : 0 Redirect Messages Received : 0 Redirect Messages Transmitted : 0 Parameter Problem Messages Received : 0 Parameter Problem Messages Transmit : 0 << RIP Statistics >> Request Packets Received : 1 Response Packets Transmitted : 21170 Request Packets Transmitted : 1 Response Packets Received : 21166 : Prev Menu : Refresh The Router Statistics screen displays IP (Internet Protocol), ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol), and RIP (Routing Information Protocol) statistics since the RASExpress server was last started.

61 RASExpress User Guide

UDP / TCP Statistics Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display IP Statistics ➔ UDP / TCP Statistics. << UDP Statistics >> Packets Received : 21211 Packets Sent : 21220 Packets Received with Unreachable Destination : 0 Packets Received with Errors : 0

<< TCP Statistics >> Number of Successful Connections : 239 Number of Connection Attempt Failures : 0 Packets Received : 5416 Packets Transmitted : 7338 Number of Retransmissions : 30 Packets Received with Errors : 0 Packets Transmitted with RST : 0 : Prev Menu : Refresh The UDP / TCP Statistics screen displays UDP (User Datagram Protocol) and TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) statistics since the RASExpress server last started.

List Routing Table Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display IP Statistics ➔ List Routing Table. Network Next Hop Mask Metric Port 127.000.000.001 Direct Delivery 255.255.255.255 0 50 192.168.090.004 Direct Delivery 255.255.255.255 0 50 192.168.090.000 Direct Delivery 255.255.255.000 1 1 :Prev Menu :Refresh The Routing Table shows IP routing information for the RASExpress server’s router, including the network address, forwarding address, subnet mask, metric (hop count), and the port number through which the IP address can be reached.

62 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

List TCP Connection Table Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display IP Statistics ➔ List TCP Connection Table.

TCP Connection Table Local Address : 192.168.090.004 Local Port : 6000 Remote Address : 000.000.000.000 Remote Port : 0 Connect Time : Connection Up Time : Connection State : LISTEN User Name : . . . Local Address : 192.168.090.004 Local Port : 23 Remote Address : 192.168.090.005 Remote Port : 1503 Connect Time : Aug 8, 1999 Sun 10:49:18 Connection Up Time : 5 Hours, 33 Minutes, 35 Seconds Connection State : ESTAB User Name : SUPERVISOR

...more. Press to continue.

The TCP Connection Table shows TCP connection information for each of the server’s local ports.

Display IPX Statistics Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display IPX Statistics. [ 1] List Routing Table [ 2] List SAP Table [ESC] to go to previous menu

Use the Display IPX Statistics menu to review IPX statistics since the RASExpress server was last started.

List Routing Table Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display IPX Statistics ➔ List Routing Table. Network Hops Ticks 00abcdef 1 1 00000003 1 1 12345001 1 1 00000024 2 2 12345002 1 1 12345003 1 1 :Prev Menu :Refresh The Routing Table shows IPX (Internet Packet Exchange) routing information for the RASExpress server’s router.

63 RASExpress User Guide

List SAP Table Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display IPX Statistics ➔ List SAP Table. Type Network Node Socket Hops Server 0026 00abcdef 000000000001 8000 1 SERVER_1 0026 00abcdef 000000000001 8000 1 SERVER_2 0335 12345001 00080080024d 828d 1 SERVER_2 :Prev Menu :Refresh

The SAP Table shows SAP (Service Access Point) information for the RASExpress server.

Display PPP Statistics Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display PPP Statistics. LCP Statistics (bytes) NCP Statistics (bytes) Mapped to Port Send Receive Send Receive Type Port 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 ...... 200000 210000 220000 230000 240000 :Prev Menu :Refresh :Reset

The PPP Statistics screen displays the number of Link Control Protocol (LCP) and Network Control Protocol (NCP) bytes sent or received for each active WAN port. LCP packets are usually exchanged only during the establishment of the PPP connection. The NCP statistics include both IPX and IP packets. Information is displayed only for remote node lines. For remote control connections, all values are zero.

64 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Display Port Statistics Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display Port Statistics. Line Name 1 LAN 2 WAN1 3 WAN2 4 WAN3 5 WAN4 ...... 21 WAN20 22 WAN21 23 WAN22 24 WAN23 25 WAN24 P: Prev Page Esc: Prev Menu Enter the choice :

Type the number of the port you want to view, and press ENTER. Then select whether you want to view IPX or IP port statistics. Screens similar to the following ones appear. After you view each screen, press ESC to return to the previous menu. Information is displayed only for remote node lines. For remote control connections, all values are zero. << IP Port LAN Statistics >> 1. IP Packets Received : 13539 2. Packets Sent : 15683 3. IP Router Packets Forwarded : 0 4. Packets Redirected : 0 5. Received Packets Filtered : 0 6. Transmit Packets Filtered : 0 7. IP Router Packets Not Forwarded : 13832 8. Short Packets Received : 0 :Prev Menu :Refresh :Reset

<< IPX Port LAN Statistics >> 802.3 802.2 TYPE II SNAP 1. Packets Received : 11749 8680 5876 5877 2. Packets Sent : 5897 5886 5884 5885 3. Packets Forwarded : 5000 4. Packets to Route : 7000 5. Receive Packets Filtered : 0000 6. Transmit Packets Filtered : 0000 7. Packets Hop Count too Large : 0000 8. Path Not Found Packets : 2000 9. Transmit Packets Discarded : 0000 10. Large Packets Received : 0000

:Prev Menu :Refresh :Reset

65 RASExpress User Guide

Display Dial In/Dial Out Statistics Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display DialIn/DialOut Statistics. Port Type Total Dial In Calls Total Dial Out Calls 1 ANALOG 0 0 2 ANALOG 0 0 3 ANALOG 0 0 4 ANALOG 0 0 5 ANALOG 0 0 ...... 20 ANALOG 0 0 21 ANALOG 0 0 22 ANALOG 0 0 23 ANALOG 0 0 24 ANALOG 0 0

:Prev Menu :Refresh

The Dial In/Dial Out Statistics screen displays the line type and total number of incoming and outgoing calls for each line since the last reboot of the server.

Display Line Usage Statistics Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display Line Usage Statistics. Port Type Time Used by Current User Total Time Used DD:HH:MM:SS DD:HH:MM:SS 1 ANALOG 00:00:38:12 32:07:33:57 2 ANALOG 30:21:37:02 3 ANALOG 00:01:09:42 31:16:38:22 4 ANALOG 00:00:11:34 29:23:55:09 5 ANALOG 28:00:32:53 ...... 20 ANALOG 00:01:02:13 22:02:51:21 21 ANALOG 00:00:29:40 23:09:41:10 22 ANALOG 21:21:43:12 23 ANALOG 20:12:36:38 24 ANALOG 20:07:56:18 :Prev Menu :Refresh

The Line Usage Statistics screen displays the type of connection for each line, how long the current user has been online, and the total time the line has been in use since the RASExpress server last started.

66 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Display Modem Connect String Table Menu Path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display Modem Connect String Table.

Port Connect String

1 Connect 33600 LAPM Compressed 2 Not Connected 3 Not Connected 4 Not Connected 5 Not Connected . . . 20 Not Connected 21 Not Connected 22 Not Connected 23 Not Connected 24 Not Connected

:Prev Menu :Refresh

The Modem Connect String Table displays the connect string for each current connection.

Display Line Utilization Table Menu Path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display Line Utilization Table. Line General Name Specific Name 1 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_1 2 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_2 3 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_3 4 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_4 5 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_5 ...... 12 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_4 13 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_5 14 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_6 15 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_7 16 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_8 P: Prev Page Esc: Prev Menu Enter the choice :

Type the number of the line whose utilization statistics you want to view, and then press ENTER. A table appears that displays the total number of calls at each connect speed.

67 RASExpress User Guide

Display Call History Menu Path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Statistics ➔ Display Call History. Line General Name Specific Name 1 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_1 2 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_2 3 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_3 4 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_4 5 MODEM B1_5634_PCI_5 ...... 12 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_4 13 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_5 14 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_6 15 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_7 16 MODEM B2_5634_PCI_8 P: Prev Page Esc: Prev Menu Enter the choice :

Type the number of the line whose call history you want to view, and press ENTER. A screen appears that displays information about the line's last ten calls. The information includes the connect string, the user name, the connect and disconnect times, the duration of each completed call, and the daylight savings (if any) in minutes.

Display EIA Signals

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Display EIA Signals. Port DTR DSR RTS CTS CD RI 1 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 2 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 3 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 4 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 5 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ...... 20 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 21 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 22 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 23 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 24 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF :Prev Menu :Refresh

The EIA Signals screen displays the current status of the EIA RS-232 signals on each line. DTR and RTS are sent by the port. CTS, DSR, DCD, and RI are received by the port. The DSR signal is not used by the RASExpress server. The status for each signal can be either ON or OFF.

68 3 Terminal and Telnet Management

Display Port Addresses

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Display Port Addresses.

IPX Addresses IP Addresses Port Network Address Local Remote Subnet Mask 1 1234500c 192.168.090.004 From Address Pool 255.255.255.000 2 12345004 192.168.090.004 From Address Pool 255.255.255.000 3 12345005 192.168.090.004 From Address Pool 255.255.255.000 4 12345006 192.168.090.004 From Address Pool 255.255.255.000 5 12345007 192.168.090.004 From Address Pool 255.255.255.000 ...... 20 12345017 192.168.090.004 From Address Pool 255.255.255.000 21 12345018 192.168.090.004 From Address Pool 255.255.255.000 22 12345019 192.168.090.004 From Address Pool 255.255.255.000 23 1234501a 192.168.090.004 From Address Pool 255.255.255.000 24 1234501b 192.168.090.004 From Address Pool 255.255.255.000

:Prev Menu :Refresh

The Port Addresses screen displays the IPX and IP addresses for each port on the RASExpress server. The IPX Network Address is that of the remote node client connecting to the port. The IP Local Address is the IP address for the server side of the connection. The IP Remote Address is the IP address of the client. Note that these parameters are displayed only for remote node (PPP) connections.

Inbound User List

Menu path: Main Menu ➔ Management of Server ➔ Inbound User List. Select Inbound User List to display a list of users waiting for a remote control session. If there are users waiting for a dial-in remote control session on the RASExpress server, then a list appears telling you who and how many users are waiting. If no users are waiting, a message appears that says so. This option applies only to remote control. The listed users are the logon names of users waiting to be taken over. These names would also be displayed in the Host List if you dialed in for a remote control session.

69 RASExpress User Guide

70 4 Browser Management

71 RASExpress User Guide

Introduction

You can manage or configure the RASExpress server from anywhere in the world by using a Web browser. To access the RASExpress server, simply type the IP address of the server into the browser’s URL field and follow the prompts to log in. In the RASExpress server’s Web pages, click the hypertext links to configure or manage the server. To change the value of an option, click the option box and type or select a new value. To save your changes, click the Submit button. To cancel your changes, click the Reset button. To return to the home page and main menus, click Back to main page.

Note: When you finish configuring a server, you must click Close Configuration at the bottom of the main page. If you do not, the server locks out the ability to configure it for three minutes. Neither Telnet nor MultiManager can access the server until the time expires. There is no way to adjust the three-minute period.

Main Page

The main page is the default page that appears when you connect to the RASExpress server. It is also your control center for the RASExpress server. If your browser can display frames, the main page appears in frame view, as shown in the following illustration.

If your browser cannot display frames, or if you select Standard View from the Display menu, RASExpress appears as shown in the following illustration. Scroll down to see more lines and the main menus.

72 4 Browser Management

Tip: If the page is too crowded, try reducing your browser’s font size.

Line Name This column shows the names of all lines served by the RASExpress server.

Type This column shows each line’s type assignment, which can be RN, for remote node; IN, for inbound; or OUT, for outbound.

Line Status This column shows the status of each line. Status messages are WAITING FOR CALL, ON LINE, WAITING TO CALL, CALLING BACK, OUT OF SERVICE, INITIALIZING,andTELNET ON LINE.

User Name This column shows who is currently using each line.

Connect Time This column shows the time at which the line connected for the current call.

Caller ID If Caller ID is active, this column shows Caller ID information about the current call.

73 RASExpress User Guide

Configuration of Server Menu

The Configuration of Server menu appears in the left frame in the framed view, and near the bottom of the page in the standard view. To configure the RASExpress server, click the hypertext links in the menu.

Configuration of Server:

• Server Configuration • User Configuration • Administrator Configuration • IP Remote Access • IPX Remote Access • Point to Point Protocol • Multilink PPP • MAC Layer Bridging • Virtual Port Setup • Physical Port Setup • Telnet • SNTP Setup • SNMP Setup • SMTP Setup • Applications • Security • ISI Setup • ISDN PRI Setup • Modem Setup • OSPF Setup • OSPF Area Settings • OSPF Interface Settings • Filter Setup • Config File Setup

74 4 Browser Management

Server Configuration

Use this page to review the basic operational setup of the RASExpress server, to turn logs on and off, and to set the call log’s start date and time.

Server Name Use this option to assign a unique name to the RASExpress server. The server name is broadcast on the Novell network. It is also used by MultiManager to monitor RASExpress server statistics.

Supervisor Password Use this option to assign a supervisor password. This password is case-sensitive. It locks the local console and prevents regular users from running MultiManager and making changes to the RASExpress server.

Confirm Supervisor Password Type the supervisor password again to confirm it.

Log Status Use this option to turn the call log on or off. The default is OFF. When the call log is on, RASExpress logs all calls for one hour in the file yyyymmdd.LOG, where yyyymmdd is the year, month, and day the log was created. The 24 saved logs for each date are given the extensions .L00–.L23.

Log Number of Days Specify the number of days ,up to seven, that you want log files to remain on the server’s hard disk. Log files older than the specified number of days are automatically erased. This option prevents old log files from filling the disk.

75 RASExpress User Guide

Log Start Date You can start the call log automatically, if it is off, by entering the start date in the format month-day-year. When the date arrives, the log begins at the time specified in the Log Start Time field.

Log Start Time Enter the time at which you want the call log to automatically start, in the format hours:minutes:seconds.

Write Error Messages into File When this option is on, RASExpress saves all error and other messages it receives into a message file. The default is OFF.

Message File Use this option to specify the name of the message file. The default file name is SERVER.MSG.

PPP Connection Log Use this option to enable or disable the PPP connection log.

Screen Saver Use this option to turn the RASExpress screen saver on or off. The screen saver appears only on the monitor connected to the RASExpress server.

Connection Manager Menu Select ON to display the Connection Manager menu to a user calling into the RASExpress server for remote control operation. Select OFF to display the Host List to the user.

Command to MultiModemManager When this option is on, RASExpress sends the LOGON user name to a MultiModemManager rack or PC. You can then determine, via the Call Status window in MultiCommManager, which users are dialing out. Select OFF if MultiCommManager is not installed.

Note: This command applies only to RNI08 and RNGCOM servers connected to MultiModemManager racks. It does not apply to MiniArray, MultiArray, or CommPlete servers.

76 4 Browser Management

User Configuration

Select User Configuration to add users to the user database, to delete them from the user database, to edit user passwords and phone numbers, and to edit mode, line, protocol, time, and other permissions for each user.

The User Configuration page displays the list of users. To configure a user, select the user name in the list of users, then select the operation you want to perform in the Choose Operation box and click Submit. If you select Delete User, the user name is deleted from the list. If you select any other option, the User Information form or the Edit Permissions page appears. The Reset button has no function on this page.

77 RASExpress User Guide

User Information Form Enter basic information about the user in the User Information form. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the User Configuration page, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

User Name Type the user name in this field. This is the name a remote caller uses to log into the RASExpress server. It may not duplicate any other user name.

Password Type the password the user will use to log into the RASExpress server. The password is case-sensitive. It should be unique and easy for the user to remember. For security, the password characters are shown as a string of asterisks.

Confirm Password Retype the password to confirm it.

Remote User Enter Number Select ON to indicate that the user is mobile. When the user calls into the RASExpress server, RASExpress prompts the user to type his or her local telephone number. The server then disconnects and calls back the user at that number after the delay specified in the Callback Delay field.

Callback Number To enable callback security, type the user’s callback security phone number in this field. When a user calls in with a valid user name and password, the RASExpress server hangs up. Then, after the delay specified in the Callback Delay field, the RASExpress server calls back the user at the callback number. This field is valid only if the Remote User Enter Number field is disabled by selecting OFF.

78 4 Browser Management

Callback Delay This field sets the time in seconds that the RASExpress server must wait before calling back the user. The value entered in this field is valid only if the Remote User Enter Number field is set to ON or if a phone number has been entered in the Callback Number field.

Concurrent Logins The number of concurrent logins the user is permitted. A value of 0 indicates that there is no limit on the number of concurrent logins.

Note: For multilink connections, the number of concurrent logins permitted should be at least the number of links in the multilink bundle.

Static IP Address The user’s static IP address. A value of 000.000.000.000 indicates no static address.

Edit Permissions Use the Edit Permissions page to control the user’s access to the RASExpress server. The page is divided into the following sections, which can be found by scrolling: • Mode Permissions • Line Permissions • Protocol Permissions • Time of Day Logins • Connection Time Limit • Login Permissions • Tunneling Protocol

Mode Permissions

Mode Permissions lists the types of connections the user is permitted to use. By default, all modes are permitted. To change a mode permission, click the check box for the mode.

79 RASExpress User Guide

Line Permissions

The Line Permissions list shows which of the available WAN ports the user is permitted to use. To add or delete a port, click Modify Line Permissions. In the Line Numbers box, type the numbers of the lines you want the action to apply to, select the action you want to perform (Add or Delete), and then click Update.

Protocol Permissions

Protocol Permissions shows the network protocols the user is permitted to use. By default, all three protocols are permitted. To change a protocol permission, click the check box for the protocol.

Time of Day Logins

Time of Day Logins shows the times that the user is allowed to access the RASExpress server. RASExpress divides the week into half-hour blocks, starting at midnight. Y indicates that the user is allowed to call during the half hour block. N indicates that the user is not allowed to call during the half-hour block. By default, the user is allowed to call at any time.

80 4 Browser Management

Note: Time of day logins can be changed only through the RASCON utility for DOS (page 305), MultiManager (page 187) or Telnet command mode (Appendix C).

Connection Time Limit

Use Connection Time Limit to limit how long the user can remain connected. If the user exceeds the time limit displayed in the box, the RASExpress server automatically disconnects the user. A value of zero (the default value) indicates no time limit.

Use Login Permissions to select the protocol the user will use to automatically log on to a host computer. If you do not want the user to have auto login permission, select None. If you select Telnet or RLogin, type the IP address of the host computer in the Login Host Name box.

Tunneling Protocol

Use Tunneling Protocol to select a tunneling protocol for the user. You can select PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) or None, which disables tunneling altogether. If you select PPTP, type the IP address of the PPTP server in the Tunnel Server IP Address/DNS box. When you finish configuring permissions for the user, click Submit to save your changes. To exit without saving, click Reset..

81 RASExpress User Guide

Administrator Configuration

Select Administrator Configuration to display or edit a list of administrators. Administrators are users with administrative rights.

To configure an administrator, select the administrator name in the list of users, then select the operation you want to perform in the Choose an Operation box and click Submit. If you select Delete User, the administrator name is deleted from the list. If you select any other option, an Administrator Configuration form appears, in which you can edit the administrator’s user name, password, and configuration and management permissions.

82 4 Browser Management

User Name Type the administrator’s user name.

Password Type the administrator’s password.

Confirm Password Type the password again to confirm it

Permissions Select the administrator’s permissions. If Configuration is selected, the administrator can configure the RASExpress server. If Management is selected, the administrator can manage the RASExpress server and view statistics. If neither is selected, the administrator can only view statistics. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes

83 RASExpress User Guide

IP Remote Access

Use the IP Remote Access page to set up IP parameters that apply to IP routing on all ports. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

IP Remote Access Select Enabled to provide remote access on IP. This allows any remote PPP-compatible client to call in and access local TCP/IP hosts, such as WWW, FTP, Telnet, etc.

84 4 Browser Management

IP Subnet Mask Type the IP subnet mask for the RASExpress server. You can edit this field only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

IP Default Route Type the default IP route on the network on which the RASExpress server is installed. Any IP packets that cannot be routed by the RASExpress server are sent to this address. If there is no router on the network, the address should be filled with zeroes. You can edit this field only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

Primary Name Server Type the address of the primary name server used by the RASExpress server to resolve names to IP addresses for Telnet and RLOGIN clients dialing in from a dumb terminal. You can edit this field only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

Secondary Name Server Type the address of the secondary name server used by the RASExpress server. The secondary name server is used when the primary name server does not respond. You can edit this field only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

DNS Caching Server Enable to have the RASExpress server act as a DNS server. When this option is enabled, the RASExpress server gives out its IP address as the DNS server to dialing PPP clients.

IP Frame Type Selects the RASExpress server’s IP frame type. You can edit this field only if IP Remote Access is enabled. Two frame types are available: TYPE_II (default) and SNAP.

Remote Client IP Address Selects how the RASExpress server allocates IP addresses to remote client-to-LAN users. Select Use DHCP if you have a DHCP server on your LAN. Select Use Address Pool if the IP addresses you assign to the clients are continuous. Select Configure Per Port (the default) if you want to assign a specific address to each of the remote ports. Select Use Radius if you want to use your RADIUS server to assign IP addresses. For LAN-to-LAN ports you must configure all IP addresses manually.

IP RIP Enables or disables the IP Routing Information Protocol (RIP-2). Enable IP RIP if you want the RASExpress server to use RIP-2 for IP routing.

Auto Learn Default Gateway Enable this option to have RASExpress learn the correct default gateway if you have configured the default gateway incorrectly or if the configured gateway goes down and a different router starts acting as a default router. This feature requires a RIP-2 router that supports default gateway broadcasting.

Address Pool Assign From If you select Use Address Pool in Remote Client Address, type the first IP address in the pool in this field.

85 RASExpress User Guide

Address Pool Assign To If you select Use Address Pool in Remote Client Address, type the last IP address in the pool in this field.

Address Pool Exclude From/To Use these fields to exclude IP addresses from the address pool. By excluding addresses within the pool, you can create a pool consisting of three address ranges.

List of Static Routes Displays a list of static routes for use when WAN ports are set up for LAN-to-LAN operation. A static route is a manually configured route that specifies the transmission path a datagram must follow, based on the datagram's destination address. Static routes are useful when selecting a preferred route to a remote host.

Static Route Setup Select this optionto set up and edit a list of static routes. On the Static Route Setup page, add a static route to the list by selecting Add a Static Route and clicking Submit. In the page that appears, supply the required information.

IP Address. The destination of the static route. The destination must be an IP address entered in dotted decimal notation. If the destination is a network, the node portion of the IP address is 0. If the destination is a host, the mask must be 255.255.255.255. Mask. The IP network mask. It indicates the network and subnet portion of the IP address with non-zero numbers; the node portions are shown with zeros. Gateway. The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the next-hop router. Metric. The number of hops to the destination IP address. The number of hops is the number of routers that traffic must travel through to reach the destination.

86 4 Browser Management

IPX Remote Access

Use the IPX Remote Access page to set up IPX routing on all ports. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

IPX Routing Select Enabled to allow the RASExpress server to use the IPX protocol for remote access.

Learning Network Numbers Select Enabled to allow the RASExpress server to automatically detect and use the network’s numbers.

Route NetBIOS Over IPX This option enables the routing of NetBIOS over IPX packets. Select Yes if you are running applications on NetBIOS over IPX. Select No if you do not need this option.

Internal Network Number Type the IPX internal network number for the RASExpress server. This number should be unique in the network.

87 RASExpress User Guide

802.3 Routing Select Yes to enable routing of 802.3 IPX packets on the LAN.

802.3 Network Number Type a network number for the 802.3 frame type.

802.2 Routing Select Yes to enable routing of 802.2 IPX packets on the LAN.

802.2 Network Number Type a network number for the 802.2 frame type.

Type_II Routing Select Yes to enable routing of Ethernet_II IPX packets on the LAN.

Type_II Network Number Type a network number for the Ethernet_II frame type.

SNAP Routing Select Yes to enable routing of Ethernet SNAP IPX packets on the LAN.

SNAP Network Number Type a network number for the Ethernet SNAP frame type.

Point to Point Protocol

Use the Point to Point Protocol (PPP) pages to set up PPP routing on your ports. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or Reset to cancel your changes.

88 4 Browser Management

PPP Ports To edit PPP parameters for a WAN port, select the port and click Submit. The PPP Setup page for the selected port appears:

Port Name Shows the name of the port you are configuring.

SLIP Shows the status of the SLIP protocol for the port. Enable SLIP if you have SLIP clients dialing into the RASExpress server.

89 RASExpress User Guide

Port Type Select the type of connection the port is to be used for. Select Client to LAN if the PPP peer is a dial-up client. Select LAN to LAN if the PPP peer is a dial-up client or another router. If you change the connection type, be sure to also change the IP address.

Maximum Receive Unit Type the PPP Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) for the port, in the range 0–1534. The MRU is the packet size in bits.

Async Character Control Map Type the PPP Asynchronous Control Character Map (ACCM) for the port, in the range 0–FFFFFFFF.

Compression Select Enabled to enable PPP data compression for the port. Enable data compression only if the data link is slower than 57,600 bps and the modem is not doing any data compression. Disable it if the data link is 57,600 bps or faster or if the modem is doing data compression.

Authentication Select the PPP authentication protocol for the port. You can choose PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol), or None.

User Name Type a user name for use in LAN-to-LAN security. For a client-to-LAN configuration, leave this field blank.

User Password Type a password for use in LAN-to-LAN security. The password is case-sensitive, and it must match the password at the other end of the PPP connection. For a client- to-LAN configuration, leave this field blank.

Confirm User Password Retype the user password to confirm that you typed it correctly.

Dial on Demand This field is used only for LAN-to-LAN operations. Enable it if you want to disconnect the line during idle times and connect only when you have to transfer data. If this option is enabled, RASExpress spoofs all watchdog and serialization packets.

IPXCP Select Enabled to enable IPX for remote dial-in clients on the port. Select Disabled to disable IPX. IPXCP is a PPP network control protocol for IPX. It is responsible for configuring, enabling, and disabling the IPX protocol modules on both ends of the point-to-point link.

90 4 Browser Management

Node Number This field shows the IPX remote node number of the port. Each port must have a unique node number. You can edit this field only if IPXCP is enabled.

CIPX Compression Select Enabled to enable CIPX (Compressed Internetwork Packet Exchange) compression of IPX headers for the port. Select Disabled if you do not want CIPX compression. If you select Enabled, CIPX compression must also be enabled on the server for your choice to have an effect. You can edit this field only if IPXCP is enabled for the port.

BCP This field shows the status of the Bridge Control Protocol (BCP) for the port. Enable BCP if the other end of the PPP link supports BCP.

IPCP Select Enabled to enable IP for the port. Select Disabled if TCP/IP or PPP is not to be used.

Local Address This field shows the IP local network address of the port. This address can be edited only for LAN-to-LAN ports, and only if IPCP is enabled for the port. For all client-to- LAN connections, the local address is the same as the IP address of the LAN port. For LAN-to-LAN ports, make sure the IP address is on a different network or a subnet of any of the existing networks.

Subnet Mask This field contains the mask used to specify the subnetwork part of the IP address. For all client-to-LAN connections it is the same as the LAN network. See “IP Addressing” on page 8.

VJ Compression Select Enabled to enable Van Jacobson compression of TCP/IP headers on the PPP link. VJ compression is used by many PPP clients. Select Disabled to disable Van Jacobson compression. If IPCP and VJ Compression are enabled, a dial-in PPP client that uses this compression method may experience greater speed than with VJ Compression disabled.

Forward Broadcast This field allows you to enable or disable forwarding of UDP broadcast packets onto the WAN port. Enable it if your UDP applications depend on the broadcasts. When forwarding is enabled, the RASExpress server forwards to the selected port all UDP broadcast packets that come from the LAN and from the client-to-LAN ports. For-

91 RASExpress User Guide

warding broadcasts on remote links increases the traffic on the links, so enable forwarding only if necessary.

Log Connection Trace Select Enabled to enable a PPP connection log, which is stored in the RASExpress working directory. All information on the connection is included in the log.

Multilink PPP

Use this page to set up Multilink PPP on the RASExpress server. The Multilink PPP protocol bonds multiple ports to one IP address for greater bandwidth. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

Note: RASExpress has MultiChassis Multilink support, which enables the bundling of multilink connections across different RASExpress servers.All MultiChassis Multilink servers must have IP and PPTP turned on to enable the servers to talk to each other. Also, all MultiChassis Multilink servers should point to the same RADIUS or TACACS+ server.

Multilink PPP Select Enabled to enable Multilink PPP (MLPPP) support on the RASExpress server. RASExpress supports Multilink PPP for both analog and ISDN channels.

92 4 Browser Management

Bundle Server IP Address Type the IP address of the Bundle Server. The Bundle Server is the RASExpress 5.40 or later server chosen to manage the multichassis multilinks. It can be any RASExpress 5.40 or later server on the network, but the optimal server is the one that is equidistant from all RASExpress servers in the bonding group. If the servers are on different networks, then the hop count from the Bundle Server to all the other servers should be more or less equal. Alternately, the one that is least busy can function as the Bundle Server.

Bundle Server UDP Port Number Identifies the UDP port number that the RASExpress server uses to communicate between itself and the Bundle Server.

MAC Layer Bridging

Use this page to configure MAC (Media Access Control) layer bridging for the RASExpress server. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

Bridging Select Enabled to enable the server to bridge all MAC layer packets. The default is Disabled. If you do not use networking protocols other than IP and IPX, you should disable bridging, because it slows the RASExpress server by requiring the router to examine each and every packet on the connected LAN segment. However, you need bridging to support networking protocols like NetBIOS. Note that if you enable bridging for the RASExpress server but disable routing of IP or IPX on a specific port, bridging of those protocol packets will not take place on the port. However, if you disable IP or IPX entirely for the RASExpress server, then those packets will be bridged.

Spanning Tree Spanning Tree bridging is used to detect looped back links. The default is Disabled. This option is unavailable when Bridging is disabled.

93 RASExpress User Guide

Virtual Port Setup

Use the Per Port Setup pages to configure an individual WAN port. When you click Virtual Port Setup in the Configuration of Server menu, a list of WAN ports appears. Select the port you want to configure, and click Submit. Then make your changes in the Per Port Setup page. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

Port Name Shows the name of the port you are configuring.

Idle Timeout Type the number of minutes of no activity allowed before RASExpress disconnects the port. A value of 0 disables idle timeout.

Session Timeout Type the number of minutes allowed per session. When this time is exceeded, RASExpress automatically disconnects the port. A value of 0 disables session timeout.

94 4 Browser Management

PPP Detect Select ON to enable automatic PPP connections on the port. Select OFF to disable automatic PPP connections. When OFF is selected, a PPP client is presented with a menu on connection.

Auto Login IP Address/DNS Type the Telnet or Rlogin host IP address to be used when PPP Detect is enabled. This field can be edited only if Auto Login Protocol is set to Telnet or Rlogin.

Filter Template Name Type the name of the filter template for the port. For more information about filter templates, see Appendix D.

Tunneling Protocol Select PPTP to enable tunneling on the port. Select None to disable tunneling.

Tunnel Server IP Address/DNS Type the IP address of the server used for PPTP tunneling. This field is inactive if tunneling is disabled.

Connect Type Select the type of LAN-to-LAN connection. The options are Answering and Dialing. For a client-to-LAN connection, Answering is the only option.

Dial Type Select whether the server will make an analog or an ISDN call. For a client-to-LAN connection, this field is unavailable.

Telephone Number Type the number the server will dial for a LAN-to-LAN connection. For a client-to- LAN connection, this field is unavailable.

Bundle with a LAN-to-LAN Port Select ON to bundle the port with a PPP port configured as a LAN-to-LAN port. Any call on such a reserved port is mapped to the bundled PPP port. You can do multilink PPP on LAN-to-LAN connections by reserving multiple virtual ports for a single PPP port.

Bundled Port Select the PPP port to be bundled with the virtual port.

95 RASExpress User Guide

Physical Port Setup

Use the Physical Port Settings pages to configure an individual physical port. When you click Physical Port Setup in the Configuration of Server menu, a list of physical ports appears. Select the port you want to configure, and click Submit. Then make your changes in the Physical Port Settings page. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

Port Name Shows the name of the port you are configuring. Port names consist of three parts. The first part identifies the slot the port’s modem card is installed in, the second identifies the type of card, and the last identifies which modem on the card is used for the port.

Auto Dialout Select ON to enable auto dialout for the port. Select OFF to disable auto dialout.

Auto Dialout TCP Port Number Type the auto dialout TCP port number. This field is inactive if Auto Dialout is off.

Raw TCP Connection Select OFF to disable all Telnet negotiations on the port, so that the connection is treated as a “raw” TCP data stream. When a standard Telnet connection is made, certain parameters are negotiated, such as terminal type and screen size. However, some applications use Telnet for faxing or credit card validation for which negotiation is neither required nor recommended. It is for such applications that you should disable this option.

96 4 Browser Management

Telnet

Use this page to configure Telnet options for the RASExpress server. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

Telnet Administration Select Enabled if you want to be able to configure and manage the RASExpress server from any Telnet client.

Telnet Client Select Enabled to allow a remote user who has dialed in to the RASExpress server to Telnet to different hosts on the network.

Telnet Dialout Select Enabled to allow users to use any Telnet client to select a modem on the RASExpress server to dial out to UNIX hosts and BBSs.

Telnet Auto Dialout Select Enabled to allow a Telnet client to connect to the number in Auto Dialout TCP Port Number and use any free modem on the RASExpress server

Auto Dialout TCP Port Number Type the TCP port number that is to be used for Telnet auto dialout.

Telnet Interface Type Select the interface type for the Telnet client; the choices are Menu and Command. Menu mode allows the RASExpress server to be configured using menus, as in Chapter 3. Command mode allows the RASExpress server to be configured by typing Telnet commands (Appendix C).

Message Update Port Number Type the message port number for the RASExpress server. You can then Telnet to this port to see current status messages

97 RASExpress User Guide

SNTP Setup

For accounting accuracy, the RASExpress server can adjust its time and date using Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) signals from a time server. Use this page to configure the SNTP parameters. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

SNTP Client Select Enabled to enable the RASExpress server to synchronize its clock using SNTP signals.

SNTP Server IP Address Type the IP address of the SNTP server you want to use as a time source.

Time Zone Standard Name Type a one- to three-letter abbreviation for the time zone of the RASExpress server that you are configuring. It is used for display purposes only.

98 4 Browser Management

Offset from UTC Set the time difference between the location of the RASExpress server and the prime meridian at Greenwich, U.K., in the format hours:minutes. Sites west of Greenwich have negative numbers, and those east of Greenwich have positive numbers.

U.S. time zone Offset from UTC Eastern Standard (EST) -05:00 Central Standard (CST) -06:00 Mountain Standard (MST) -07:00 Pacific Standard (PST) -08:00

Daylight Savings Select Enabled to make RASExpress automatically adjust the clock for daylight- saving time.

Offset During Daylight Savings Type the number of minutes that the clock changes during the shift to and from daylight-saving time. In most parts of the world it is 60 minutes.

Start of Daylight Savings Time Daylight-saving time usually starts at the same time on the same day of the week in the same month every year. In the U.S.A. daylight-saving time starts at 2:00 A.M. on the first Sunday in April. In Ordinal, select on which occurrence of the selected day of the week that daylight-saving time starts: the first, second, third, fourth, or last of the month. In Day of Week, select the day of the week that daylight-saving time starts. In Month, select the month that daylight-saving time starts. In Time, type the time of day that daylight-saving time starts, in the format hours:minutes.

End of Daylight Savings Time Daylight-saving time usually ends at the same time on the same day of the week in the same month every year. In the U.S.A. daylight-saving time ends at 2:00 A.M. on the last Sunday in October. In Ordinal, select on which occurrence of the selected day of the week that daylight-saving time ends: the first, second, third, fourth, or last of the month. In Day of Week, select the day of the week that daylight-saving time ends. In Month, select the month that daylight-saving time ends. In Time, type the time of day that daylight-saving time ends, in the format hours:minutes.

99 RASExpress User Guide

SNMP Setup

The RASExpress server can be managed or configured by any standard Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) manager. Use this page to configure SNMP parameters for the RASExpress server. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

SNMP Agent Select Enabled to enable SNMP agent support, Disabled to disable it.

Trap Manager Community Name Type the community name of the SNMP trap manager. Any SNMP traps that are generated by the RASExpress server will be sent to this manager.

Trap Manager IP Address Type the IP address of the SNMP trap manager.

Trap Manager Port Number Type the port number of the SNMP trap manager. The default port number is 162.

SNMP Reboot Required Trap Enable to send a trap to the manager whenever a configuration change is made that requires a reboot of the server.

Get Community Name The RASExpress server can be configured for Get and Set communities. Type the name of the Get community here. The default is public.

100 4 Browser Management

Get Community Permission Select the Get community permission. The choices are Read_Only and Read_Write. The default is Read_Only.

Set Community Name Type the name of the Set community. The default is supervisor.

Set Community Permission Select the Set community permission. The choices are Read_Only and Read_Write. The default is Read_Write.

Authentication Select whether SNMP authentication is simple or encrypted. Set authentication to Simple if you are using MultiCommManager or a third party manager. This uses plain text for the Get and Set community names. You may also select Simple if you are using Multi-Tech MultiManager. Set authentication to Encrypted only if you are using Multi-Tech MultiManager. (not MultiCommManager) to manage your servers. When authentication is encrypted, the administrative user name and password and the PDU ID (a field in the SNMP request to the agent) are used to prepare an encrypted sequence for authentication of the SNMP request by the agent (RAS). It is a combination understood only between the RASExpress server and MultiManager.

101 RASExpress User Guide

SMTP Setup

Use this page to configure SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) service on the RASExpress server. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

SMTP Client Select Enabled to enable SMTP service. Select Disabled to disable SMTP service. This option must be enabled to make the other options in the window accessible.

SMTP Server IP Address Type the IP address of the SMTP server.

SMTP Sender Email Address Type the e-mail address of the RASExpress server.

SMTP Recipients This box displays the list of e-mail recipients. E-mail alert messages are sent to these recipients if any of the following options are enabled and the conditions are met. To add or delete a recipient, click Modify Recipient List. In the SMTP Recipients page, to add a recipient to the list, type the recipient’s e-mail address in the Enter New Recipient Name box and click Submit. To delete an entry from the list, select the entry, then select Delete Recipient and click Submit.

Send Mail on Message File Full Select Enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the Recipient list when the message file is full.

102 4 Browser Management

Send Mail on Log File Full Select Enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the Recipient list when the log file is full.

Send Mail on Debug Log Full Select Enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the Recipient list when the debug log is full.

Send Mail on Server Upgrade Select Enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the Recipient list when the server is upgraded.

Send RAS Alive Mail Select Enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the List of Recipients list that the RASExpress server is running. The message is sent once per hour.

Send Mail on At Command Done Select Enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the List of Recipients when an At command has been executed. At commands are Telnet commands that run at a specified date and time. For more information, see Appendix C.

Applications

Use this page to enable or disable several applications that are installed with RASExpress. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

Web Server Select Enabled to allow the RASExpress server to be managed by a Web browser.

103 RASExpress User Guide

FTP Server Select Enabled to allow File Transfer Protocol (FTP) file transfers between the RASExpress server and the management console. You can use FTP to send upgrade files to the RASExpress server (see Appendix B). Unlike TFTP, FTP has password protection.

TFTP Server The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is used by host computers to exchange files. It is used by RASExpress for its remote management programs. Leave this option enabled if you want RASExpress server to be managed by these programs.

RLOGIN Client Select Enabled to allow the RASExpress server to be used as a client for connecting to an RLOGIN server.

Security

Use this page to configure the RASExpress server to work with your security servers. The RASExpress server supports the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) and TACACS+ protocols for authentication. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

104 4 Browser Management

Security Protocol Select the security protocol you are using on your network. If you do not have a security server on your network, select Local. The other two options are RADIUS and TACACS+.

TACACS+ Encryption Select Enabled to enable encryption of TACACS+ packets between the RASExpress server and the TACACS+ security server. Enable only if your TACACS+ server supports encryption.

Shared Secret Type the shared secret used for communication between the RASExpress server and the security server. It must match the shared secret configured at the security server.

Confirm Shared Secret Type the shared secret again to confirm that you typed it correctly

Primary Server Address Type the IP address of your primary security server.

Backup Server Address Type the IP address of your backup security server. You can specify up to three backup security servers.

Call Back Delay Attribute Value Enter the value you have chosen for the Callback Delay attribute. You must set up the same attribute in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique attribute value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS attributes or any other custom attributes. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Remote User Enter Number Attribute Value Enter the value you have chosen for the Remote User Enter Number attribute. You must set up the same attribute in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique attribute value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS attributes or any other custom attributes. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Protocol Permissions Attribute Value Enter the value you have chosen for the Protocol Permissions attribute. You must set up the same attribute in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique attribute value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS attributes or any other custom attributes. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

105 RASExpress User Guide

Inbound User Service Type Value Enter the service type value that you have chosen for Inbound User. You must set up the same service type value in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique service type value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS service types or any other custom service types. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Shell User Service Type Value Enter the service type value that you have chosen for Shell User. You must set up the same service type value in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique service type value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS service types or any other custom service types. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

ISI Setup

Use these pages to configure ISI cards in the RASExpress server. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu or click Reset to cancel your changes.

ISI Card Setup

To configure an ISI, or modem, card, select the card from the Choose a Card list, select the action you want to perform from the Choose Operation list, and click Submit. The Choose a Card list identifies cards by number, base address, IRQ number, and number of ports. Depending on the action you select, one of several configuration pages appears.

106 4 Browser Management

Add a Card

When you select Add a Card or Modify Card Settings, the Edit ISI Card Information page appears. This page shows the base address, IRQ number, and number of ports of the selected ISI card. To change the base address or IRQ number, select the field and type a new value. To change the number of ports, select the desired number from the drop down list.

Note: Adding settings for a nonexistent card can cause RASExpress to display phan- tom ports. Setting the wrong base address and IRQ value can lead to unpredictable results.

Base Address This is the ISI card’s base I/O address in hexadecimal format. It provides the RASExpress server with information about card activity and allows the use of one interrupt for all ports on the card. Each card must have a unique base I/O address.

IRQ This is the interrupt number for the ISI card. The IRQ number used for each card must be unique.

Number of Ports This is the number of ports on the ISI card.

Delete a Card To remove an ISI card from the ISI Card Setup page, select the card from the Choose a Card list, select Delete a Card, and then click Submit. All information about the card is deleted from the RASExpress server.

Modify Card Settings See “Add a Card” on this page.

107 RASExpress User Guide

Edit Line Information Select Edit Line Information to individually configure the physical ports on the ISI card. The ISI Card Edit Line Information page lists the ports. To configure a port, select the port in the Choose a Line list and click Submit.

Modem Name Shows the model name of the modem used on the line. To change the modem name, click Change Modem, and then select the new name from the Choose a Modem list.

Line Status Shows whether the line is enabled or disabled.

General Name Describes the general name for the line. The general name is used by the workstation MCSI software to take the line.

Specific Name Shows the specific name for the line. It identifies the line by modem card number, card type, and modem number.

Baud Rate Selects the baud rate used by the port. You can select a rate of up to 460800 bps.

108 4 Browser Management

Data Bits Selects the number of data bits used by the port.

Stop Bits Selects the number of stop bits used by the port.

Parity Selects the type of parity used by the port.

RTS/CTS Flow Control Selects hardware flow control on the port. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

ISDN PRI Setup

Use this page to configure an ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) card. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

ISDN Primary Rate Interface Use this field to enable or disable ISDN PRI support by the RASExpress server. Enable it only if an ISDN PRI card is installed in the server.

I/O Address This is the base I/O address for the PRI card in hexadecimal format. It provides the RASExpress server with information about card activity, and allows the use of one interrupt for all ports on the card. Only one PRI card can be used in a RASExpress server. The I/O address must be unique.

IRQ Number This is the interrupt (IRQ) number for the PRI card. The IRQ number must be unique.

109 RASExpress User Guide

Memory Address The PRI card shares memory with the RASExpress server for internal communication. Type the shared memory address into this field in hexadecimal format.

Number of Ports Select the number of ports available to the ISDN PRI card. In North America, 23 data channels are standard; in Europe 30 data channels are standard.

Modem Setup

Use the Modem Configuration page to create and edit modem configurations. A configuration is implemented when you select the modem name. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

RASExpress includes a list of preconfigured modems. To edit one of these configurations, select the modem in the Choose a Modem list, select Edit Modem Parameters, and then click Submit. In the Edit Modem Information page, make your changes, and then click Submit to save them. To add a new modem, select Add a Modem and type the requested information in the same form used for Edit Modem Parameters. To delete a modem from the list, first select it, then select Delete a Modem and click Submit.

110 4 Browser Management

Modem Name The model name of the modem. Enter a new modem name only if it is not in the Choose a Modem list.

Dial Prefix String Displays the dial prefix, which is automatically sent to the modem before the phone number. The default prefix is the tone dialing command ATDT.

Dial Suffix String Displays the dial suffix, which is automatically sent to the modem after the phone number. This field is normally empty.

Hangup String Displays the command string used to end a call.

111 RASExpress User Guide

NO CARRIER string, NO DIALTONE string, NO ANSWER string, Connect Response string, OK string, ERROR string, RING string, BUSY string These fields display the modem’s result codes, which are used by RASExpress to monitor calls. They should be spelled exactly the same as the modem sends them. By default, these boxes are set for verbose responses. If your modem is set for terse responses, refer to the modem’s manual for the terse response codes.

OSPF Setup

OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) is an internal gateway protocol. Designed for IP networks, OSPF supports variable length subnet masks (VLSM), which allows more efficient allocation of IP addresses than RIP-1, and tagging of externally derived routing information. OSPF also allows packet authentication and uses IP multicast when sending or receiving packets. Use the OSPF Configuration page to enable the OSPF protocol on the RASExpress server. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

OSPF Routing Select Enabled to enable OSPF routing on the server.

Router ID Type the identifier for the OSPF router. It has the same format as an IP address, but identifies the router independent of its IP Address.

112 4 Browser Management

OSPF Area Settings

Use the OSPF Area pages to configure or review OSPF areas. An OSPF area is made up of internal routers linked to other areas within an autonomous system (AS) by area border routers.

OSPF Areas

Selecting OSPF Area Settings causes the OSPF Areas page to appear. To configure an area, select it in the Choose an Area list, select the action you want to perform from the Choose an Operation list, and then click Submit. Depending on the action you select, one of two area configuration pages appears. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

113 RASExpress User Guide

OSPF Area Configuration

Area ID This is the identification number assigned to the area. It has the same format as an IP address, but has the function of defining a summarization point for Link State Advertisements. The default value is 0.0.0.0, the same as the backbone.

Stub Area Enable to allow AS external advertisements to be flooded through the area. This option cannot be enabled for backbone areas.

Inject Default Route Enable to allow a default route to be summarized into a stub area if the OSPF router is connected to multiple areas.

Stub Metric Shows the cost of the default route summarized into a stub area.

OSPF Area Address Range Settings Though an area can be loosely defined as a collection of networks, in actuality an area is specified as a list of address ranges. Each address range is defined as an address and mask pair. Many separate networks may be contained in a single address range, just as a subnetted network is composed of many separate subnets. To configure the address ranges in an OSPF area, select the area on the OSPF Areas page, and then select Address Range Settings. On the OSPF Area Address Range Settings page, select the range in the Choose an Address Range list, select the action you want to perform from the Choose an Operation list, and then click Submit. When you select Add Address Range or Edit Address Range, the OSPF Area Address Range Configuration page appears:

114 4 Browser Management

Address Type the IP address part of the IP address and IP mask pair. The IP address and IP network mask pair specify the IP addresses contained in the address range. For example, the class B address range of X.X.X.X with a network mask of 255.255.0.0 includes all IP addresses from X.X.0.0 to X.X.255.255.

Mask Type the IP mask part of the IP address and IP mask pair.

Status Select Advertise to have the networks contained in the address range advertised in other areas. Select Do Not Advertise to have the networks contained in the address range hidden from other areas.

115 RASExpress User Guide

OSPF Interface Settings

Use OSPF Interface Settings to configure an OSPF interface. When you select OSPF Interface Settings, a list of OSPF interfaces appears. To configure an interface, select it from the list and click Submit. The OSPF Interface Configuration page then appears with the following options:

Interface Status Indicates whether OSPF routing is enabled on the interface. OSPF can be enabled on LAN and WAN ports of type LAN-toLAN.

Area ID The area to which this interface belongs.

Metric Indicates the cost of sending a packet on the interface, expressed in the link state metric.

Router Dead Interval The number of seconds to wait before the neighbors should declare the OSPF router down if they do not receive any Hello packets from it.

Transmit Delay The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link State Update packet over this interface.

116 4 Browser Management

Priority Indicates the priority for the OSPF router to become the Designated Router on the connected interface.

Hello Interval The number of seconds between the Hello packets sent on the interface by the OSPF router.

Retransmit Interval The number of seconds between link state advertisement transmissions.

Authentication Type The authentication scheme used on the attached network. The choices are Simple and None.

Plain Text Password Type the simple password to be used for the attached network.

Confirm Password Type the password again to confirm that you typed it correctly.

Filter Setup

Use the Filter Setup page to add, edit, or delete a filter template. A filter template can be used to selectively forward or filter inbound and/or outbound packets. When you are done, click Submit to save the information and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your changes.

To add a filter to the list, select Add Template and click Submit. To edit a filter, select it in the List of Filter Templates, and then select Edit Template and click Submit. Both actions open a page in which you can edit the filter template name and description.

117 RASExpress User Guide

To edit a filter template’s pattern list, select the filter template on the first Filter Setup page, and then select View Pattern List and click Submit. If you are editing an existing filter template, a list of pattern templates appears:

To add a new pattern to the list, choose the appropriate pattern in the Choose an Operation list by selecting Add ... Pattern and clicking Submit. The pattern template page, in which you can select the required options, then appears. Each pattern has a different selection of options; the following example is for an IP filter:

118 4 Browser Management

For more information about filter templates, see Appendix D, “Creating Filter Templates.”

119 RASExpress User Guide

Config File Setup

When you change the configuration of a RASExpress 5.60 or later server, the new configuration is automatically saved in a sequentially-numbered file. Use the Config File Setup page to select a previous configuration, then click Submit to implement the configuration and return to the Configuration of Server menu, or click Reset to cancel your selection. To set the maximum number of saved configuration files, see “Configuration Files to Keep” on page 24.

120 4 Browser Management

Management of Server Menu

The Management of Server menu appears in the left frame in the framed view, and near the bottom of the page in the standard view. Click the hypertext links in the menu to view or to manage various operations of the RASExpress server.

Management of Server:

• Server Information • User Information • Serial Line Control • Reboot Server • Restart Server • General Statistics • Router/PPP Statistics • Calls/Line Usage Statistics • Modem Connect String Table • Statistics Summary • IPX Route Table • IPX SAP Table • ARP Statistics • TCP/UDP Statistics • IP Route Table • Port Statistics • Display EIA Signals • Display Port Addresses • Inbound Users • Line Utilization • Call History • TCP Connection Table

121 RASExpress User Guide

Server Information

Use this page to review the basic operational configuration of the RASExpress server, to set the server’s clock, and to turn the log on or off.

Server Time This option shows the server time in 24-hour format. To change it, type the new time in the format hours:minutes:seconds.

Log Status Use this option to turn the call log on or off. The default is OFF. When ON is selected, RASExpress logs all calls for one hour in the file yyyymmdd.LOG, where yyyymmdd is the year, month, and day the log was created. The 24 saved logs for each date are given the extensions .L00–.L23.

Write Error Messages into File When this option is on, RASExpress saves all messages it receives into a file. The default is OFF.

Message File This option displays the name and path of the message file. The default file name is SERVER.MSG.

Screen Saver This option shows whether the RASExpress built-in screen saver is on or off.

Connection Manager Menu When this option is on, the Connection Manager menu is displayed to a user calling into the RASExpress server for remote control operations. When it is off, the Host List is displayed to the user.

Command to MultiModemManager When this option is on, RASExpress sends the LOGON user name to a MultiModemManager rack or PC. You can then determine, via the Call Status

122 4 Browser Management

window in MultiCommManager, which users are dialing out. Select OFF if MultiCommManager is not installed.

Note: This command applies only to RNI08 and RNGCOM servers connected to MultiModemManager racks. It does not apply to MiniArray, MultiArray, or CommPlete servers.

User Information

Select User Information to display a list of user names. This page has no other function.

123 RASExpress User Guide

Serial Line Control

Select Serial Line Control to change the status of a serial line. To change a line, click it in the Choose a Line box, click the action you want to perform on it in the Choose Operation box, and then click Submit. To undo any changes that have not been saved, click Reset. To see the results of your actions, click Back to main page.

Disconnect Line Select to break the connection on the selected line. The line immediately becomes ready for another call.

Reset Line Select to reinitialize the modem on the selected line.

Put Line Out of Service Select to take a line out of service. The words OUT OF SERVICE appear in the Line Status column on the main page.

Enable Line Select to put a line back into service that has been taken out of service.

Reboot Server

To reboot the RASExpress server, select Reboot Server, and then click Reboot the Server to confirm. If you want only to restart the ISI drivers without rebooting the computer, select Restart Server instead.

Restart Server

To restart the drivers for the ISI cards, select Restart Server, and then click Restart the Server to confirm. Use this option when new settings require reloading of the ISI drivers; it is faster than rebooting the server.

124 4 Browser Management

General Statistics

Select General Statistics to display current statistics for each active line.

The Port Throughput columns display throughput activity (in bytes per second in near real-time) when sending and receiving data to and from the port. The Pending Bytes columns display the number of bytes that are waiting to be processed. The Total Bytes columns display the total number of bytes that have passed through the port during the current connection. When the line is waiting for a call or is idle, all values in these columns are zero. To reset the statistics to zero, click the Reset General Statistics button.

125 RASExpress User Guide

Router/PPP Statistics

Select Router/PPP Statistics to display router and PPP statistics for each port.

The Router Statistics columns display the number of IPX and IP packets sent or received for each active port. The PPP Statistics columns display the number of Network Control Protocol (NCP) and Link Control Protocol (LCP) bytes sent or received for each active port. LCP packets are usually exchanged only during the establishment of the PPP connection. The NCP statistics include both IPX and IP packets. Information is displayed only for remote node ports. For remote control connections, all values are zero. To reset the router statistics to zero, click the Reset Router Statistics button. To reset the PPP statistics to zero, click the Reset PPP Statistics button.

126 4 Browser Management

Calls/Line Usage Statistics

Select Calls/Line Usage Statistics to see the number of calls and the connection time for each port.

The Dial-In Dial-Out Calls columns display the number of times each port has been used since the RASExpress server last started. The Line Usage Statistics columns display how long the current user has been connected and the total time the port has been in use since the RASExpress server last started.

127 RASExpress User Guide

Modem Connect String Table

The Modem Connect String Table displays the current connect string for each port.

128 4 Browser Management

Statistics Summary

Statistics Summary displays a statistical summary of call, LAN, and line activities since RASExpress was last started. To reset the statistics to zero, click the Reset Summary Statistics button.

IPX Route Table

The IPX Route Table displays IPX (Internet Packet Exchange) routing information for the RASExpress server’s router.

129 RASExpress User Guide

IPX SAP Table

The IPX SAP Table shows SAP (Service Access Point) information for the RASExpress server.

ARP Statistics

The ARP Statistics page displays ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) statistics since the RASExpress server was last started.

130 4 Browser Management

TCP/UDP Statistics

The UDP / TCP Statistics page displays UDP (User Datagram Protocol) and TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) statistics since the RASExpress server was last started.

IP Route Table

The IP Route Table shows IP routing information for the RASExpress server’s router, including the network address, forwarding address, subnet mask, metric (hop count), and the port number through which the IP address can be reached.

131 RASExpress User Guide

Port Statistics

When you select Port Statistics, the Port Statistics page appears. To see the statistics for any port, click the port in the Choose a Line box, then click Submit. A page similar to the following one appears.

Statistics are displayed only for remote node lines. For remote control connections, all values are zero. After you view the information, use your browser's Back command to return to the Port Statistics page to select another line, or click Back to main page to return to the Management of Server menu. To reset the IPX port statistics to zero, click the Reset IPX Port Statistics button. To reset the IP port statistics to zero, click the Reset IP Port Statistics button.

132 4 Browser Management

Display EIA Signals

The EIA Signals page displays the current status of the EIA RS-232 signals on each serial line. DTR and RTS are sent by the port. CTS, DSR, DCD, and RI are received by the port. The DSR signal is not used by the RASExpress server. The status for each signal can be either ON or OFF.

133 RASExpress User Guide

Display Port Addresses

The Port Addresses page displays the IPX and IP addresses for each of the RASExpress server’s ports. The IPX Network Address is the address for the remote node client that is connecting to the port. The IP Local Address is the IP address for the server side of the connection. The IP Remote Address is the IP address of the client. These parameters are displayed only for remote node (PPP) connections.

Inbound Users

Select Inbound Users to display a list of users waiting for a remote control session. If there are users waiting for a dial-in remote control session on the RASExpress server, then a list appears telling you who and how many users are waiting. If no users are waiting, a message appears that says so. This option applies only to remote control. The listed users are the logon names of users waiting to be taken over. These names would also be displayed in the Host List if you dialed in for a remote control session.

134 4 Browser Management

Line Utilization

Select Line Utilization to display the Line Utilization page. To review the connection statistics for a line, click the line in the Choose a Line box, and then click Submit. A page similar to the following one appears.

After you view the information, use your browser's Back command to return to the Line Utilization page to select another line, or click Back to main page to return to the Management of Server menu.

135 RASExpress User Guide

Call History

Select Call History to display the Call History page. To see the call history of a line, click the line in the Choose a Line box, and then click Submit. A page similar to the following one appears.

The Call History page displays information about the line's last ten calls. After you view the information, use your browser's Back command to return to the Call History page to select another line, or click Back to main page to return to the Management of Server menu.

136 4 Browser Management

TCP Connection Table

The TCP Connection Table shows TCP connection information for each of the server’s local ports.

137 RASExpress User Guide

138 5 MultiManager

139 RASExpress User Guide

Introduction

Multi-Tech MultiManager is a password-protected Windows 95/98/NT/2000 program for SNMP-based administration of RASExpress servers. It can be run from a network client PC or from a dial-in remote-node or remote-control PC. Using MultiManager you can: • maintain a map of your servers. • monitor your servers. • configure your servers. • manage your communication lines and servers. • display numeric statistics. • graph online and offline statistics. • display selected traps.

Installation

We recommend that you install MultiManager on a workstation that is on the same network as a RASExpress server; however MultiManager can be run from any PC that has Internet access. The workstation must be running Windows 95 or above, or Windows NT 4.0 or above. To install MultiManager: 1. Insert the MultiManager compact disk into the CD-ROM drive of the management PC. Do not use the RASExpress server computer. 2. The install program should automatically start. If it doesn’t, in Windows Explorer, open the CD-ROM drive and double-click on Setup.exe. 3. In the installation menu, select MultiManager, and follow the directions.

Starting MultiManager

1. To start MultiManager, click Start, point to Programs, point to MultiManager, and then click MultiManager. Alternately, create a shortcut on the desktop and then double-click it. 2. When MultiManager opens, log in using a valid user name and password. Initially no password is required, but if you opt to use one, you can set it by clicking Change Password in the Edit menu. Note that the password is case- sensitive. To configure a server, you must log in as supervisor. 3. If you are starting MultiManager for the first time, click Edit, and then click First Time Auto Detect to map the servers on your network. Valid servers appear in the Auto Detect dialog box, the device tree, and the network map. 4. Select a server by clicking it in either the device tree or the network map. When you select a server, the toolbar buttons become active.

140 5 MultiManager

Main Window

The main window is the control center for configuring and managing your RAS- Express servers.

Title Bar The title bar shows the IP address of the management workstation and the name and path of the active map file.

Menu Bar The menu bar contains menus for controlling MultiManager itself, for configuring and managing your servers, for displaying statistics both numerically and graphically, and for editing network maps. Most menu commands can be accessed through the toolbars; except for those selecting the online and offline statistical graphs.

Toolbars Below the title bar and menu bar are four toolbars, which can be resized, turned on and off, and dragged and docked anywhere. From top to bottom: • The Configuration toolbar is used to configure a RASExpress server. • The Statistics toolbar is used to display throughput and other statistics collected since the last reboot of the server. • The Management toolbar is used to save configuration changes, reboot the server, monitor connections, reset lines, set and display traps, and otherwise manage an active server.

141 RASExpress User Guide

• The Draw toolbar is used to create and edit network maps of your servers.

Device Tree The device tree, in the pane on the left, displays RASExpress servers and groups in an Explorer-like tree. The manager is at the root of the tree. As in Explorer, you can expand or contract branches by clicking + and – boxes. Just click any server in the tree to select it for configuration or management. If no servers appear in the device tree when you open MultiManager, you can cause MultiManager to look for them by selecting Auto Detect from the Edit menu.

Network Map The network map is in the pane on the right. Here you can define and select RAS- Express servers, and edit their device attributes by double-clicking their icons. Using the Draw toolbar, you can show relationships among your servers, groups, and LAN and WAN links in a graphic map of your network, which can then be saved to disk.

Status Bar The status bar displays messages about the status of MultiManager and your SCROLL LOCK, NUM LOCK, and CAPS LOCK keys, and displays the date and time.

File Menu

Use the File menu to open, save, and close map files, and to exit MultiManager.

New Select New to close an open network map file and create a new one. When you use this command, polling and other background activities related to servers in the current map will stop.

Open Select Open to close an open map file and open an existing map file. When you use this command, polling and other background activities related to servers in the current map will stop.

Save Select Save to save an open map file to disk using the same name and location.

Save As Select Save As to save an open map file to disk using a different name or location.

Print Select Print to print an active bar chart.

142 5 MultiManager

Print Preview Select Print Preview to see how an active bar chart will print.

Logout Select Logout to log out of MultiManager. The Login dialog box appears, so that you can immediately log back into MultiManager. The current network map remains open. Polling of devices in the map continues, but you cannot perform any operations in MultiManager until you log back in.

Exit

Select Exit to close MultiManager. MultiManager prompts to save unsaved changes to the network map. You can also close MultiManager by clicking the Close button in the corner of the window or by pressing ALT+F4.

Edit Menu

Use the Edit menu to edit the network map, to autodetect servers, or to change your password.

Properties

Select Properties to edit the properties of a selected component in the network map. To select a component, click it or drag a selection box over any part of it. To select a component and open its properties dialog box at the same time, double-click it.

Note: Except for timeouts, properties can be changed only by someone with a supervisor password.

LAN and WAN Links The only property that can be changed through the Properties command is the weight of the line. However, you also can move a selected link component by dragging it or change its shape by dragging the control box at either end of the line.

Groups The only property that can be changed through the Properties command is the name of the group. However, you also can move a selected group component by dragging it or change its shape by dragging any of the control boxes that appear when it is selected.

Text Selecting Properties for a text block opens a Fonts dialog box in which you can change the font and size of the text. You can select any font that is installed on the workstation.

143 RASExpress User Guide

After you close the Fonts dialog box, a Properties dialog box appears in which you can edit the text. You also can move a selected text block by dragging it or change its shape by dragging any of the control boxes that appear when it is selected.

Devices Selecting Properties for a device opens the Edit Device Attributes dialog box. Use this dialog box to identify the device and to specify how MultiManager communicates with it.

Device Name Type the name of the device you want to monitor. This name is used by the manager to identify the device on the network map; it is not necessarily the same as the server name. When you use the Auto Detect command it is entered automatically.

IP Address Type the IP address of the device you want to monitor. When you use the Auto Detect command it is entered automatically. Because MultiManager has a DNS client built into it, either a dotted decimal address or a domain name can be used.

Read Community Name Type the read community name for the device. When you use the Auto Detect command it is entered automatically.

Write Community Name Type the write community name for the device. When you use the Auto Detect command it is entered automatically.

144 5 MultiManager

Time Out Type the time in milliseconds in which the device may respond to a request before MultiManager retransmits the request.

Maximum Number of Retransmissions Type the number of retransmissions MultiManager can send before it declares the device not active.

Statistics Refresh Interval Type in milliseconds the time that MultiManager waits after it refreshes the statistics before it refreshes them again.

Polling Time Out Interval Type the time in milliseconds that MultiManager waits after it polls the device before it polls it again.

Description Type a description of the device. When you use the Auto Detect command it is entered automatically.

Version Number This is the version of RASExpress that is currently running on the server. It cannot be edited.

Periodic Download Select if you want the log files from the RASExpress server to be periodically downloaded to the MultiManager workstation. Downloaded files are stored in the folder named in the Log File Directory box.

Log File Directory Type the path and name of the folder on the MultiManager workstation where you want log files to be downloaded. The folder name should be unique. The default folder name is the same as the server’s IP address.

Server Password for FTP Type the server password here. MultiManager needs the server password to access the server and download its log files. Only the supervisor has permission to change this field.

Clear Community Name In RasExpress 5.60, the community name can be encrypted for extra security. However, only MultiManager 1.30 or above can work with encryption; no third party SNMP managers can be used. Select Clear Community Name if you want the community name to be sent as plain text rather than encrypted.

Encrypted Community Name Select if you want the community name to be encrypted. Only MultiManager 1.30 or above will be able to manage the server.

User Name If you select encryption, type the administrator user name for the server. It will be encrypted together with the community name and the password.

145 RASExpress User Guide

User Password If you select encryption, type the administrator password for the server. It will be encrypted together with the community name and the user name.

Note: The network administrator should be the only one to handle the authorization settings. Because the user name and password are encrypted together with the community name, the authorization settings must be the same both in MultiManager and on the RASExpress server. If they are not, SNMP requests will return an ERROR message, and it will be impossible to manage the server.

Select All

Click to select all objects in the network map. To deselect objects, click anywhere in the network map.

Delete

Click to delete all selected objects from the network map.

Auto Detect

Select Auto Detect to have MultiManager automatically detect and display all RASExpress servers on the network. The current network map closes and a new one opens in which MultiManager places the detected servers. MultiManager can detect RASExpress servers on a LAN-to-LAN network as well as on the same network as MultiManager.

Caution: When autodetection is used, all background activities for devices in the current network map, such as polling and FTP activities, is stopped.

The following dialog box appears while MultiManager is searching for servers.

IP Address Lists the IP addresses of the detected servers.

Device Name Lists the device names of the detected servers.

146 5 MultiManager

Stop Click to stop autodetection before it finishes.

Close Click to close the Auto Detect dialog box. The dialog box must be closed before other processes can be carried out in MultiManager.

Change Manager Password

Select Change Manager Password to change a user password.

Supervisor Password Type the supervisor password, which is case-sensitive. Only a supervisor can change user passwords.

User Name Select the user type whose password is to be changed.

New Password Type the user’s new password. For security, the password is masked by a string of asterisks. The password is case-sensitive. It should be unique and easy for the user to remember.

Confirm Password Confirm that you typed the new password correctly by retyping it in the Confirm Password box. Otherwise, the new password will not be accepted.

147 RASExpress User Guide

First Time Auto Detect

Select First Time Auto Detect to start the First time Auto detect wizard. The wizard automatically detects and displays all RASExpress 5.50 or later servers on the network. In the Auto Detection dialog box, you can then select each new server for initial configuration.

When you select a server and click Configure, several dialog boxes appears. Fill in the requested information, and then click Finish. The wizard validates the user name and password, sets the IP address, IPX remote access, IP client addressess, SMTP access, and basic security options as specified, and then reboots the server.

View Menu

Use the View menu to configure the appearance of MultiManager. To enable or disable a feature, click on its command. An enabled feature has a checkmark in front of it.

Grid Lines

Displays or hides grid lines on the network map to help place objects.

Toolbars

Selectively displays or hides the toolbars. The toolbars can be resized, turned on and off, and dragged and docked anywhere.

Status Bar

Displays or hides the status bar.

Reduce Graph

Reduces the width of the currently displayed graph. This command is useful for reviewing wide graphs, such as the Port Throughput graph, that require extensive scrolling in normal mode.

148 5 MultiManager

Graph Grid

Places a horizontal grid on the currently displayed graph.

Graph Forward

Graphs too large to fit into a single screen are divided into smaller sub-graphs. Use the Graph Forward command to move forward through these sub-graphs. This command is enabled only when the graph is bigger than your screen size.

Graph Backward

Use the Graph Backward command to move backward through sub-graphs. This command is enabled only when the graph is bigger than your screen size.

Server Files

Use the commands in the Server Files submenu to download and view or print files stored on the server.

In the dialog box, files of the selected type stored on the server are shown on the right. To download a file from the server to the MultiManager workstation, click the file name, and then click Download. To view, edit, or print the contents of a downloaded file, click it in the Local Files list, and then click View. The file is opened in the default editor or word processor. Use the editor to edit, save, or print the file. You can use the Upload button to upload an edited file to the server. It is active only for .ini files. To change the default editor, which is Microsoft WordPad, select Editor Options from the Server Files submenu. Then browse for or type the path of the new editor, and click OK.

Note: To download files from the server, you must have the correct password in the Server Password for FTP box of the Edit Device Attributes dialog box (page 145).

149 RASExpress User Guide

Periodic Download Status

In the Edit Device Attributes dialog box (page 143), you can choose to have the server’s log files periodically downloaded to the management workstation. Use the Periodic Download Status command to check the status of the downloads.

Customize Tool Bars

The Customize Tool Bars dialog box enables you customize the Configuration, Management, and Statistics toolbars.

The dialog box has a tab for each customizeable toolbar. Each tab has a list of available buttons, which are buttons not currently on the toolbar, and a list of selected buttons, which are the buttons currently on the toolbar. All buttons are selected by default. To delete a button from a toolbar, click it in the Selected Buttons list, and then click Remove. Conversely, to add a button to a toolbar, click it in the Available Buttons list, and then click Add. Click Apply to apply your changes to the toolbar and keep the dialog box open. Click OK to apply your

150 5 MultiManager

changes and close the dialog box. Click Cancel to close the dialog box without applying your changes.

Filter Setup

The Filter Setup dialog box enables you to create filter templates to forward or filter inbound and outbound packets. For more information about filter templates, see Appendix D.

Filter Template List Lists filter templates by filter name. Click Add to create a new filter template, Edit to edit the selected filter template, or Delete to delete the selected filter template. When you click Add or Delete, the Filter Template dialog box appears, in which you can type or edite the filter template name and description.

Filter Description Displays the description of the selected filter template, which was entered in the Filter Template dialog box.

Pattern Templates Displays a list of the patterns in the selected filter template. Click Add to add a new pattern to the filter template, Edit to edit the selected pattern, or Delete to delete the selected pattern.

Pattern Viewer Displays the parameters of the pattern selected in the Pattern Templates list.

151 RASExpress User Guide

Pattern Relationship Viewer Displays the relationship of the patterns in the selected filter template.

Error Report Displays filter errors.

Save Button Saves the filter template in the Filter.ini file on the RASExpress server.

152 5 MultiManager

Draw Menu

Use the Draw menu to create and display relationships among your servers and groups in the network map.

Selection Tool

Choose the Selection tool by clicking Select in the Draw menu or by clicking the Select button on the Draw toolbar. Use the Selection tool to select, move, and edit objects in the network map. When a RAS object is selected, its colors are inverted. When any other object is selected, control boxes appear around the the perimeter or at the ends of the object.

To select a single object • Click the object. • While pressing the primary mouse button, drag the mouse pointer diagonally across the object to create a selection box. The selection box does not have to include the entire object.

To select several objects • Click each object while pressing the SHIFT key. • While pressing the primary mouse button, drag the mouse pointer diagonally across the objects to create a selection box. All objects touched by the selection box are selected.

• While pressing the SHIFT key, create a separate selection box around each object.

To cancel a selection Click anywhere in the network map outside a selected object. All selected objects become deselected.

To move a single object Click the object and drag it.

153 RASExpress User Guide

To move several objects 1. Select the objects while holding down the SHIFT key. 2. Click the mouse pointer on any selected object and drag it. All other selected objects are dragged with it.

To edit an object Double-click the object. Depending on the type of object, a dialog box appears in which you can edit text, select a different font, change line width, etc.

Note: If you have trouble opening the Line Properties dialog box by double-clicking, first select the line, then double-click one of its control boxes.

To change the shape of an object 1. Select the object so that its control boxes appear. If a selected object does not have control boxes, you cannot change its shape. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the object’s control boxes. A double-headed arrow appears. 3. Drag the control box to change the shape of the object.

To delete one or more objects 1. Select the objects you want to delete.

2. Press the DELETE key. The objects are removed from the network map.

RAS Tool

Select the RAS tool by clicking RAS in the Draw menu or by clicking the RAS button on the Draw toolbar. Use the RAS tool to add a RASExpress server to the network map.

To add a server to the network map 1. Select the RAS tool. 2. Click anywhere in the the network map that you want to place the new server. The Device Properties dialog box appears. 3. Enter the properties of the server in the dialog box. If no properties are entered, the server does not remain in the network map.

Caution: If the Community Name Read and Write names are wrong, there will be authentication failures, and you will be unable to configure the server from MultiManager.

4. When you finish entering the server’s properties in the dialog box, click OK. Icons for the server appear in both the device tree and the the network map.

Icon Colors MultiManager starts to poll a server as soon as it is added. If it receives a response, a green border appears on the screens of the server’s icons. If it does not receive a response, it tries to poll the server again. If there is still no response after MultiManager

154 5 MultiManager

completes the allotted number of retries, the border turns red. Until then, the border is gray, indicating an unknown status.

LAN Link Tool

Select the LAN Link tool by clicking LAN Link in the Draw menu or by clicking the LAN Link button on the Draw toolbar. Use the LAN Link tool to draw a LAN link in the network map. You must select the LAN Link tool every time you draw a line.

To draw a LAN link in the network map 1. Select the LAN Link tool. 2. Click where you want the line to begin and drag to where you want the line to end, then release the mouse button.

To change the width of a LAN link 1. Double-click the LAN link you want to change. The Line Properties dialog box appears. 2. Select a new line weight in the Weight box. For a one-pixel line, select None. 3. Click OK. The line changes to the new width.

To change the color of a LAN link 1. Select the LAN link you want to change. 2. In the Draw menu, click Line Color. The Color dialog box appears. 3. Select a new color from the Basic Colors list or click Define Custom Colors to create a custom color. 4. Click OK. The line changes to the new color.

WAN Link Tool

Select the WAN Link tool by clicking Wan Link in the Draw menu or by clicking the WAN Link button on the Draw toolbar. Use the WAN Link tool to draw a WAN link in the network map. You must select the WAN Link tool every time you draw a link.

To draw a WAN link in the network map 1. Select the WAN Link tool. 2. Click where you want the line to begin and drag to where you want the line to end, then release the mouse button.

To change the width of a WAN link 1. Double-click the WAN link you want to change. The Line Properties dialog box appears. 2. Select a new line weight in the Weight box. For a one-pixel line, select None. 3. Click OK. The line changes to the new width.

155 RASExpress User Guide

To change the color of a WAN link 1. Select the WAN link you want to change. 2. In the Draw menu, click Line Color. The Color dialog box appears. 3. Select a new color from the Basic Colors list or click Define Custom Colors to create a custom color. 4. Click OK. The line changes to the new color.

Group Tool

Select the Group tool by clicking Group in the Draw menu or by clicking the Group button on the Draw toolbar. Use the Group tool to group servers in the network map and the device tree. You must select the Group tool every time you draw a group.

To create a group 1. Select the Group tool. 2. Click where you want to start drawing the group outline, drag until the control boxes outline the area you want to cover, and then release the mouse button. The Properties dialog box appears. 3. Type the name of the group in the Properties dialog box and click OK. A cloud shape with an associated label appears in the network map, and a group icon with the same label appears in the device tree. 4. If necessary, change the location or size of the group outline by dragging the group outline or one of its control boxes. All servers inside the group outline are automatically placed under the group icon in the device tree.

To change the color of a group outline 1. Select the group outline you want to change. 2. In the Draw menu, click Line Color. The Color dialog box appears. 3. Select a new color from the Basic Colors list or click Define Custom Colors to create a custom color. 4. Click OK. The group outline changes to the new color.

Text Tool

Select the Text tool by clicking Text in the Draw menu or by clicking the Text button on the Draw toolbar. Use the Text tool to create labels in the network map. You must select the Text tool every time you create a new label.

To create a label 1. Select the Text tool. 2. Click where you want the label to appear, drag until the control boxes outline the area you want to cover, and then release the mouse button. The word Text appears inside a box marked by the control boxes.

156 5 MultiManager

3. To edit the text, double-click the text box. The Font dialog box appears. 4. Select the font characteristics you want for the label, and click OK. The text properties dialog box appears. 5. Type the text for the label, and click OK. Your font and text changes are applied to the label, and the boundaries of the text box shrink to fit the text.

Auto LAN Links Tool

Select the Auto LAN Links tool by clicking Auto LAN Links in the Draw menu or by clicking the Auto LAN Links button on the Draw toolbar. Use the Auto LAN Links tool to automatically draw a LAN link between two or more servers in the network map.

To automatically draw a LAN link 1. Select the servers you want to draw a LAN link between. 2. Select the Auto LAN Links tool. The servers are automatically aligned and LAN link lines are drawn showing the servers connected to a common LAN.

Auto Group Tool

Select the Auto Group tool by clicking Auto Group in the Draw menu or by clicking the Auto Grou button on the Draw toolbar. Use the Auto Group tool to automatically group two or more servers in the network map and device tree.

To automatically create a group 1. Select the servers you want to group. 2. Select the Auto Group tool. The Properties dialog box appears. 3. Type the name of the group in the Properties dialog box and click OK. A cloud shape with an associated label appears around the selected servers in the network map, and a group icon with the same label appears in the device tree. 4. If necessary, change the size or shape of the group outline to include only the selected servers. All servers inside the group outline are automatically placed under the group icon in the device tree.

Auto WAN Links Tool

Select the Auto WAN Links tool by clicking Auto WAN Links in the Draw menu or by clicking the Auto WAN Links button on the Draw toolbar. Use the Auto WAN Links tool to automatically draw a WAN link between two groups.

To automatically draw a WAN link 1. Select the groups you want to draw a WAN link between. 2. Select the Auto WAN Links tool. A WAN link is automatically drawn between the groups.

157 RASExpress User Guide

Paper Color Tool

Select the Paper Color tool by clicking Paper Color in the Draw menu. Use the Paper Color tool to change the background color of the network map.

To change the color of the network map 1. Select the Paper Color tool. The Color dialog box appears. 2. Select a new color from the Basic Colors list or click Define Custom Colors to create a custom color. 3. Click OK. The network map changes to the new color.

Line Color Tool

Select the Line Color tool by clicking Line Color in the Draw menu. Use the Line Color tool to change the color of a LAN link, WAN link, or group line.

To change the color of a line 1. Select one or more LAN links, WAN links, or groups. 2. Select the Line Color tool. The Color dialog box appears. 3. Select a new color from the Basic Colors list or click Define Custom Colors to create a custom color. 4. Click OK. The lines in the selected objects change to the new color.

158 5 MultiManager

Configuration Menu

Use the Configuration menu to configure the selected RASExpress server.

Server Setup

Select the Server Setup dialog box by clicking Server in the Configuration menu, or by clicking the Server button on the Configuration toolbar.

Use the Server Setup dialog box to configure server identity and other basic operations. When you finish making changes, click Set to implement your changes. Click Close to close the dialog box and cancel any changes not yet implemented.

Server Name Use this option to assign a unique name to the RASExpress server. The server name is used by MultiManager to monitor RASExpress server statistics.

Change Password Click the Change Password button to assign or change the supervisor password for the current server. The password is case-sensitive. It locks the local console and prevents regular users from running MultiManager and making changes to the RAS- Express server. For security, the actual characters are masked by asterisks. To assign a new password, type it in the New Password box of the Password dialog box and then retype it in the Confirm Password box.

Log Duration The Log Duration box shows the length of time the log is open. When the time expires, RASExpress saves the log and automatically opens a new log file.

Note: This feature is included only for compatibility with older versions of RASExpress. In RASExpress 5.60, log duration is fixed at one hour.

159 RASExpress User Guide

Change Duration If Log Status is selected, you can change the length of time you want the log to be open by clicking the Change Duration button and entering the new time in the format days:hours:minutes:seconds.

Note: This feature is included only for compatibility with older versions of RASExpress. In RASExpress 5.60, log duration is fixed at one hour.

Log Status Use this option to turn the call log on or off. The default is off. When the call log is on, RASExpress logs all calls for one hour in the file yyyymmdd.LOG, where yyyymmdd is the year, month, and date the log was created. Saved logs are given the extensions .L00–.L23 for each date.

PPP Log Use this field to enable or disable the PPP connection log. The PPP connection log tracks all PPP connections on the server.

Log File Name Displays the name of the log file. To choose a different log file name, type it in the box.

Note: This feature is included only for compatibility with older versions of RASExpress. In RASExpress 5.60, log file names are automatically assigned.

Log Number of Days Specify the number of days ,up to seven, that you want log files to remain on the server’s hard disk. Log files older than the specified number of days are automatically erased. This option prevents old log files from filling the disk.

Log Start Time Enter the time at which you want to automatically start the call log, in the format hours:minutes:seconds.

Message Status Select this option to have RASExpress save all error and other messages it receives into a message file. The default is off.

Message File Name If Message Status is selected, you can assign a name to the message file in this box. The default file name is SERVER.MSG.

Screen Saver Select this checkbox to turn the RASExpress built-in screen saver on. Clear it to turn the screen saver off. The screen saver appears only on the monitor of the RASExpress server.

160 5 MultiManager

Connection Manager Select this checkbox to display the Connection Manager menu to a user calling into the RASExpress server for remote control operation. Clear it to display the Host List to the user.

Command to MMM Select the checkbox to have RASExpress send the LOGON user name to a MultiModemManager rack or PC. You can then determine, via the Call Status window in MultiCommManager, which users are dialing out. Clear the checkbox if MultiCommManager is not installed.

IP Setup

Select the IP Setup dialog box by clicking IP Setup in the Configuration menu or by clicking the IP button on the Configuration toolbar.

Use the IP Setup dialog box to set up IP parameters that apply to IP routing on all ports. When you finish making changes, click Set to implement your changes. Click Close to close the dialog box and cancel any changes not yet implemented.

IP Remote Access Select this option to provide remote access on IP. This allows any remote PPP- compatible client to call in and access local TCP/IP hosts, such as WWW, FTP, Telnet, etc.

IP Address Type the IP network address for the RASExpress server’s Ethernet interface. You can edit it only if IP Remote Access is selected. The IP address must be assigned by the system administrator, and it must be unique on the TCP/IP network.

161 RASExpress User Guide

IP Subnet Mask Type the IP subnet mask of the RASExpress server. You can edit it only if IP Remote Access is selected.

IP Default Route Type the IP address to which packets are sent that cannot be routed by the RASExpress server. If there is no router on the network, the address should be filled with zeroes. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is selected.

IP Frame Type Selects the RASExpress server’s IP frame type. It can be edited only if IP Remote Access is selected.

Primary IP Address Type the address of the primary name server used by the RASExpress server to resolve names to IP addresses for Telnet and RLOGIN clients dialing in from a dumb terminal. You can edit this field only if IP Remote Access is selected.

Secondary IP Address Type the address of the secondary name server used by the RASExpress server to resolve names to IP addresses for Telnet and RLOGIN clients dialing in from a dumb terminal. The secondary name server is used when the primary name server does not respond. You can edit this field only if IP Remote Access is selected.

Default Client IP Address This box shows how the RASExpress server allocates IP addresses to remote client-to- LAN users. Select Use DHCP if you have a DHCP server on your LAN. elect Use Address Pool if the IP addresses you assign to the clients are contiguous. Select Configure Per Port (the default) if you want to assign a specific address to each of the remote ports. Select Use Radius if you want to use your RADIUS server to assign IP addresses. For LAN-to-LAN ports you must configure all IP addresses manually.

Address Pool Use the Address Pool group box to define one to three ranges of IP addresses from which client addresses will be allocated. In the Include Range boxes, type the first and last addresses of the IP address range. If the range includes one or more addresses that you want to exclude from allocation, you can type their address ranges in the Exclude Range boxes. By excluding addresses within the pool, you can create a pool consisting of up to three address ranges

RIP Enables or disables the IP Routing Information Protocol (RIP-2) . Enable RIP if you want the RASExpress server to use RIP-2 for IP routing.

Auto Default Gateway Enables RASExpress to learn the correct default gateway if you have configured the default gateway incorrectly or if the configured gateway goes down and a different router starts acting as a default router. This feature requires a RIP-2 router that supports default gateway broadcasting.

DNS Server Status Select to have the RASExpress server act as a DNS server. When this option is enabled, the RASExpress server gives out its IP address as the DNS server to dialing PPP clients.

162 5 MultiManager

Static Routes Button Click to display the Static Route Table. A static route is a manually configured route that specifies the transmission path a datagram must follow, based on the datagram's destination address. Static routes are useful when selecting a preferred route to a remote host.

Static Routes Displays a list of static routes for use when WAN ports are set up for LAN-to-LAN operation.

Address The destination of the static route. The destination must be an IP address entered in dotted decimal notation. If the destination is a network, the node portion of the IP address is 0. If the destination is a host, the mask must be 255.255.255.255.

Mask The IP network mask. It indicates the network and subnet portion of the IP address with non-zero numbers; the node portions are shown with zeros.

Gateway The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the next-hop router.

Metric The number of hops to the destination IP address. The number of hops is the number of routers that traffic must travel through to reach the destination.

Add Button Click to add a static route to the list.

Edit Button Click to edit a selected static route.

Delete Button Click to delete a selected static route from the list.

163 RASExpress User Guide

IPX Setup

Select the IPX Setup dialog box by clicking IPX Setup in the Configuration menu or by clicking the IPX button on the Configuration toolbar.

Use the IPX Setup dialog box to configure the IPX protocol on the server. When you finish making changes, click Set to implement your changes. Click Close to close the dialog box and cancel any changes not yet implemented.

IPX Remote Access Select to allow the RASExpress server to use the IPX protocol for remote access.

Learning Network Numbers Select to let the RASExpress server automatically detect and use network numbers.

Internal Network Number Type the IPX internal network number for the RASExpress server. This number should be unique on the network.

Route NetBIOS Over IPX Packets This option enables the routing of NetBIOS over IPX packets. Select the check box if you are running applications on NetBIOS over IPX; clear it if you do not need this option.

802.3 Select to enable routing of 802.3 IPX packets on the LAN, then type a network number for the 802.3 frame type.

164 5 MultiManager

802.2 Select to enable routing of 802.2 IPX packets on the LAN, then type a network number for the 802.2 frame type.

Type_II Select to enable routing of Ethernet_II IPX packets on the LAN, then type a network number for the Ethernet_II frame type.

SNAP Select to enable routing of Ethernet SNAP IPX packets on the LAN, then type a network number for the Ethernet SNAP frame type.

PPP Setup

Select the PPP/SLIP Configuration dialog box by clicking PPP Setup in the Configuration menu or by clicking the PPP button on the Configuration toolbar.

Use the PPP/SLIP Configuration dialog box to set up PPP and SLIP routing on your WAN ports. When you finish making changes, click Set to implement your changes. Click Close to close the dialog box and cancel any changes not yet implemented.

List of Lines Lists the WAN ports on the current server. Select the port you want to edit by clicking on it. The current values of the selected port then appear in the dialog box.

SLIP Shows whether the selected port is enabled for Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) remote access. Select if you have SLIP clients dialing into the RASExpress server.

165 RASExpress User Guide

Connection Trace Select to enable a PPP connection log, which is stored in the RASExpress working directory. All information on the connection is included in the log.

Port Type Select the type of connection the port is to be used for. Select Client To LAN if the PPP peer is a dial-up client. Select LAN To LAN if the PPP peer is a dial-up client or another router. If you change the connection type, be sure to change the IP address also.

Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) Type the PPP Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) for the port, in the range 0–1534. The MRU is the packet size in bits.

Async Control Map Type the PPP Asynchronous Control Character Map (ACCM) for the port, in the range 0–FFFFFFFF.

Authentication Protocol Select the PPP authentication protocol for the port. You can choose PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol), or None.

Data Compression Select to enable PPP data compression for the port. Select data compression only if the data link is slower than 57,600 bps and the modem is not doing any data compression. Clear it if the data link is 57,600 bps or faster or if the modem is doing data compression.

Dial on Demand This option is used only for LAN-to-LAN operations. Select it if you want to disconnect the line during idle times and connect only when you need to transfer data. If this option is enabled, RASExpress spoofs all watchdog and serialization packets.

BCP Select to enable the Bridge Control Protocol (BCP) for the port if the other end of the PPP link supports BCP.

Login Name Type a login name in the box for use in LAN-to-LAN security. For a client-to-LAN configuration, this option is unavailable.

Change Password For LAN-to-LAN security, click the Change Password button and type a password in the New Password box, then confirm that you typed it correctly by retyping the password in the Confirm Password box. The password is case-sensitive and must match the password at the other end of the PPP connection. For a client-to-LAN configuration, leave this field blank.

IPXCP Select to enable IPX for remote dial-in clients on the port. Clear the check box to disable IPX. IPXCP is a PPP network control protocol for IPX. It is responsible for configuring, enabling, and disabling the IPX protocol modules on both ends of the point-to-point link.

166 5 MultiManager

CIPX Compression Select to enable CIPX (Compressed Internetwork Packet Exchange) compression of IPX headers for the port. Clear the check box if you do not want CIPX compression. If you select it, CIPX compression must also be enabled on the server for your choice to take effect. You can select this option only if IPXCP is enabled.

Route NetBIOS over IPX Select to enable routing of NetBIOS over IPX packets on the port if you are using applications that require NetBIOS over IPX support. You can select this option only if IPXCP is enabled.

Network Number This box shows the IPX network number of the port. There is a unique number for each port that does not correlate with the existing network number. You can edit this number only if IPXCP is enabled.

Node Number This box shows the IPX remote node number of the port. Each port must have a unique node number. You can edit this number only if IPXCP is enabled.

IPCP Select the check box to enable IP on the port. Clear it if TCP/IP or PPP is not to be used.

VJ Compression Select to enable Van Jacobson compression of TCP/IP headers on the PPP link. VJ compression is used by many PPP clients. If IPCP and VJ Compression are enabled, a dial-in PPP client that uses this compression method may experience greater speed than with VJ Compression disabled.

Forwarding Broadcast Select to enable forwarding of UDP broadcast packets onto the port if your UDP applications depend on the broadcasts. When forwarding is enabled, the RASExpress server forwards to the selected port all UDP broadcast packets that come from the LAN and from the client-to-LAN ports. Forwarding broadcasts on remote links increases the traffic on the links, so enable forwarding only if necessary.

Local Address The box shows the IP network address of the WAN port. This address can be edited only for LAN-to-LAN ports, and only if IPCP is enabled. For all client-to-LAN connections, the local address is the same as the IP address of the LAN port. For LAN-to- LAN ports, make sure the IP address is on a different network or a subnet of any of the existing networks.

Remote Address The box shows the IP network address of the port. It is the address assigned to the remote PPP client. It must be on the same network as the IP local address. If DHCP is enabled as the remote client address type, “Through DHCP” appears in the box; furthermore, it cannot be edited for client-to-LAN ports. If an address pool is used, “Through Pool” appears in the box. This option is available only if IPCP is enabled.

Subnet Mask This box contains the mask used to specify the subnetwork part of the IP address. The subnet mask should conform to the network address class. See “IP Addressing” on page 8.

167 RASExpress User Guide

Multilink PPP

Select the MLPPP Setup dialog box by clicking MultiLink PPP in the Configuration menu or by clicking the MultiLink PPP button on the Configuration toolbar.

Use the MLPPP Setup dialog box to set up Multilink PPP on the RASExpress server. The Multilink PPP protocol bonds two physical ports to one IP address for greater bandwidth. Click Set to implement your changes. Click Close to close the dialog box and cancel any changes not yet implemented. Included in RASExpress MLPPP support is MultiChassis Multilink support, which enables the bundling of multilink connections across different RASExpress servers (which would be the case in a typical ISP setup, where there are one telephone number and several RASExpress servers).

Multilink PPP Status Select to enable Multilink PPP (MLPPP) support on the RASExpress server. RASExpress supports Multilink PPP for both analog and ISDN channels.

Bundle Server Address Type the IP address of the Bundle Server. The Bundle Server is the RASExpress 5.40 or later server chosen to manage the multichassis multilinks. It can be any RASExpress 5.40 or later server on the network, but preferably the one that is equidistant from all RASExpress servers in the bonding group. If the servers are on different networks, then the hop count from the Bundle Server to all the other servers should be more or less equal. Alternately, the one that is least busy can function as the Bundle Server.

Bundle Server UDP Port Identifies the UDP port number that the current RASExpress server uses to communicae between itself and the Bundle Server.

168 5 MultiManager

MAC Layer Bridging

Select the MAC Layer Bridging Setup dialog box by clicking MAC Bridging in the Configuration menu or by clicking the MAC Layer Bridge button on the Configuration toolbar.

Use this dialog box to configure MAC layer bridging for the RASExpress server. Click Set to implement your changes. Click Close to close the dialog box and cancel any changes not yet implemented.

Bridging Select Bridging to enable the server to bridge all MAC layer packets. The default is no bridging. If you do not use networking protocols other than IP and IPX, you should disable bridging, since it slows the RASExpress server by requiring the router to examine each and every packet on the connected LAN segment. However, bridging is needed to support networking protocols like NetBIOS. Note that if you enable bridging and disable routing of IP or IPX on an individual port, bridging of those protocol packets will not take place on that port. However, if you disable IP or IPX entirely for the RASExpress server, then those packets will be bridged.

Spanning Tree Select Spanning Tree bridging to detect looped back links. The default is no Spanning Tree bridging. This option is available only when Bridging is selected.

169 RASExpress User Guide

Communication Setup

Select the Communication Setup dialog box by clicking Communication in the Configuration menu or by clicking the Communication button on the Configuration toolbar. Use this dialog box to configure communication parameters on the current RASExpress server. The Communication Setup dialog box has three tabs for card setup, physical port setup, and virtual port setup. To implement changes and keep the dialog box open, click Apply. To implement changes and close the dialog box, click Close. To cancel changes and close the dialog box, click Cancel.

Card Setup

ISI Card Setup ISI Card Setup shows the base address, IRQ number, and number of ports for each installed ISI card and ISDN BRI card. To add a card, click the Add button; to change a card’s setup, select the card from the list and click the Edit button. In the ISI Card Information window that appears, type new values for the card’s base address, IRQ number, and number of ports, and then click Set.

Note: Setting the wrong base address and IRQ value can lead to unpredictable results.

The base address provides RASExpress with information about activity on a modem card, and allows the card to use one interrupt for all ports on the card. Each card must have a unique base I/O address number. The IRQ number used on each ISI or modem card must be unique. The IRQ requests the attention of the RASExpress software and the computer’s microprocessor. To remove a card from the ISI Card Setup list, select the card and click the Delete button. All information about the card is deleted from the RASExpress server.

170 5 MultiManager

ISDN PRI Select the checkbox if an ISDN PRI card is installed on the current server; clear it if no PRI card is installed. PRI options can be edited only when this checkbox is selected.

Note: No ISDN PRI cards are currently available for the Multi-Tech MiniArrayIII or MultiArrayIII. ISDN BRI cards are configured like ISI cards.

I/O Address This is the base I/O address, in hexadecimal format, of the PRI card. It provides the RASExpress server with information about card activity, and allows the card to use one interrupt for all ports on the card. Only one PRI card can be used on a RASExpress server. The I/O address must be unique.

IRQ Number This is the IRQ number of the PRI card. It must be unique on the server.

Memory Address The PRI card shares memory with the RASExpress server for internal communication. Type the shared memory address in hexadecimal format in this field.

Number of Ports Select the number of ports available to the PRI card. In North America, 23 data channels are standard; in Europe, 30 data channels are standard.

Physical Port Setup

List of Physical Lines Lists the physical ports on the server. To edit the parameters of a port, click its name. The port’s parameter values are displayed in the dialog box, where you can review or edit them.

171 RASExpress User Guide

Line Status Select to enable the port.

General Name The general name for the port. It is used by the workstation redirector software (MCSI) to take the line.

Specific Name Shows the specific name for the port. It identifies the port by modem card number, modem card type, and modem number.

Modem Name Shows the model name of the modem on the port. To change the modem model name, select a new name from the drop-down list.

RTS/CTS Flow Control Select to enable RTS/CTS flow control on the port. RASExpress supports only two types of flow control: RTS/CTS and none.

Auto Dial Out Select the checkbox to enable auto dialout for the port. Clear it to disable auto dialout.

Raw TCP Connection Select to disable all Telnet negotiations on the port, so that the connection is treated as a “raw” TCP data stream. When a standard Telnet connection is made, certain parameters are negotiated, such as terminal type and screen size. However, some applications use Telnet for faxing or credit card validation for which negotiation is neither required nor recommended. It is for such applications that you should enable this option.

TCP Port Number Displays the auto dialout TCP port number. To edit it, click in the box and type a new TCP port number. This field is unavailable if Auto Dial Out is not selected.

Baud Rate Selects the baud rate used by the port. You can select a maximum rate of 460800 bps.

Data Bits Selects the number of data bits used by the port.

Stop Bits Selects the number of stop bits used by the port.

Parity Selects the type of parity used by the port.

172 5 MultiManager

Virtual Port Setup

List of Virtual Lines Lists the WAN ports on the server. To edit the parameters of a port, click its name. The port’s parameter values are then displayed, so you can review or edit them.

Connect TypeSelect the type of LAN to LAN connection. The options are Answering and Dialing.

Telephone Number Shows the number to dial for a LAN to LAN connection. For a client-to-LAN connection, this option is unavailable.

Script File Name Shows the name of the login script file, which is processed only on a LAN-to-LAN dialing port. The script must be compiled by the RASExpress script compiler before it can be used, and the compiled file must be stored in the directory where RASExpress was installed (typically C:\RAS560). It is not necessary to type the file name’s .COD extension. For a client-to-LAN connection, this field is unavailable.

Idle Timeout Shows the number of minutes of no activity that is allowed before RASExpress disconnects the port. A value of 0 disables idle timeout.

Session Timeout Shows the number of minutes allowed per session. When this time is exceeded, RASExpress automatically disconnects the port.

Filter Template Name Type the name of the filter template for the port. For more information about filter templates, see Appendix D.

173 RASExpress User Guide

PPP Detect Select the checkbox to enable autodetection of PPP on the port. Clear the checkbox to disable it.

Protocol Select the protocol that is to be used for auto login on the port when PPP Detect is enabled. The options are None, Telnet, and Rlogin.

Host IP Address Type the Telnet or Rlogin host IP address to be used when PPP Detect is enabled. This field can be edited only if the Protocol field is set to Telnet or Rlogin.

Tunneling Protocol Select PPTP to enable tunneling on the port. Select None to disable tunneling.

Tunnel Server Address Type the IP address of the server used for PPTP tunneling. This field is inactive if tunneling is disabled.

Bundling with a LAN-to-LAN Port Select to bundle the port with a PPP port configured as a LAN-to-LAN port. Any call on such a reserved port is mapped to the bundled PPP port. You can do multilink PPP on LAN-to-LAN connections by reserving multiple virtual ports for a single PPP port.

Bundled Port Select the PPP port to be bundled with the virtual port.

ISDN PRI Setup

Select the ISDN PRI Setup dialog box by clicking ISDN in the Configuration menu or by clicking the ISDN button on the Configuration toolbar. Use this dialog box to configure PRI cards on servers running versions of RASExpress older than 5.40. For servers running RASExpress 5.40 or greater, where PRI configuration is done through the Communication Setup dialog box, this command is unavailable.

Note: No ISDN PRI cards are available for the Multi-Tech MiniArrayIII or MultiArrayIII. ISDN BRI cards are configured like ISI cards.

174 5 MultiManager

ISDN PRI Select the checkbox if an ISDN PRI card is installed on the current server; clear it if no PRI card is installed. PRI options can be edited only when this checkbox is selected.

IRQ Number This is the IRQ number of the PRI card. It must be unique on the server.

Memory Address The PRI card shares memory with the RASExpress server for internal communication. Type the shared memory address in hexadecimal format in this field.

Number of Ports Select the number of ports available to the PRI card. In North America, 23 data channels are standard; in Europe, 30 data channels are standard.

SNMP Setup

Select the SNMP Setup dialog box by clicking SNMP in the Configuration menu or by clicking the SNMP button on the Configuration toolbar.

The RASExpress server can be managed or configured by any standard Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) manager. Use this dialog box to configure SNMP management for the server. To implement changes, click Set. To close the dialog box and cancel any changes not yet implemented, click Close.

SNMP Agent Select to enable SNMP management of the current server.

175 RASExpress User Guide

IP Address Type the IP address of the SNMP trap manager.

Community Name Type the community name of the SNMP trap manager. Any SNMP traps that are generated by the RASExpress server will be sent to this manager.

Port Number Type the port number of the SNMP trap manager. The default port number is 162.

Get Community Name The RASExpress server can be configured for Get and Set communities. Type the name of the Get community here. The default is public.

Get Permission Select the Get community permission. The choices are Read Only and Read/Write. The default is Read Only.

Set Community Name Type the name of the Set community. The default is supervisor.

Set Permission Select the Set community permission. The choices are Read Only and Read/Write. The default is Read/Write.

Authentication Select whether SNMP authentication is simple or encrypted. Set authentication to Clear Text Community Name if you are using MultiCommManager or a third party manager. This uses plain text for the Get and Set community names. You may also select Clear Text Community Name if you are using Multi-Tech MultiManager Set authentication to Encrypted Name Password only if you are using Multi-Tech MultiManager (not MultiCommManager) to manage your servers. When authentication is encrypted, the administrative user name and password and the PDU ID (a field in the SNMP request to the agent) are used to prepare an encrypted sequence for authentication of the SNMP request by the agent (RAS). It is a combination understood only between the RASExpress server and MultiManager.

176 5 MultiManager

SNTP Setup

Select the SNTP Setup dialog box by clicking SNTP in the Configuration menu or by clicking the SNTP button on the Configuration toolbar.

For accounting accuracy, the RASExpress server can use Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) signals from a time server to adjust its time and date. Use this dialog box to set up SNTP for the server. To implement changes to the setup, click Set. To close the dialog box and cancel any changes not yet implemented, click Close.

SNTP Client Select to enable the RASExpress server to synchronize its clock using SNTP signals.

SNTP Server Address Type the IP address of the SNTP server you want to use as a time source.

Time Zone Type a one- to three-letter abbreviation for the time zone of the RASExpress server that you are configuring. It is used for display purposes only.

Offset from UTC Set the time difference between the location of the RASExpress server and the prime meridian at Greenwich, U.K. Sites west of Greenwich have negative numbers, and those east of Greenwich have positive numbers.

U.S. time zone Offset from UTC Eastern Standard (EST) -05:00 Central Standard (CST) -06:00 Mountain Standard (MST) -07:00 Pacific Standard (PST) -08:00

Daylight Savings Select to make RASExpress automatically adjust the clock for daylight-saving time.

177 RASExpress User Guide

Move Clock By Type the number of minutes that the clock changes during the shift to and from daylight-saving time. Typically it is 60 minutes.

Start Ordinal Daylight-saving time usually starts at the same time on the same day of the week in the same month every year. Each day of the week occurs four or five times a month. Select on which occurrence daylight-saving time starts: the first, second, third, fourth, or last of the month. In the U.S.A. daylight-saving time starts at 2:00 A.M. on the first Sunday in April.

Start Day Select the day of the week that daylight-saving time starts.

Start Month Select the month that daylight-saving time starts.

Start Time Type the time of day that daylight-saving time starts.

End Ordinal Select on which occurrence of the selected day of the week that daylight-saving time ends: the first, second, third, fourth, or last of the month. In the U.S.A. daylight- saving time ends at 2:00 A.M. on the last Sunday in October.

End Day Select the day of the week that daylight-saving time ends.

End Month Select the month that daylight-saving time ends.

End Time Type the time of day that daylight-saving time ends.

178 5 MultiManager

SMTP Client Setup

Select the SMTP Client Setup dialog box by clicking SMTP in the Configuration menu or by clicking the SMTP button on the Configuration toolbar.

Use this dialog box to set up SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) service on the RASExpress server. To implement changes to the setup, click Set. To close the dialog box and cancel any changes not yet implemented, click Close.

SMTP Client Select the checkbox to enable SMTP service. Clear it to disable SMTP service. This option must be enabled to make the other SMTP options available.

SMTP Server IP Address Type the IP address of the SMTP server.

SMTP Sender E-Mail Address Type the e-mail address of the RASExpress server.

List of Recipients This box displays the list of e-mail recipients. E-mail alert messages are sent to these recipients if any of the four following options are enabled and the conditions are met. • To add a recipient, click Add, then type the recipient’s e-mail address in the List of Recipients: Add dialog box. (The Index field indicates the position of the recipient in the list; it cannot be edited.) • To edit an entry, select the entry, click Edit, then edit the address in the List of Recipients: Edit dialog box. • To delete an entry from the list, select the entry, then click Delete

Send Mail on Message File Full Select if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the List of Recipients when the message file is full.

179 RASExpress User Guide

Send Mail on Debug Log Full Select if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the List of Recipients when the debug log is full.

Send Mail on Log File Full Select if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the List of Recipients when the log file is full.

Send Mail After Server Upgrade Select if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the List of Recipients list when the server is upgraded.

Send RAS Alive Mail Select if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the List of Recipients list that the RASExpress server is running. The message is sent once per hour.

Send Mail on At Command Done Select if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the List of Recipients when an At command has been executed. At commands are Telnet commands that run at a specified date and time. For more information, see Appendix C.

OSPF Configuration

Select the OSPF Configuration dialog box by clicking OSPF Setup in the Configuration menu. Use this dialog box to create an OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) database for the current RASExpress server. To implement changes, click Set. To close the dialog box and cancel any changes not yet implemented, click Close.

180 5 MultiManager

OSPF Routing Enables OSPF routing on the server.

Router ID The identification number of the OSPF router. It has the same format as an IP address, but identifies the router independent of its IP Address.

Area Configuration This list specifies the areas within the RASExpress server’s autonomous system (AS). An OSPF area is made up of internal routers linked to other areas within an (AS) by area border routers. To delete an area, select it and click Delete. To edit an area, select it and click Edit. To add a new area, click Add. In the latter two cases, the Area Configuration dialog box opens with the following options:

Area ID The identification number assigned to the area. It has the same format as an IP address, but has the function of defining a summarization point for Link State Advertisements. The default value is 0.0.0.0, the same as the backbone.

Stub Area Determines whether AS external advertisements will be flooded through the area. A stub area cannot be enabled for backbone areas.

Inject Default Route Determines whether a default route is summarized into a stub area if the OSPF router is connected to multiple areas.

Address Range Configuration This list specifies the address ranges in the selected OSPF area. Although an area can be loosely defined to be a collection of networks, in actuality an area is specified to be a list of address ranges. Each address range is defined as an address and mask pair. Many separate networks may then be contained in a single address range, just as a subnetted network is composed of many separate subnets. To delete an address range, select it and click Delete. To edit an address range, select it and click Edit. To add a new address range, click Add. In the latter two cases, the Address Range Configuration dialog box opens with the following options:

Address The IP address and IP network mask pair specify the IP addresses contained in the address range. For example, the class B address range of X.X.X.X with a network mask of 255.255.0.0 includes all IP addresses from X.X.0.0 to X.X.255.255.

181 RASExpress User Guide

Mask See “Address.”

Advertise Indicates whether the networks contained in the address range will be advertised or hidden from other areas.

Interface Configuration An interface is is sometimes referred to as a link. It is the connection between a router and one of its attached networks. An interface has state information associated with it, which is obtained from the underlying lower level protocols and the routing protocol itself. An interface to a network has associated with it a single IP address and mask (unless the network is an unnumbered point-to-point network).

List of Lines The list of interfaces on the RASExpress server. To see how OSPF routing is configured on an interface, click its name.

Interface Status Indicates whether OSPF routing is enabled on the interface. OSPF can be enabled on LAN and WAN ports of type LAN-toLAN.

Metric Indicates the cost of sending a packet on the interface, expressed in the link state metric.

Router Dead Interval The number of seconds to wait before the neighbors should declare the OSPF router down if they do not receive any hello packets from it.

Transmit Delay The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link State Update packet over this interface.

Priority Indicates the priority for the OSPF router to become the Designated Router on the connected interface.

Interface Area ID The area to which this interface belongs.

Hello Interval The number of seconds between the hello packets sent on the interface by the OSPF router.

Retransmit Interval The number of seconds between link state advertisement transmissions.

Authentication Type The authentication scheme used on the attached network.

Plain Text Password The simple password to be used for the attached network.

182 5 MultiManager

Telnet Setup

Select the Telnet Setup dialog box by clicking Telnet in the Configuration menu or by clicking the Telnet button on the Configuration toolbar. Use this dialog box to configure Telnet options for the current RASExpress server.

Telnet Administration Select if you want to be able to configure and manage the RASExpress server from any Telnet client.

Telnet Client Select to allow a remote user who has dialed in to the RASExpress server to Telnet to different hosts on the network.

Telnet Dialout Select to allow users to use any Telnet client to select a modem on the RASExpress server to dial out to UNIX hosts and BBSs.

Telnet Auto Dialout Select to allow a Telnet client to connect to the number in Auto Dialout Port Number to use any free modem on the RASExpress server

Auto Dialout Port Number If Telnet Auto Dialout is enabled, you can type the TCP port number that is to be used for Telnet auto dialout.

Interface Type Select the interface type for the Telnet client; the choices are MENU and COMMAND. Menu mode allows the RASExpress server to be configured using menus. Command mode allows the RASExpress server to be configured by typing Telnet commands (see Appendix C).

Message Update Port Number Type the message port number for the RASExpress server. You can then Telnet to this port to see current status messages.

183 RASExpress User Guide

Applications

Select the Application Setup dialog box by clicking Applications in the Configuration menu or by clicking the Applications button on the Configuration toolbar.

Use the Application Setup dialog box to enable or disable several applications that are installed with RASExpress.

Web Server Select to allow the RASExpress server to function as a Web server so that it can be managed by a Web browser.

FTP Select to allow File Transfer Protocol (FTP) file transfers between the RASExpress server and the management console. You can use FTP to send upgrade files to the RASExpress server (see Appendix B). Unlike TFTP, FTP has password protection.

RLOGIN RLOGIN is a protocol used for remote logins. The RASExpress server can act as an RLOGIN client and connect to an RLOGIN server when a terminal is used to dial in. Enable this option if you need to give access to RLOGIN servers when the RASEx- press server is connected through a terminal.

184 5 MultiManager

Security Setup

Select the Security Setup dialog box by clicking Security in the Configuration menu or by clicking the Security button on the Configuration toolbar.

Use this dialog box to configure the RASExpress server to work with your security servers. The RASExpress server supports the RADIUS and TACACS+ protocols for authentication.

Security Protocol Select Radius if you have a RADIUS security server on your network. Select Tacacs+ if you have a TACACS+ security server on your network. If you do not have a security server on your network, select Local.

Accounting Select to enable accounting support in the security server. Select it if you want your RADIUS or TACACS+ server to keep track of accounting information such as number of bytes sent, number of bytes received, login time, logout time, port number, etc.

TACACS+ Encryption Select to enable encryption of TACACS+ packets between the RASExpress server and the TACACS+ security server. Enable only if your TACACS+ server supports encryption.

Security Shared Secret Type the shared secret used for communication between the RASExpress server and the security server. It must match the shared secret configured at the security server.

Confirm Shared Secret Retype the shared secret to confirm that you have entered it correctly.

185 RASExpress User Guide

Primary Server Address Type the IP address of your primary security server.

Backup Servers Type the IP addresses of your backup security servers. You can specify up to three backup security servers.

Call Back Delay Enter the attribute value that you have chosen for Callback Delay. You must set up the same attribute in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique attribute value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS attributes or any other custom attributes. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Remote User Enter Number Enter the attribute value that you have chosen for Remote User Enter Number. You must set up the same attribute in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique attribute value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS attributes or any other custom attributes. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Protocol Permissions Enter the attribute value that you have chosen for Protocol Permissions. You must set up the same attribute in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique attribute value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS attributes or any other custom attributes. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Inbound User Service Enter the service type value that you have chosen for Inbound User. You must set up the same service type value in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique service type value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS service types or any other custom service types. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Shell User Service Enter the service type value that you have chosen for Shell User. You must set up the same service type value in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique service type value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS service types or any other custom service types. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Allow Call If Security Server Down Select to provide access by any user if the primary and all backup security servers are down. Clear to prevent any user from logging on if the security servers are all down.

186 5 MultiManager

User Setup

Select the User Setup dialog box by clicking User Setup in the Configuration menu.

Use this dialog box to add users to the user database, to delete them from the user database, to edit user passwords and phone numbers, and to edit mode, line, protocol, time, and other permissions for each user.

List of Users This is a list of all the users in the user database. Initially it is empty. To edit a user record, click the user name in the List of Users. The settings for the selected user are then displayed in the User Setup dialog box, where you can edit them.

Add Button Use this button to add a new user to the user database. To add a new user 1. Click the Add button. 2. In the User Information dialog box, type a unique user name, and then click OK. The Password dialog box appears. 3. In the New Password box, type the password that the user will use to log into the RASExpress server. The password is case-sensitive. It should be unique and easy for the user to remember. 4. In the Confirm Password box, retype the password to confirm it, and then click OK. Note: the new record will not be created if you press ENTER instead of clicking OK.

187 RASExpress User Guide

5. In the User Setup dialog box, edit the other settings for the new user, and then click Save to save the information. 6. When you click Save, the following message appears: Do You Want to Synchronize with the Other Devices? If you want the new user to be added to the user databases on all your local RASExpress servers, click Yes. If you want separate user databases, click No.

Delete Button Click to delete the selected user from the user database.

Clone Button Click to copy the settings for the selected user to another user or users. A list of users appears, from which you can select the user records you want to copy the settings to.

Edit Button Click to edit the user name.

Remote User Enter No. Select ON to indicate that the user is mobile. When the user calls into the RASExpress server, the user is prompted to type his or her local telephone number. The RASExpress server then calls back the user at that number.

Call Back No To enable callback security, type the user’s callback security phone number in this field. When a user calls in with a valid user name and password, the RASExpress server hangs up. Then, after the delay specified in the Call Back Delay box, the RASExpress server calls back the user at the callback number. This value can be edited only if the Remote User Enter No. box is disabled by selecting OFF.

Call Back Delay Type the length of time in seconds that the RASExpress server waits before calling back a user. The value entered in this box is valid only when the Remote User Enter Number field is set to ON, or if a phone number has been entered in the Call Back Number field.

Static IP Address The user’s static IP address. A value of 000.000.000.000 indicates no static address.

No. of Concurrent Logins The number of concurrent logins the user is permitted. A value of 0 indicates that there is no limit on the number of concurrent logins.

Note: For multilink connections, the number of concurrent logins permitted should be at least the number of links in the multilink bundle.

Change Password Click to change the user password. In the Password dialog box, type the new password in the New Password box, and then retype it in the Confirm Password box. The password is case-sensitive. It should be unique and easy for the user to remember. For security, the password characters are shown as a string of asterisks.

188 5 MultiManager

Mode Permissions Selects the types of connections the user is permitted to use. By default, all modes are permitted. To change a mode permission, click the check box for the mode.

Protocols Permitted Selects the network protocols the user is permitted to use. By default, all three protocols are permitted. To change a protocol permission, click the check box for the protocol.

Connection Time Limit Type the number of minutes the user is allowed to remain connected during a session. If the user exceeds the time limit displayed in the box, the RASExpress server automatically breaks the connection. A value of zero (the default value) indicates no time limit.

Terminal Login In the Auto Login Protocol box, select the protocol the user will use to automatically log in to a host computer. If you do not want the user to have auto login permission, select None. If you select Telnet or RLogin, type the IP address of the host computer in the Host Name box.

Tunnel Protocol Use Tunneling Protocol to select a tunneling protocol for the user. You can select PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) or None, which disables tunneling altogether. If you select PPTP, type the IP address of the PPTP server in the Host Name box.

Time of Day Logins Button Click to open the Time of Day Logins dialog box, which shows the times that the user is allowed to access the RASExpress server.

RASExpress divides the week into half-hour blocks, starting at midnight. By default, the user is allowed to call at any time. You can select blocks by clicking them individually, by clicking a Time Slot button, or by clicking the day of the week. Then, click either the Allow or the Disallow button to change permission for the selected blocks. Click OK to save your changes when you are done.

189 RASExpress User Guide

Line Permission Button Click to open the Line Permissions dialog box, which shows which of the available lines the user is permitted to use.

To move a line from the Lines Not Permitted list to the Lines Permitted list, select it, and then click Add. To move a line from the Lines Permitted list to the Lines Not Permitted list, select it, and then click Delete.

Modem Setup

Use the Modem Setup dialog box to create and edit configurations for your modems. A configuration is implemented when you select the modem name. When you are done, click Save to save the information, and then click Close to close the dialog box.

RASExpress includes a preconfigured list of modems. To edit a modem configuration, select the modem in the Modem Name list, and then click Edit. The modem settings

190 5 MultiManager appear in the Modem Setup dialog box, where they can be edited. To add a new modem, click Add and type the modem name in the Add Modem Name dialog box. Then supply the required information in the Modem Setup dialog box. To delete a modem from the Modem Name list, select the modem name, and then click Delete.

Modem Name This list shows the names of the available modem configurations. To edit or delete a configuration, first select the configuration name by clicking it.

Initializing String 1–5 These boxes display the initialization string or strings used to configure the modem when power is applied or the modem is reset. Changing preconfigured modem strings is not recommended. If you want to use a custom initialization string, create and name a new modem configuration. Then copy information from one of the listed modems and modify the string as required.

Dial Prefix This box displays the dial prefix, which is automatically sent to the modem before the phone number. The default prefix is the tone dialing command ATDT.

Dial Suffix This box displays the dial suffix, which is automatically sent to the modem after the phone number. This box is normally empty.

Hangup String This field displays the string used to end a call.

Tones, Command, Message Strings These boxes show the modem’s result codes, which are used by RASExpress to monitor calls. They should be spelled exactly the same as the modem sends them. By default, these boxes are set for verbose responses. If your modem is set for terse responses, refer to the modem’s manual for the terse result codes.

191 RASExpress User Guide

Administrator Setup

Select Admin. Setup to open the Administrator Configuration dialog box. Use this dialog box to review and edit the list of administrators, who are users with administrative rights.

To configure an administrator, select the administrator name in Admin List, then select the operation you want to perform. If you select Delete, the administrator name is deleted from the list. If you select any other option, the Add/Edit Administrator Config dialog box appears, in which you can edit the administrator’s user name, password, and configuration and management permissions.

User Name Type the administrator’s user name.

User Password Type the administrator’s password.

Permissions Select the administrator’s permissions. If Configuration is selected, the administrator can configure the RASExpress server. If Management is selected, the administrator can manage the RASExpress server and view statistics. If neither is selected, the administrator can only view statistics. When you are done, click Set to save your changes, and then click Close to close the dialog box.

192 5 MultiManager

Configuration File Setup

Select Config File Setup to open the Configuration File Setup dialog box. Use this dialog box to select a previous configuration.

When you change the configuration of a RASExpress 5.60 or later server, the new configuration is automatically saved in a sequentially-numbered file. To return the server to a previous configuration, select the appropriate configuration file, and then click OK. To set the maximum number of saved configuration files, see “Configuration Files to Keep” on page 24.

193 RASExpress User Guide

Management Menu

Use the Management menu to manage the servers and phone lines on the current network map.

Server Management

Select the Server Management dialog box by clicking Server Management in the Management menu or by clicking the Server Management button in the Management toolbar.

Use the Server Management dialog box to lock or unlock the configuration of the current server, to save changes to the configuration, or to reboot or restart the server.

Configuration Lock The configuration of the current server can be locked to prevent tampering or acci- dental changes. When a server is locked it becomes read-only, except to MultiManager. The current status of the configuration lock is shown in the Lock Status box. A server can be locked or unlocked by clicking the Lock or Unlock button, respectively.

Server Time Shows the server’s system time in 24-hour format. To change the time, type a new value and click Set.

Save Configuration Click the Save Configuration button to save to disk any changes you have made to the server configuration.

Reboot Server Click the Reboot Server button to reboot the server. If you want only to restart the ISI drivers without rebooting the computer, select the Restart Server button instead.

Restart Server Click the Restart Server button to restart the server’s ISI drivers. Some configuration changes require that the server’s drivers be restarted before the changes take effect. The Restart Required box notifies you when this is the case. Restarting the server

194 5 MultiManager

restarts only the ISI drivers, and does not bring the server completely down; it is faster than rebooting the server.

Line Management

Select the Line Information Table by clicking Line Management in the Management menu or by clicking the Line Management button on the Management toolbar.

The Line Information Table contains a list of the phone lines controlled by the current RASExpress server. Line Index is the line index number. Type displays the type of call: RN (idle), IN (inbound), or OUT (outbound). Current Status displays the current status of the line, which can be WAITING FOR CALL, ON LINE, WAITING TO CALL, CALLING BACK, OUT OF SERVICE, INITIALIZING, or TELNET ON LINE. User Name displays the user name of the person currently using the line. Modem Type displays the name of themodem configuration used on the line. Parameters displays the current serial port speed, number of data bits, number of stop bits, and parity type. To change the status of a line, select its index number and click one of the following buttons.

Reset Line Click the Reset Line button to reinitialize the modem on the selected line.

Put Line Out of Service Click the Put Line Out of Service button to disable the selected line. The line’s status in the list of lines changes to OUT OF SERVICE. If the line is already out of service, this button is disabled.

Disconnect Click the Disconnect button to break the connection on the selected line. The line immediately becomes ready for another call.

Enable Line Click the Enable Line button to put a line back into service that has been taken out of service. If the line is already in service, this button is disabled.

Refresh Click the Refresh button to refresh the display.

195 RASExpress User Guide

EIA Signals

Select the EIA Status Table by clicking EIA Signals in the Management menu or by clicking the EIA Signals button on the Management toolbar.

The EIA Status Table displays the current status of the EIA RS-232 signals on each line. DTR and RTS are sent by the port. CTS, DSR, DCD, and RI are received by the port. The DSR signal is not used by the RASExpress server. The status for each signal can be either ON or OFF.

Trap Setup

Select the Trap Setup dialog box by clicking Trap Setup in the Management menu or by clicking the Trap Setup button on the Management toolbar.

Use the Trap Setup dialog box to set the traps that the RASExpress server sends to the trap manager. To set or clear a trap, click the check box for the trap. A checkmark indicates that the trap has been set. When you have finished making changes, click Set to save them. Traps can be displayed by clicking Traps View in the Management menu.

Comm Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the communication setup.

Line Management Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the line management.

196 5 MultiManager

General Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the general server setup.

IP Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the IP setup.

IPX Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the IPX setup.

SMTP Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the SMTP setup.

PPP Configuration Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the PPP configuration.

MAC Layer Bridge Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the setup of the MAC layer bridging.

Telnet Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the Telnet setup.

SNMP Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the SNMP setup.

Web Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the World Wide Web setup.

Port Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the port setup.

FTP Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the FTP setup.

TFTP Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the TFTP setup.

RLogin Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the RLOGIN setup.

Security Setup Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the security setup.

SNTP Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the SNTP setup.

OSPF Setup Trap State Sends a trap when there is a change in the OSPF setup.

Admin. Setup Trap Sends a trap when there is a change in the administrator setup.

Reboot Required Trap Sends a trap when a configuration change is made that requires a reboot of the server.

197 RASExpress User Guide

Reboot History

Select the Reboot History dialog box by clicking Reboot History in the Management menu or by clicking the Reboot History button on the Management toolbar.

The Reboot History dialog box displays a reboot/restart history for all the RASExpress servers in the network map.

Device Name Displays the name of the RASExpress server, as defined in the network map.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the RASExpress server.

Previous Boot Time Displays the date and time the server was previously booted or restarted.

Boot Time Displays the date and time the server was last booted or restarted.

198 5 MultiManager

Trap View

Select the Trap window by clicking Trap View in the Management menu, by clicking the Trap View button on the Management toolbar, or by maximizing the Trap window. The Trap window can only be minimized; it cannot be closed. It maximizes automatically whenever the MultiManager window is maximized.

The Trap dialog box shows traps that have been sent to MultiManager since traps were last cleared. This is where traps that have been set in the Trap Setup dialog box are displayed.

Device Name Displays the name of the RASExpress server that sent the trap, as defined in the network map.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the RASExpress server that sent the trap.

Date Displays the date when the trap was received.

Time Displays the time when the trap was received.

Trap Type Displays the type of trap. Trap types follow SNMP standards. There are six basic types: Cold Start, Warm Start, Link Down, Link Up, Authentication Failure, EGP Neighbor Loss, and Enterprise Specific.

Trap Parameter Displays which trap was sent when the trap was enterprise specific.

Clear Traps Click the Clear Traps button to clear all trap messages from the Trap dialog box.

199 RASExpress User Guide

Bundle Information

Select the Bundle Info Table dialog box by clicking Bundle Information in the Management menu. The dialog box displays information about bundle connections.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the bundle server.

Port Number Displays the IP port number of the bundle server.

User Name Displays the name of the user logged in on the port.

Remote EPD Class Displays the End Point Discriminator class.

Remote EPD Displays the End Point Discriminator data stream.

200 5 MultiManager

Statistics Menu

Use the Statistics menu to display statistics about the operation of the selected RASExpress server.

Summary Statistics

Select the Summary Statistics dialog box by clicking Summary in the Statistics menu or by clicking the Summary Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

Summary Statistics displays a statistical summary of server activities since the current RASExpress server was last started. To reset the statistics to zero, click the Reset Statistics button.

201 RASExpress User Guide

General Statistics

Select the General Statistics dialog box by clicking General in the Statistics menu or by clicking the General Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

The General Statistics dialog box displays current statistics for each active line. The Port Thruput columns display throughput activity (in bytes per second in near real- time) when sending and receiving data to and from the port. The Port Pending Bytes columns display the number of bytes that are waiting to be processed. The Port Total Bytes columns display the total number of bytes that have been sent to and received from the port during the current connection. When the line is waiting for a call or is idle, all values in these columns are zero. To reset the statistics to zero, click the Reset Statistics button.

IP ARP Statistics

Select the ARP Statistics dialog box by clicking IP in the Statistics menu and then clicking ARP, or by clicking the ARP Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

The ARP Statistics dialog box displays ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) statistics since the current RASExpress server was last started.

202 5 MultiManager

IP ICMP Statistics

Select the ICMP Statistics dialog box by clicking IP in the Statistics menu and then clicking ICMP, or by clicking the ICMP Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

The ICMP Statistics dialog box displays ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) statistics since the current RASExpress server was last started.

IP RIP Statistics

Select the RIP Statistics dialog box by clicking IP in the Statistics menu and then clicking RIP, or by clicking the RIP Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

The RIP Statistics dialog box displays RIP (Routing Information Protocol) statistics since the current RASExpress server was last started.

203 RASExpress User Guide

IP TCP Statistics

Select the TCP Statistics dialog box by clicking IP in the Statistics menu and then clicking TCP, or by clicking the TCP Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

The TCP Statistics dialog box displays TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) statistics since the current RASExpress server was last started.

IP UDP Statistics

Select the UDP Statistics dialog box by clicking IP in the Statistics menu and then clicking UDP, or by clicking the UDP Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

The UDP Statistics dialog box displays UDP (User Datagram Protocol) statistics since the current RASExpress server was last started.

204 5 MultiManager

IP General Statistics

Select the IP General Statistics dialog box by clicking IP in the Statistics menu and then clicking General, or by clicking the IP General Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

The IP General Statistics dialog box displays general IP (Internet Protocol) statistics since the current RASExpress server was last started.

IP Port Statistics

Select the IP Port Statistics dialog box by clicking IP in the Statistics menu and then clicking Port, or by clicking the IP Port Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

The IP Port Statistics dialog box displays IP (Internet Protocol) port LAN statistics since the current RASExpress server was last started. Information is displayed only for remote node lines. For remote control connections, all values are zero. To reset the statistics to zero, click the Reset Statistics button.

205 RASExpress User Guide

IPX Port Statistics

Select the IPX Port Statistics dialog box by clicking IPX Port in the Statistics menu, or by clicking the IPX Port Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

The IPX Port Statistics dialog box displays IPX (Internet Package eXchange) port LAN statistics since the current RASExpress server was last started. Information is displayed only for remote node lines. For remote control connections, all values are zero. To reset the statistics to zero, click the Reset Statistics button.

PPP Statistics

Select the PPP Statistics dialog box by clicking PPP in the Statistics menu, or by clicking the PPP Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

The PPP Statistics dialog box displays the number of Network Control Protocol (NCP) and Link Control Protocol (LCP) bytes sent or received for each active WAN port. LCP packets are usually exchanged only during the establishment of the PPP connection. The NCP statistics include both IPX and IP packets. Also displayed are the port type and real port number. Information is displayed only for remote node lines. For remote control connections, all values are zero. To reset the statistics to zero, click the Reset Statistics button.

206 5 MultiManager

Port Status

Select the Port Status dialog box by clicking Port Status in the Statistics menu, or by clicking the Port Status button on the Statistics toolbar.

The Port Status dialog box displays the current status of the ports on the RASExpress server. Information that is displayed includes the physical port name, the virtual port name, the line type (remote node, incoming, outgoing), line status, user name, data paramenters (speed, data bits, parity, and stop bits), connect string, connect time, total time, net number, node number, IP address, throughput, and bytes transmitted and received. To reset the statistics to zero, click the Reset Statistics button.

Port Summary

Select the Port Summary dialog box by clicking Port Summary in the Statistics menu, or by clicking the Port Summary button on the Statistics toolbar.

The Port Summary dialog box displays the total numbers of incoming and outgoing analog and digital calls and other statistics for each port since the last server reboot. To reset the statistics to zero, click the Reset Statistics button.

207 RASExpress User Guide

Port Statistics

Select the Port Statistics dialog box by clicking Port in the Statistics menu, or by clicking the Port Statistics button on the Statistics toolbar.

The Port Statistics dialog box displays the total number of IP and IPX packets sent and received on each port since the last reboot of the server. To reset the IP statistics to zero, click the Reset IP Statistics button. To reset the IPX statistics to zero, click the Reset IPX Statistics button.

Connect String Table

Click the Connect String Table command in the Statistics menu to display a statistical analysis of the connections for the selected ports.

In the Port Information dialog box, select the ports whose connect string statistics you want to review. When you click OK, the Connect String Table appears. The Connect String Table displays a summary of connect string statistics as well as statistics for each selected port.

208 5 MultiManager

TCP Connection Table

Select the TCP Connection Table by clicking TCP Connection Table in the Statistics menu.

The TCP Connection Table shows the status of the TCP ports on the RASExpress server. Shown are the IP address of the local port; the number of the local port; the IP address of the remote port; the number of the remote port; the port connection status; the protocol used on the port; the user name and connect time if the port is connected; and the total connection time since the last reboot of the server.

209 RASExpress User Guide

Call History

Select the Call History dialog box by clicking Call History in the Statistics menu.

The Call History dialog box displays the last ten calls of each port on the server. Information includes the connect string, the user name, the connect and disconnect times, the duration of each completed call, and the daylight savings (if any) in minutes.

210 5 MultiManager

Analyzer Menu

Use the Analyzer menu to display statistics about the current server in the form of bar graphs. You can display both current statistics (online statistics) and statistics for a specified period (offline statistics).

Offline Statistical Analyzer

RASExpress can be set up to record connection information in hourly call log files (page 159). Use the Offline Statistical Analyzer dialog box to analyze these files for call statistics for a specified period. Most of the results are displayed as bar graphs.

To analyze call statistics 1. Select the server you want to analyze in the device tree or the network map. 2. In the Analyzer menu, click Off_Line Statistics. The Offline Statistical Analyzer dialog box appears. 3. In the User Name and Password boxes, type the user name and password required to FTP from the server. 4. In the Analysis Start Period group, select the start date and time of the period you want to analyze. 5. In the Analysis Stop Period group, select the stop date and time of the period you want to analyze. 6. In the Type of Statistics group, select the kinds of analysis you want.

211 RASExpress User Guide

7. If you select a User-Line analysis, in the User-Line Database group select Build from file to select user names and lines you want analyzed from the log files for the analysis period. Select Manual to manually enter the user names and lines you want analyed. 8. Select Print Log Records to print the log records on your printer, or Export Log Records to export the log records to a text file for import into a spreadsheet or database program. The exported log file is stored in the MultiManager folder as Logfile.log. 9. Click OK. The Statistical Analyzer FTPs the call log files from the current server and displays the following dialog box while it analyzes them. If any log files are missing for the period, the Statistical Analyzer displays the names of the missing files in the list on the right.

10. Click Done when the analysis is complete. The Statistical Analyzer creates a bar graph or table for each analysis type and displays them in overlapping windows. Use the Window menu to switch between the graphs, and the File | Print command to print them.

Types of Statistics The Statistical Analyzer can analyze and display the following types of statistics.

Disconnection Type Shows disconnections by type, such as supervisor disconnect, idle timeout, CD drop, and session timeout.

Connect String Shows the number of connections for each connect string.

Dial In Dial Out Shows the number of incoming and outgoing analog and ISDN calls on each port.

212 5 MultiManager

Most Used User Usage Shows how much each user used the server during the analysis period, sorted by amount of usage.

Alphabetical User Usage Shows how much each user used the server during the analysis period, sorted alphabetically by user name.

Connection Details Shows a detailed connection history for the analysis period, including connect and disconnect times, total usage times, user names, port IDs, packet statistics, and so forth. Note: If the connection was open at either the start or the end of the period, the total usage time is shown as “Not Available.”

Line Usage Shows fluctuations in the number of lines in use over time.

Load Line Shows fluctuations in total line activity over time.

User-Line Shows for how long each selected user was connected to each selected port during the analysis period. At the beginning of the analysis, you are requested to select the user names and ports you want analyzed either from the Build User Line Names from file dialog box or the Manual Build of User-Line Database dialog box, depending on which option you selected in the Offline Statistical Analyzer dialog box. In the Build User Line Names from file dialog box, you can select user names and lines that you want analyzed from lists of user names and lines recorded in the log files for the analysis period. In the Manual Build of User-Line Database dialog box, you must know and enter manually the user names and lines that you want analyzed.

213 RASExpress User Guide

Online Statistics

Online statistics report port statistics for the current server since the server last started. For the most part, these are the same statistics as reported in the Statistics menu, but displayed as bar graphs instead of numerically. To display a bar graph of any of the following statistics, point to On_Line Statistics in the Analyzer menu, and then click the command for the statistics you want to review.

ARP Statistics The ARP Statistics graph shows ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) statistics.

UDP Statistics The UDP Statistics graph shows UDP (User Datagram Protocol) statistics.

TCP Connection Statistics The TCP Connection Statistics graph shows the numbers of successful and unsuccessful TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) connection attempts.

TCP Packet Statistics The TCP Packet Statistics graph shows TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) packet statistics.

Port Throughput The Port Throughput graph shows throughput activity (in bytes per second) for each port when sending and receiving data through the port.

Dial In Dial Out The Dial In Dial Out graph shows the total number of incoming and outgoing analog and digital calls and other statistics for each port since the last reboot of the server.

IP Port Statistics The IP Port Statistics graph shows IP (Internet Protocol) port LAN statistics for one or more ports. Information is displayed only for remote node lines. For remote control connections, all values are zero.

IPX Port Statistics The IPX Port Statistics graph shows IPX (Internet Package eXchange) port LAN statistics for one or more ports. Information is displayed only for remote node lines. For remote control connections, all values are zero.

214 5 MultiManager

Connect String Statistics In the Connect Strings dialog box, select the ports whose connect string statistics you want to review, and which connect strings you want included. When you click OK, the Connect String Statistics graph appears. The Connect String Statistics graph shows the total number of times each type of connect string occurred during the analysis period.

Log Storage Settings

Use the Log Storage Settings dialog box to store the current analysis by the Statistical Analyzer in a database for later retrieval.

File System Select if you do not want to store analyzed information to a database. If you want to analyze the same period again, the Statistical Analyzer must build the information again from the logs.

Database Select to store analysed information to a database for later retrieval.

Data Source Name Type the name of the data source. The data source stores information about the server and database, which MultiManager gives to the ODBC driver. The data source can be configured using the ODBC Administrator application in Control Panel.

User Name Type the user name required to log in to the database.

Password Type the password required to log in to the database.

215 RASExpress User Guide

MIB-II Menu

A MIB (management information base) is a database of characteristics and parameters stored in a device for use by SNMP management programs such as MultiManager. Each RASExpress server maintains its own MIBs. RASExpress and MultiManager use the MIB-II definition (IETF RFC 1213), which supports a larger number of monitoring objects than the original MIB definition. Use the MIB-II menu to display and, in some cases, configure the contents of the selected RASExpress server’s MIBs.

System Table The System Table dialog box displays information from the System group in the server’s MIB, including contact, administrative, location, and service information.

Description Displays the full name and version of the RASExpress server’s operating-system.

Object ID Identifies the network management subsystem contained in the server. This value is allocated within the SMI enterprises subtree (1.3.6.1.4.1) and provides an easy and unambiguous means for determining “what kind of box” is being managed.

Up Time The time (in hundredths of a second) since the network management portion of the system was last re-initialized.

Services Indicates the set of services that the server offers. The value is a sum. This sum initially takes the value 0. Then, for each layer, L, in the range 1 through 7, that this node performs transactions for, 2 raised to (L - 1) is added to the sum. For example, a node that performs primarily routing functions would have a value of 4 (2(3-1)). In contrast, a node which is a host offering application services would have a value of 72 (2(4-1) + 2(7-1)). Note that in the context of the Internet suite of protocols, values are calculated accordingly:

Layer Functionality 1 Physical (e.g., repeaters) 2 Datalink/subnetwork (e.g., bridges) 3 Internet (e.g., IP gateways) 4 End-to-end (e.g., IP hosts) 7 Applications (e.g., mail relays)

216 5 MultiManager

For systems including OSI protocols, layers 5 and 6 may also be counted.

Contact The name of the contact person for the server, together with information on how to contact this person. To change this information, type the new information in the box, and then click Set.

Name The administratively-assigned name for the server. By convention, this is the server’s fully-qualified domain name. To change the name, type the new name in the box, and then click Set.

Location The physical location of the server (e.g., “IS department, 3rd floor”). To change this information, type the new location in the box, and then click Set.

Refresh Refreshes the information in the dialog box.

Set Saves changes to Contact, Name, and Location.

Close Closes the dialog box.

IP Route Table

The IP Route Table dialog box displays information from the IP Route Table in the server’s MIB. The IP Route Table contains an entry for each route presently known to the server.

217 RASExpress User Guide

Destination Displays the destination IP address of each route. An entry with a value of 0.0.0.0 is considered a default route. To add another route, click Add and type the IP address of the new destination.

Interface Index Identifies the local interface through which the next hop of this route should be reached.

Metric 1 The primary routing metric for this route. The semantics of this metric are determined by the routing protocol specified in the Protocol box. If this metric is not used, its value should be set to -1.

Metric 2–5 Alternate routing metrics for this route. The semantics of these metrics are determined by the routing protocol specified in the Protocol box. If this metric is not used, its value should be set to -1.

Next Hop The IP address of the next hop of this route. (In the case of a route bound to an interface that is realized via a broadcast medium, the value is the agent’s IP address on that interface.)

Type The type of route. Direct indicates a route to a directly connected (sub-)network. Indirect indicates a route to a non-local host/network/sub-network. Invalid indicates that the destination is disassociated from the route.

Protocol The routing mechanism via which this route was learned. Inclusion of values for gateway routing protocols is not intended to imply that hosts should support those protocols. Possible values include other (none of the following), local (non-protocol information, e.g., manually configured entries), netmgmt (set via a network management protocol), and icmp (obtained via ICMP, e.g., Redirect). The other possible values are all gateway routing protocols: egp, ggp, hello, rip, is-is, es-is, ciscoIgrp, bbnSpfIgp, ospf, bgp.

Age The number of seconds since this route was last updated or otherwise determined to be correct.

Mask Indicates the mask to be logical-ANDed with the destination address before being compared to the address in the Destination box. If the value in the Destination box is 0.0.0.0 (a default route), then the mask value is also 0.0.0.0. Note that all IP routing subsystems implicitly use this mechanism.

Information Indicates MIB definitions specific to the routing protocol responsible for the route, as specified in the Protocol box. If the information is not present, the value is set to 0 0.

Add Adds a route destination to the Destination box.

218 5 MultiManager

Set Saves changes in the dialog box.

Close Closes the dialog box.

Refresh Refreshes the information in the dialog box.

IP Address Table

The IP Address Table dialog box displays information from the IP Address Table in the server’s MIB. The table contains addressing information relevant to the server’s IP addresses.

IP Address The IP address to which the entry’s addressing information pertains.

Interface Index The index value that uniquely identifies the interface to which this entry applies.

Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the IP address of the entry. The value of the mask is an IP address with all the network bits set to 1 and all the hosts bits set to 0.

Broadcast Address The IP address used for sending datagrams on the interface.

Reassembly Max Size The size of the largest IP datagram that the server can re-assemble from incoming IP fragmented datagrams received on the interface. The maximum value is 65535.

Refresh Refreshes the information in the dialog box.

Close Closes the dialog box.

219 RASExpress User Guide

TCP Connection Table The TCP Connection Table dialog box displays TCP connection-specific information from the TCP Connection Table in the server’s MIB. Each entry contains information about a particular current TCP connection. Note that an object of this type is transient, in that it ceases to exist when (or soon after) the connection is closed.

Local Address The local IP address for the TCP connection. For a connection in the listen state that is willing to accept connections for any IP interface associated with the node, the value 0.0.0.0 is used.

Local Port The local port number for the TCP connection.

Remote Address The remote IP address for the TCP connection.

Remote Port The remote port number for the TCP connection.

TCP Connection Status The state of the TCP connection. The only value that can be set by a management station is deleteTCB, which immediately terminates the connection. To send this value to the server, select the connection you want to terminate, and then click Close Connection. Possible values include the following: closed, listen, synSent, synReceived, established, finWait1, finWait2, closeWait, lastAck, closing, timeWait, and deleteTCB.

Close Connection Terminates the selected connection.

Refresh Refreshes the information in the dialog box.

Close Closes the dialog box.

220 5 MultiManager

UDP Table

The UDP Table dialog box displays listener information from the UDP Table in the server’s MIB.

Address The local IP address for the UDP listener. In the case of a UDP listener that is willing to accept datagrams for any IP interface associated with the node, the value 0.0.0.0 is used.

Port No. The local port number for the UDP listener.

Refresh Refreshes the information in the dialog box.

Close Closes the dialog box.

PPP Link Status

The PPP MIB is organized into several MIB groups, including the PPP Link Group, which represents the lowest level of the PPP protocol. This group contains two tables, the PPP Link Status Table and the PPP Link Configuration Table. The PPP Link Status Table contains PPP-link specific variables:

221 RASExpress User Guide

Interface Index The interface over which the PPP link is operating. This interface would usually be an HDLC or RS-232 type of interface. If there is no lower-layer interface element, or the element can not be identified, then the value of this object is 0.

Physical Address The interface’s address at the protocol layer immediately below the network layer in the protocol stack. For interfaces that do not have such an address (e.g., a serial line), the address is 0.

Bad Address The number of packets received with an incorrect Address field.

Bad Controls The number of packets received with an incorrect Control field.

Packets Too Long The number of received packets that have been discarded because their lengths exceeded the MRU. Note that packets that are longer than the MRU but which are successfully received and processed are not included in this count.

Bad FCS Size The number of received packets that have been discarded due to having an incorrect Frame Check Sequence (FCS).

Remote MRU The current value of the MRU (Maximum Receive Unit) for the remote PPP entity. This value is the MRU that the local entity uses when sending packets to the remote PPP entity. The default value is 1500 octets.

Local MRU The current value of the MRU (Maximum Receive Unit) for the local PPP entity. This value is the MRU that the remote entity uses when sending packets to the local PPP entity. The default value is 1500 octets.

Local to Peer ACC Map The current value of the Asynchronous Control Character Map used when transmitting packets from the local PPP entity to the remote PPP entity.

Peer to Local ACC Map The Asynchronous Control Character Map used by the remote PPP entity when transmitting packets to the local PPP entity.

Local to Remote Proto Comp Indicates whether the local PPP entity will use Protocol Compression when transmitting packets to the remote PPP entity.

Remote to Local Proto Comp Indicates whether the remote PPP entity will use Protocol Compression when transmitting packets to the local PPP entity.

Local to Remote ACC Indicates whether the local PPP entity will use Address and Control Compression when transmitting packets to the remote PPP entity.

222 5 MultiManager

Remote to Local ACC Indicates whether the remote PPP entity will use Address and Control Compression when transmitting packets to the local PPP entity.

Tx FCS Size The size of the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) in bits that the local node generates when transmitting packets to the remote node.

Rx FCS Size The size of the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) in bits that the remote node generates when sending packets to the local node.

Close Closes the dialog box.

PPP Link Configuration

The PPP Link Configuration dialog box displays LCP (Link Control Protocol) configuration parameters for the selected PPP link. These variables represent the initial configuration of the PPP link. The actual values of the parameters may be changed when the link is brought up via the LCP options negotiation mechanism. All parameters in the dialog box can be changed by typing or selecting a new value. To save your changes, click Set before closing the dialog box. Changes take effect when the link is next restarted.

Line Names A list of available PPP links. Configuration information for the selected link is displayed in the rest of the dialog box.

Initial MRU The initial Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) that the local PPP entity advertises to the remote entity. If the value of this variable is 0, then the local PPP entity does not advertise an MRU to the remote entity and the default MRU is assumed.

Receive ACC Map The Asynchronous Control Character Map that the local PPP entity requires for use on its receive side. In effect, this is the ACC Map that is required in order to ensure that the local modem successfully receives all characters.

223 RASExpress User Guide

Transmit ACC Map The Asynchronous Control Character map that the local PPP entity requires for use on its transmit side. In effect, this is the ACC map that is required in order to ensure that all characters can be successfully transmitted through the local modem.

FCS Size The size of the Frame Check Sequence, in bits, that the local node attempts to negotiate for use with the remote node. Regardless of the value of this object, the local node complies with any FCS size negotiations initiated by the remote node, per the PPP specification.

Magic Number The Magic Number helps to detect looped-back links. When the Magic Number is true, the local node attempts to perform Magic Number negotiation with the remote node. When the Magic Number is false, the negotiation is not performed. In any event, the local node complies with any Magic Number negotiations attempted by the remote node, per the PPP specification.

Set Saves changes in the dialog box.

Close Closes the dialog box.

PPP IP Table

The PPP IP Table dialog box displays IPCP status information for each local PPP link.

Interface Index The interface over which the PPP link is operating. This interface would usually be an HDLC or RS-232 type of interface. If there is no lower-layer interface element, or the element cannot be identified, then the value of this object is 0.

Operational Status No. The operational status of the IP network protocol. There are two possible states: Opened and Not-Opened.

224 5 MultiManager

Local To Remote Compression Protocol The IP compression protocol that the local PPP IP entity uses when sending packets to the remote PPP IP entity. There are two possible states: None and VJ-TCP.

Remote to Local Compression Protocol The IP compression protocol that the remote PPP IP entity uses when sending packets to the local PPP IP entity. There are two possible states: None and VJ-TCP.

Remote Max Slot ID The Maximum Slot ID parameter that the remote node has advertised and that is in use on the link. If VJ-TCP header compression is not in use on the link, then the value is 0.

Local Max Slot ID The Maximum Slot ID parameter that the local node has advertised and that is in use on the link. If VJ-TCP header compression is not in use on the link, then the value is 0.

Close Closes the dialog box.

PPP IP Configuration

The PPP IP Configuration dialog box displays IPCP configuration parameters for each local PPP link. These parameters can be changed by the administrator.

Interface Index The interface over which the PPP link is operating. This interface would usually be an HDLC or RS-232 type of interface. If there is no lower-layer interface element, or the element cannot be identified, then the value of this object is 0.

Administration Status The immediate desired status of the IP network protocol. Setting the value to Opened opens the IP network protocol. Setting this object to Closed closes the IP network protocol.

Compression The IP compression negotiation option used by the local node. There are two possible states: None and VJ-TCP. If the value is None, then the local node does not attempt to negotiate any IP compression. If the value is VJ-TCP, then the local node attempts to negotiate Van Jacobson TCP/IP header compression.

225 RASExpress User Guide

Refresh Refreshes the information in the dialog box.

Close IP Network/Open IP Network Closes or opens the IP network protocol, depending on the current state of the selected link.

Compression – VJ-TCP Toggles the IP compression negotiation option of the selected link. This change takes effect when the link is next restarted.

Close Closes the dialog box.

PPP LQR Table

The PPP LQR Table dialog box displays status information from the PPP LQR (Link Quality Report) table in the server’s MIB. Each entry contains LQR information for a particular PPP link.

Interface Index The interface over which the PPP link is operating.

Quality The current quality of the link as declared by the local PPP entity’s Link Quality Management modules. The possible values are good, bad, and non determined, which indicates that the entity does not actually evaluate the link’s quality.

In Good Octets The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.

Local Period The LQR reporting period, in hundredths of a second, that is in effect for the local PPP entity.

Remote Period The LQR reporting period, in hundredths of a second, that is in effect for the remote PPP entity.

226 5 MultiManager

Out LQRs The number of transmitted Link Quality Report packets for the link.

In LQRs The number of received Link Quality Report packets for the link.

Close Closes the dialog box.

ARP Table

The ARP Table dialog box shows how IP addresses are mapped to physical addresses on the server.

Interface Index The interface to which the entry’s mapping applies.

IP Address The IP address that corresponds to the medium-dependent physical address.

Refresh Refreshes the information in the dialog box.

Close Closes the dialog box.

Window Menu

This is the standard Windows Window menu. Use it to arrange open server windows and graph windows in the work area. You can cascade them or tile them horizontally or vertically. You can also use the Window menu to view windows that are hidden behind other windows.

227 RASExpress User Guide

Help Menu

Click Help Topics to access online help for MultiManager. Click About MultiManager to display the MultiManager version number.

228 6 Remote Node Client Software

229 RASExpress User Guide

Windows Dial-Up Networking

The Windows 95, 98, and NT operating systems include a remote-node client called Dial-Up Networking. Dial-Up Networking’s defaults work with the RASExpress server; however, you may want to make modifications for your location.

Windows 95/98

To install and run Dial-Up Networking 1. Install a NetWare client or Client for Microsoft Networks on the client computer. Microsoft Client for Netware Networks, Microsoft Client for Microsoft Networks, and two Novell Netware clients are included with Windows 95. 2. Insert the Windows compact disc into the CD ROM drive. 3. In Windows, click the Start button, then select Settings, Control Panel, and Add/Remove Programs. 4. Click the Windows Setup tab. 5. Check Communications in the Components list. 6. Click the Details button. 7. Check Dial-up Networking in the Components list. 8. Click OK. Dial-Up Networking is installed from the Windows compact disc. 9. When the installation is complete, reboot the computer.

To create a connection entry 1. Double-click the My Computer icon. 2. Double-click the Dial-Up Networking icon. 3. Double-click the Make New Connection icon, and follow the directions in the wizard to create a connection entry. 4. The client computer should now be ready to dial up the RASExpress server. For further information on Dial-Up Networking or Microsoft Client for NetWare Networks, see Windows Help.

230 6 Remote Node Client Software

Windows NT 4.0

To install Dial-Up Networking 1. Double-click the My Computer icon, and then double-click the Dial-Up Networking icon. If Dial-Up Networking is not installed, you will see an Install button in the Dial-Up Networking dialog box. 2. Insert the Windows NT 4.0 compact disc into the CD ROM drive. 3. Click Install in the Dial-Up Networking dialog box. 4. In the Add RAS Device dialog box, choose the modem to use with Dial-Up Networking, and then click OK. 5. In the Remote Access Setup dialog box, click Configure. 6. In the Configure Port Usage dialog box, click Dial out only, and then click OK. 7. In the Remote Access Setup dialog box, click Network. 8. In the Network Configuration dialog box, make sure that only TCP/IP is selected, and then click OK. 9. If there is a network interface card that does not have TCP/IP bound to it, the Microsoft TCP/IP Properties window appears. Click Cancel to close the window. 10. Click Continue, then click Restart to finish the installation. 11. When the installation is complete, reboot the computer.

To create a connection entry 1. Double-click the My Computer icon, and then double-click the Dial-Up Networking icon. 2. In the Dial-Up Networking dialog box, click the New button. 3. In the New Phonebook Entry wizard, follow the directions to create a connection entry. 4. The client computer should now be ready to dial up the RASExpress server. For further information on Dial-Up Networking, see Windows NT Help.

231 RASExpress User Guide

232 7 The WinMCSI Redirector

233 RASExpress User Guide

Introduction

Note: This chapter is for IP or IPX network users only.

The WinMCSI (pronounced win-miksee) redirector manages access to the RASExpress server’s modems for both inbound and outbound calls. It allows standard Windows communication programs that do not support INT6B or INT14 to connect to Multi- Tech gateways such as RASExpress. It also detects other compatible communications servers on your network and displays the resources they provide to eligible LAN users. WinMCSI is a Windows application for use with either IPX or IP networks. ComMap likewise can be used with either IPX or IP networks.

WinMCSI Installation

1. Turn on your client PC, start Windows, and log in to your LAN. 2. Exit all Windows programs except Windows Explorer. 3. Insert the compact disc that came with your communication server into the PC’s CD-ROM drive. 4. If Autorun does not display the installation menu, find Autorun.exe in the root folder of the compact disc, and double-click it. The installation menu appears. 5. In the Install Software option, select WinMCSI. The WinMCSI Setup wizard appears. 6. Follow the instructions in the Setup wizard to install WinMCSI.

Note: In the Choose the Network Type dialog box, if you choose IP you must have a TCP/IP protocol active with the default IP router matched with the local IP address of the RASExpress server.

234 7 MCSIWSN and WinMCSI Redirectors

• Click Add Port to add the first available port to the MCSI Port list. • To map a line to a port, select the port in the MCSI Port list, next select the line to which you want to map the COM port, and then click Map. You can also map a line to the selected port by double-clicking the line. If a port is selected that is already mapped, the port status message Mapped to MCSI appears, and the line information appears in the Server Name, Class Name, and Port Name boxes.

Note: If a serial mouse is connected to COM1, you must select a different port.

• Click Unmap if you want to unmap a selected port. • Click Search to search for available lines on a server. • Click Close when finished.

Running the WinMCSI Redirector

Before running data communications software, LAN users should log on to the communications server using WinMCSI.

To log on to the communications server from a workstation 1. Start ComMap by double-clicking the ComMap icon in the Start menu.

Tip: To save space on your screen, resize the ComMap window to display only the menu bar, tool bar, and status bar.

2. If you have not previously done so, select the Setup menu to configure ComMap. Network Type. The Network Type dialog box shows your current network type (IP or IPX). To change the network type, click the appropriate type for your network. Click OK when finished. You must restart Windows if you change this setting.

235 RASExpress User Guide

Note: Do not change the network type unless the network has changed. Also, make sure that your SYSTEM.INI file contains device drivers specific to the selected network type.

Connect Timer. The MCSI Connect Timer dialog box shows the default value of the connect timer in the Interval box. This value sets the time in seconds, in the range 0 through 60, that the MCSI emulator waits for a MCSI device to become available. To change the value of the connect timer, type a different value in the box. Baud Change. Select Enable Baud Change to allow an application to change the baud rate or other parameters for the selected port. If Disable Baud Change is selected, then an application cannot change the baud rate or other parameters. Default Login. Use the Default Login dialog box to automatically log in to a specific server whenever Windows runs. Select a server from the Available Servers box, then type a user name and optional password. Click OK when finished. ComMap saves these login parameters in your COMMCSI.INI file.

Note: You can use a text editor to edit the COMMMCSI.INI file, however you cannot change the password because the password field is encrypted. Editing the password will corrupt the file.

If there are no servers listed in the Available Servers box, type a server name in the Server Name box, and then click the Search button to search for a match. You can use * and ? as wild card characters. Port Type. Use this command to designate your mapped ports as outbound (available only for calling out) or inbound (available only for calling in). A port cannot be both outbound and inbound. In Windows 3.1x, all mapped ports have the same port type. In Windows 95/98/NT, however, you can designate one port as outbound and another as inbound. To change the port type, click the appropriate option button. Click OK when finished. 3. If you did not automatically log into the RASExpress server, do so now by clicking Login in the File menu, or by clicking the Login button, shown at left. The MCSI Login window appears.

236 7 MCSIWSN and WinMCSI Redirectors

The Available Servers box lists the names of the available servers. Click the name of the server you want to attach to, type a user name and password, then click Login. A message that your login was successful appears. Click OK. If there are no servers listed in the Available Servers box, type a server name in the Server Name box, then click Search to search for a match. You can use * and ? as wild card characters. 4. To view your log status, click Log Status in the File menu.

The MCSI Login Status window shows the name of the server you are logged into and the name with which you logged in. Click Close to close the window. 5. To access a modem on the server, you must map the modem to one of the COM ports in your computer. Click the Map button (shown at left) or, in the Map menu, click Map. The COM Port to MCSI Mapping dialog box appears.

• To redirect a local COM port to a RASExpress server port. 1. If necessary, click Add Port to add the next available local port to the MCSI Port list. 2. Select a port in the MCSI Port list. 3. Select an available line in the list of server ports.

237 RASExpress User Guide

4. Click Map to redirect the selected local MCSI port to the selected server port. Alternately, double-click the selected server port to map it to the local port. • To unmap a local port, wait until the port is free, then select the port and click Unmap. Data addressed to the local port is no longer sent to the server port. • To search for one or more available server ports, enter the search text in the Select Server, Select Class, and Select Port boxes. You can use * and ? as wild card characters. Click the Search button to search for a match. • Click the Close button when you are finished mapping ports. 6. To view a list of mapped COM ports, select Map List from the Map menu. 7. To unmap a COM port, select Unmap from the Unmap menu, or click the Unmap button, shown at left. Select the COM port you want to unmap, then click Unmap. 8. To log out from the RASExpress server, select Logout from the File menu, or click the Logout button, shown at left. 9. To exit from WinMCSI, select Exit from the File menu, or click the Exit button, shown at left. Alternately, you can minimize WinMCSI to an icon.

Checking Connectivity

After using ComMap for Windows to map your COM Ports, we recommend that you check your connectivity and configure your ports by using a communication program, such as Windows Terminal or HyperTerminal.

238 8 RASExpress Script Language

239 RASExpress User Guide

Introduction to the RASExpress Script Language

The RASExpress script language is a set of commands that can be used to perform LAN-to-LAN login operations. A script file can be useful for both simple and complex operations, such as dialing a number, logging onto a server, downloading files, and so on. You can create a script file without programming experience if you have programming “intuition.” If you have had some exposure to C language or BASIC programming, so much the better. This chapter does not attempt to teach you how to program; rather, it describes the commands you can use when creating a script file.

An Overview of the RASExpress Script Language

A RASExpress script file consists of commands, arguments, and variables. You should un- derstand the differences between them before you attempt to create a script file.

Commands

A command is an executable function. RASExpress commands have the following constraints: • The first word on a command line is the command name. • Each command must be on a separate line. • Each command is terminated by a semicolon. • /* in a command line indicates the start of a comment, and */ indicates the end of a comment (all comment characters and the markers are ignored). • Extra arguments in the command line are ignored. Script files are created by putting together specific commands that produce specific results. For example, if you want to prompt the user for information, you must include a command to display the prompt on the screen as well as a command to retrieve the response of the user. This chapter lists all commands recognized in the RASExpress environment.

Note: Command elements that appear in bold must be typed exactly as they appear. Elements that appear in italic are placeholders that must be replaced by actual information. Brackets [ ] enclose optional items. Braces { } enclose a set of choices from which you must choose only one. Choices are separated by a vertical bar |. For additional information on formatting within a script file, see “Format String and Format Control Characters” on page 241.

240 8 RASExpress Script Language

Arguments

Arguments focus the execution of a command in some way. They can be passed from one process to another by value or by address. If you have one or two values you want to pass, it is probably more efficient to pass the value. Following is an example of a statement that passes the value of variable t to process test. test (t); To pass an argument by address, prefix the argument name in the formal parameter list by the keyword VAR. test (VAR t); You might want to use this method if you have an array of values stored in sequential addresses. Once you have passed the address of the first value, you can increment the address to retrieve the other values. Variables are the only arguments that can be passed by address. However, an expression like A+B, where A and B are integer variables, can be passed by value.

Variables

Three basic types of variables are supported: INTEGER, REAL, and STRING. Since the ASCII null character is internally used to indicate the end of the sequence, it cannot be part of STRING. All other characters, including extended ASCII characters, can be part of STRING.

Format String and Format Control Characters

The format string contains two types of objects: ordinary characters that are copied to the output stream as is (with one exception as explained below), and format conversion specifications, each of which leads to the conversion of the corresponding argument and is copied to the output stream. The character \ is given special treatment: • If the following character is \, it is copied to the output stream. • If the following character is n, a newline is copied to the output stream. • If the following character is r, a carriage return is copied to the output stream. • If the following character is x or X, the next two characters are taken and treated as hexadecimal and copied to the output stream. • Any other character forces the \ as well as the following character to be copied to the output stream. Conversion specification begins with the % character and is followed by the conversion character. The conversion characters and their meanings are: d The argument is converted to a decimal notation. x The argument is converted to a hexadecimal notation. f The argument is converted to a floating point notation. s The argument is a string; characters from the string are copied until a null is encountered.

241 RASExpress User Guide

c The argument is a character. If the corresponding argument is an integer the value of the argument modulo 256 is taken and copied; if the argument is real it is ignored and ‘0’ is copied; if the argument is a string the first character of the string is copied. % A % is copied to the output stream. If the character following % is not %, the % as well as the following character are copied to the output stream.

Script Language Execution Notes

Execution starts at the PROC main. PROC main cannot have any arguments. All variables must be declared before they are used. All procedures must be declared before they are called. Recursion is allowed in procedures. To define mutually recursive procedures, use the FORWARD directive to indicate that the procedure body is defined later in the source file. Procedures defined with the FORWARD directive should have all the parameters and return value (if any) specified; the actual definition of the procedure body should not contain the formal parameter list or the return value. Example of forward-defined procedures:

Example proc a(integer x, y) : integer; forward; proc b(integer u, v) : integer; forward; proc a; integer t; /* Some more code here. */ t = b(x, y); /* Some more code here. */ return(t); endproc proc b; return(a(u, v)); endproc

Operator Precedence

Operators are listed in the order of precedence : Unary Operators : - ! (unary minus, logical negation) Binary Operators : * / + - < > <= >= == != && || All operators are left-associative. Expressions are evaluated completely, so care must be taken when writing expressions. For example, an expression like (a!=0&&b/a) would create a run-time error.

Creating, Compiling, and Executing a Script File

This section provides the basic information necessary to create, compile, and execute (run) a script file for RASExpress.

Creating a Script File A script file can be created using a text editor or a screen snapshot that contains RASExpress script language commands. This file is the source code and should be saved with a .SCR extension.

242 8 RASExpress Script Language

Compiling a Script File The process of compiling converts the source code into an executable file, which is also to say that there are now two versions of your script file. One version (with the .SCR extension) is the source code, which can be altered by you in any text editor. The other version is the script file’s executable form (with a .COD extension), which cannot be directly modified by you. To compile a script file from the DOS prompt, copy the source file to the directory where RASExpress is installed (typically C:\RAS560), and run the SCRIPT.EXE utility. The syntax is SCRIPT file_name . The compiled file must remain in the RASExpress directory.

Script Error Handling When a script file is compiled, any errors that may occur are recorded in an error file to assist you in debugging the source code. The name of the error file is file_name.OUT. For example, if you compile MTS_HOST.SCR and RASExpress encounters errors in your script, those errors are flagged in MTS_HOST.OUT.

Running a Script File A RASExpress script file can be run only on a LAN-to-LAN dialing port. To run the script file automatically, access the RASExpress configuration program using a terminal, Telnet, Web, or DOS interface, select Communication Setup from the main menu, select Line Information, and type the name of the compiled script file in the Script File Name field. In all cases, type the file name without the .COD extension.

243 RASExpress User Guide

RASExpress Script Language Command Format

program ::= declarations proc_declarations declarations ::= var_type identifier [ , identifier ] ; var_type ::= INTEGER | REAL | STRING statement_list ::= statement statement ::= elementary_statement elementary_statement ::= identifier = expression ; | ➥ identifier [ ( expression { , expression } ) ] ; | ➥ goto label ; | ➥ label : expression> ::= expression OPERATOR expression | ( expression ) | ➥ ! expression | - expression | identifier ➥ [ (expression { , expression } ) ] OPERATOR ::= < | <= | > | >= | == | != | && | || | + | - | * | / | ! proc_declaration ::= PROC identifier [ ( parameter_list ) ] [ : vartype ] ; FORWARD ; proc_declaration ::= PROC identifier [ ( parameter_list ) ] [ : vartype ] ; declarations statement_list ENDPROC parameter_list ::= argument_list [ ; argument_list ] argument_list ::= [ VAR ] var_type identifier [, identifier ]

244 8 RASExpress Script Language

Script Command Summary

This section lists the RASExpress script commands by category.

Format Conversion

ATOF atof(string number_string) : real; Converts number_string into a floating point number.

ATOI atoi(string number) : integer; Converts a numeric string of decimal digits to an integer.

FTOA ftoa(real float_no, var string buffer) : integer; Converts float_no into a sequence of decimal digits and copies it to buffer.

ITOA itoa(integer number, var string buffer [, integer radix]); Converts number to a sequence of characters according to radix and copies it to buffer.

Communication Parameter Settings

BAUDRATE baudrate(integer baud_rate | string baud_rate) : integer; Sets the baud rate to the specified value.

DATABITS databits(integer no_of_bits) : integer; Sets the number of data bits for the communication channel.

PARITY parity(string option) : integer; Sets the parity for the communication channel.

STOPBITS stopbits(integer no_of_bits) : integer; Sets the number of stop bits for the communication channel.

245 RASExpress User Guide

Display

DISPLAY display(integer int_value | real real_value | string str_value); Displays the given argument at the current cursor position.

FDISPLAY fdisplay(string format_str {, integer | real | string argument}) : integer; Displays the format string with all the arguments at the current cursor position.

Arithmetic Conversion

CEIL ceil(real float_no) : integer; Returns the least integer greater than or equal to float_no.

DEC dec(var integer integer_variable); Decrements integer_variable by 1.

FLOOR floor(real float_no) : integer; Returns the greatest integer less than or equal to float_no.

INC inc(var integer integer_variable); Increments integer_variable by 1.

MOD mod(integer number1, number2) : integer; Divides number1 by number2 and returns the remainder.

File/Directory Manipulation

DELETE delete(string file_name) : integer; Deletes the specified file name.

DISKFREE diskfree [(string drive_letter)] : integer; Gets the free disk space of the specified drive in bytes.

FCLOSE fclose(integer file_handle) : integer; Closes the given file_handle.

246 8 RASExpress Script Language

FCREATE fcreate(string file_name) : integer; Creates the file given in file_name.

FGETC fgetc(integer file_handle, var string buffer) : integer; Reads a character from the file given by file_handle into buffer.

FGETS fgets(integer file_handle, var string buffer, integer max_len) : integer; Reads a new line terminated string from the file given by file_handle into buffer.

FINDFIRST findfirst(string file_pattern, integer attribute, var string file_name) : integer; Looks for the first file of file_pattern with the given attribute.

FINDNEXT findnext(var string file_name) : integer; Looks for the next file of file_pattern with the given attribute.

FOPEN fopen(string file_name [, string open_mode | integer open_mode]) : integer; Opens file_name with the specified mode and returns a handle to the file.

FPUTC fputc(integer file_handle, string buffer) : integer; Writes a character from the buffer to the file.

FPUTS fputs(integer file_handle, string buffer [, integer count]) : integer; Writes from the buffer to file given file_handle.

FREAD fread(integer file_handle, var string buffer, integer count) : integer; Reads count bytes from the file specified by the file_handle into buffer.

FSEEK fseek(integer file_handle, offset, origin) : integer; Adjusts the file pointer for the given file.

FWRITE fwrite(integer file_handle, string buffer, integer count) : integer; Writes count bytes from the buffer to the file specified by the given file_handle.

GETFILEATTR getfileattr(string file_name) : integer; Gets the attribute of the file.

247 RASExpress User Guide

GETFILEDATE getfiledate(string file_name, var string buffer) : integer; Gets the date on the specified file.

GETFILESIZE getfilesize(string file_name) : integer; Gets the size of the file in bytes.

GETFILETIME getfiletime(string file_name, var string buffer) : integer; Gets the time on the specified file.

ISFILE isfile(string path_name) : integer; Checks if the path_name is a directory or not.

MKDIR mkdir(string path_name) : integer; Creates the directory in the specified path.

RMDIR rmdir(string path_name) : integer; Removes the directory in the specified path.

SETFILEATTR setfileattr(string file_name, integer attribute) : integer; Sets the attribute for the specified file.

SETFILEDATE setfiledate(string file_name, file_date) : integer; Sets the date for the specified file.

SETFILETIME setfiletime(string file_name, file_time) : integer; Sets the time for the specified file.

Connection Information and Control

CONNECTED connected : integer; Indicates if a connection is initialized.

DROPCONNECTION dropconnection; Terminates the current connection.

248 8 RASExpress Script Language

HANGUP hangup; Hangs up the modem.

RGETC rgetc(var string buffer [, integer timeout]) : integer; Gets a character from the remote machine.

TRANSMIT transmit(string key_sequence) : integer; Sends out the characters specified in the key_sequence.

String Manipulation

STRCAT strcat(var string first_string, second_string) : integer; Concatenates second_string to the first_string.

STRCMP strcmp(string first_string, second_string) : integer; Compares first_string and second_string.

STRCPY strcpy(var string target_string, source_string); Copies second_string to first_string.

STRFMT strfmt(var string buffer, string format_string {, integer | real | string argument}) : ➥ integer; Formats the arguments according to format_string and copies to buffer.

STRLEN strlen(string buffer) : integer; Returns the string length of buffer.

TOLOWER tolower(var string buffer); Converts the string variable to lower case.

TOUPPER toupper(var string buffer); Converts the string variable to upper case.

249 RASExpress User Guide

Miscellaneous

EXIT exit; Terminates the execution of the script.

QUIT quit; Terminates the execution of the script and quits to DOS prompt.

WAIT wait(integer delay); Suspends the script execution for the specified delay (in seconds).

WAITFOR waitfor(string pattern [, integer timeout]) : integer; Waits for a pattern from the remote machine.

250 8 RASExpress Script Language

RASExpress Script Commands

This section lists the RASExpress script commands in alphabetical order. Note that these commands are a subset of the MultiExpress script language, from which the examples were taken. Therefore, some of the examples contain commands that are not available in the RASExpress script command set, notably the conditional commands. Nonetheless, we hope that the following examples will illustrate the use of the RASExpress script commands.

ATOF atof(string number_string) : real; Converts number_string into a floating point number.

Example /*This script illustrates the atof command.*/ proc main; real x; string s; s = "12345.67"; x = atof(s); fdisplay("Number string is ‘%s’, float value is : %f^J^M", s, x); endproc

ATOI atoi(string number) : integer;; Converts a numeric string of digits to an integer. If a non-decimal character is encountered in the string, the return value is undefined.

Example /*This script illustrates the atoi command.*/ proc main; string str; display("Example for atoi command^J^M"); display("Enter a numeric string to convert to integer : "); getstr(str, 10); fdisplay("^J^MDecimal value of ‘%s’ is : %d ", str, atoi(str)); endproc

251 RASExpress User Guide

BAUDRATE baudrate(integer baud_rate | string baud_rate) : integer;; Sets the baud rate to the specified value. If a connection is not initialized or an invalid baud rate is specified, the command is ignored and 0 is returned; otherwise the baud rate is initialized and 1 is returned.

Example /*This script illustrates the baudrate command.*/ proc main; display("Testing baud rate setting^J^M"); display("Baud rate will be set to 2400, press any key..."); getkey; baudrate(2400); display("^J^MBaud rate will be set to 19200, press any key..."); getkey; baudrate(19200); display("^J^MData bits will be set to 7, press any key..."); getkey; databits(7); display("^J^MData bits will be set to 8, press any key..."); getkey; databits(8); display("^J^MStop bits will be set to 1, press any key..."); getkey; stopbits(1); display("^J^MStop bits will be set to 2, press any key..."); getkey; stopbits(2); display("^J^MParity will be set to even, press any key..."); getkey; parity("even"); display("^J^MParity will be set to none, press any key..."); getkey; parity("none"); endproc

CEIL ceil(real float_no) : integer;; Rounds up float_no to the next greatest integer (if the value is already an integer, its value is returned). For example, 1023.23 is returned as 1024; -1023.23 is returned as -1023.

Example /*This script illustrates the ceil command.*/ proc main; real x; x = 1023.23; fdisplay("ceil(%f) is : %d^J^M", x, ceil(x)); x = -1023.23; fdisplay("ceil(%f) is : %d^J^M", x, ceil(x)); endproc

252 8 RASExpress Script Language

CONNECTED connected : integer;; Indicates if a connection is initialized. If a connection is initialized, 1 is returned, else 0 is returned.

Example /*This script illustrates the connected command.*/ proc main; if connected then display("Connection is on^J^M"); else display("No connection made^J^M"); endif endproc

DATABITS databits(integer no_of_bits) : integer;; Sets the number of data bits for the communication channel. The no_of_bits passed should be in the range 5 through 8. If the connection is not initialized or no_of_bits is not in the range 5 through 8, the command is ignored and 0 is returned; otherwise 1 is returned.

Example

See baudrate command.

DEC dec(var integer integer_variable);; Decrements integer_variable by 1.

Example /* This script illustrates arithmetic operators, inc, dec, and mod commands. */ proc main; integer x, y; x = 10; y = 20; fdisplay("Value of x is :%d and y is :%d^J^M", x, y); fdisplay("Sum of x and y is : %d^J^M",x+y); fdisplay("Differencex-yis:%d^J^M",x-y); fdisplay("Product of x and y is :%d^J^M",x*y); fdisplay("Value ofx/yis:%d^J^M",x/y); fdisplay("Value of x mod y is :%d^J^M", mod(x, y)); fdisplay("Value of x before incrementing is :%d^J^M", x); inc(x); fdisplay("Value of x after incrementing is :%d^J^M", x); fdisplay("Value of x before decrementing is :%d^J^M", x); dec(x); fdisplay("Value of x after decrementing is :%d^J^M", x); endproc

253 RASExpress User Guide

DELETE delete(string file_name) : integer;; Deletes the specified file name. If deletion is successful, 1 is returned; otherwise 0 is returned.

Example

See fcreate command.

DISKFREE diskfree [(string drive_letter)] : integer;; If the drive specified by drive_letter is a valid drive, the free disk space in bytes is returned; otherwise -1 is returned. The drive letter is optional. The drive letter should be between a and z, or A and Z. If the drive letter is omitted, the current drive is assumed.

Example /* This script illustrates the diskfree command. */ proc main; fdisplay("Disk free space is : %d bytes^J^M", diskfree); endproc

DISPLAY display(integer int_value | real real_value | string str_value);; Displays the given argument at the current cursor position.

Example /* This script illustrates the display command. */ proc main; integer x; real y; string s; x = 100; y = 10.4567; s = "example string"; display(" integer x = "); /* Display the string constant. */ display(x); /* Display the value of x. */ display("^J^M realy="); display(y); /* Display the value of y. */ display("^J^M strings="); display(s); /* Display the value of s. */ display("^J^M"); endproc

254 8 RASExpress Script Language

DROPCONNECTION dropconnection; Terminates the current connection. If this function is called, then the script is aborted.

Example /* This script illustrates the dropconnection command. */

proc main; if connected theÿ display("Terminating connection, press any key..."); getkey; dropconnection; endif endproc

ENDPROC endproc This command indicates the end of a procedure. It complements the proc command in every script file.

EXIT exit; This command terminates the execution of the script.

Example /* This script illustrates the exit command. */ proc main; display("Press any key to exit the script..."); getkey; display("^J^M"); exit; endproc

FCLOSE fclose(integer file_handle) : integer; Closes the given file_handle. If file_handle is negative or invalid, 0 is returned; otherwise 1 is returned.

Example

See fcreate command.

255 RASExpress User Guide

FCREATE fcreate(string file_name) : integer; Creates the file given in file_name. File_name can include the drive letter and path. If the file is created, 1 is returned; otherwise 0 is returned. If the file is created, it is closed and will have to be opened by an fopen call to access it.

Example /* This script file illustrates fcreate, fopen, fread, */ /* fwrite, fputs, fputc, fgets, fgetc, and fclose commands. */ proc main; string file_name; string test_string; string str; integer len; integer count; integer file_handle; integer position; integer offset; integer origin; file_name = "tempfile"; if fcreate(file_name) then fdisplay("%s created^J^M", file_name); else fdisplay("%s could not be created^J^M", file_name); goto error_exit; endif /* open the file in read/write mode.*/ file_handle = fopen(file_name, "READWRITE"); if file_handle >= 0 then fdisplay("%s opened^J^M", file_name); else fdisplay("%s could not be opened^J^M"); goto error_exit; endif test_string = "example string"; if fputs(file_handle, test_string) then fdisplay("fputs done^J^M"); else fdisplay("fputs failed^J^M"); goto error_exit; endif if fputc(file_handle, "a") then fdisplay("fputc done^J^M"); else fdisplay("fputc failed^J^M"); goto error_exit; endif len=4; if fwrite(file_handle, test_string, len) then fdisplay("fwrite done^J^M"); else fdisplay("fwrite failed^J^M"); goto error_exit; endif fclose(file_handle); /* close the file. */ /* open the file in read/write mode. */ file_handle = fopen(file_name, "READWRITE"); if file_handle >= 0 then fdisplay("%s opened^J^M", file_name); else fdisplay("%s could not be opened^J^M", file_name); goto error_exit; endif /* read in characters into a string. */ if fgets(file_handle, str, 3) then fdisplay("fgets done, string read is :%s^J^M", str); else

256 8 RASExpress Script Language

fdisplay("fgets failed^J^M"); goto error_exit; endif if fgetc(file_handle, str) then fdisplay("fgetc done, char read is :%s^J^M", str); else fdisplay("fgetc failed^J^M"); goto error_exit; endif count = fread(file_handle, str, 5); if count == 5 then fdisplay("fread done^J^MBuffer read is :%s^J^M", str); else fdisplay("fread failed^J^M"); goto error_exit; endif origin = 1; offset = 0; position = fseek(file_handle, offset, origin); if position != -1 then fdisplay("current file offset is : %d^J^M", position); endif fclose(file_handle); if isfile(file_name) then fdisplay("%s exists^J^M", file_name); else fdisplay("%s does not exist^J^M", file_name); endif if delete(file_name) then fdisplay("%s deleted^J^M", file_name); else fdisplay("%s could not be deleted^J^M"); endif error_exit : endproc

FDISPLAY fdisplay(string format_str {, integer | real | string argument}) : integer; Displays the format string with all the arguments at the current cursor position. There should be a one-to-one correspondence between the format control characters in the format string and the arguments provided. If an argument provided does not match the corresponding format control character it is ignored in the conversion. The number of arguments converted is returned. For a detailed description of the format control characters, see “Format String and Format Control Characters” on page 241.

Example /* This script illustrates the fdisplay command. */

proc main; string date_str; string time_str; display("Example for fdisplay command^J^M"); date(date_str); time(time_str); fdisplay("Current date is : %s, time is : %s^J^M", date_str, ➥ time_str); endproc

257 RASExpress User Guide

FGETC fgetc(integer file_handle, var string buffer) : integer; Reads a character from the file given by file_handle into buffer. The buffer is null terminated. If an invalid file handle is passed, the command is ignored and 0 is returned; otherwise the number of bytes read is returned. If an error is encountered while reading, a negative value is returned.

Example

See fcreate command.

FGETS fgets(integer file_handle, var string buffer, integer max_len) : integer; Reads a new line terminated string from the file given by file_handle into buffer. Buffer is null terminated. The maximum number of characters to read can be specified by max_len, but is limited to 132. Returns the number of bytes read (excluding the null). If an invalid file handle is passed, the command is ignored and 0 is returned.. If the end of file is reached, the predefined variable EOF is set. If there is any error in reading, a negative value is returned.

Example

See fcreate command.

FINDFIRST findfirst(string file_pattern, integer attribute, var string file_name) : integer; The file_pattern is the pattern to seek in the directory. It can include the drive letter and path. Attribute is the file attribute to seek. If a file/directory matching the given pattern is found, file_name is updated; else file_name is not updated. The return value is 1 if a matching file is found, else it is 0.

Example /* This script illustrates the findfirst and findnext commands. */ proc main; string dir_name; string file_name; integer len; integer attribute; len = 64; attribute = 0; display("Example for findfirst and findnext commands^J^M"); display("Enter file pattern : "); if getstr(dir_name, len) then fdisplay(" ^J^MFiles in %s are :^J^M", dir_name); if findfirst(dir_name, attribute, file_name) then fdisplay("%s^J^M", file_name); while findnext(file_name) do fdisplay("%s^J^M", file_name); endwhile endif endif endproc

258 8 RASExpress Script Language

FINDNEXT findnext(var string file_name) : integer; If there is a matching next file/directory for the given pattern, file_name is updated; otherwise it is not updated. If there is a next file/directory the return value is 1, else it is 0.

Example

See findfirst command.

FLOOR floor(real float_no) : integer; Rounds down float_no to the next integer (if the value is already an integer, its value is returned). For example, 1023.23 is returned as 1023; -1023.23 is returned as -1024.

Example /* This script illustrates the floor command. */

proc main; real x; x = 1023.23; fdisplay("floor(%f) is : %d^J^M", x, floor(x)); x = -1023.23; fdisplay("floor(%f) is : %d^J^M", x, floor(x)); endproc

FOPEN fopen(string file_name [, string open_mode | integer open_mode]) : integer; Opens file_name. The mode in which the file should be opened is specified by open_mode. If open_mode is not specified, it is assumed to be read/write mode. If a string argument is given for open_mode, it should be either readonly or readwrite; any other value will fail the command. If open_mode is an integer, it should match the values accepted in the DOS Int 21 Fn 3Dh. (I.e., the value should be a valid open mode as understood by DOS. If the value is not a valid one, it could lead to unpredictable be- havior). If the file is opened, the predefined variable EOF is set and the file handle is returned; otherwise -1 is returned.

Example

See fcreate command.

FPUTC fputc(integer file_handle, string buffer) : integer; Writes the first character from the buffer to the file given by the file_handle. Returns the number of bytes written to the file. If an invalid file handle is passed the command is ignored and 0 is returned.

Example

See fcreate command.

259 RASExpress User Guide

FPUTS fputs(integer file_handle, string buffer [, integer count]) : integer; Writes from buffer to the file specified by file_handle. The number of characters written to the file is determined by count if specified; otherwise it is taken to be the string length of buffer. Returns the number of bytes written to the file. If an invalid file handle is passed, the command is ignored and 0 is returned.

Example

See fcreate command.

FREAD fread(integer file_handle, var string buffer, integer count) : integer; Reads count bytes from the file specified by file_handle into buffer. If file_handle is negative, the command is ignored and 0 is returned; otherwise the number of bytes actually read is returned. If the end of the file is reached, the predefined variable EOF is set. If an error is encountered while reading, a negative value is returned.

Example

See fcreate command.

FSEEK fseek(integer file_handle, offset, origin) : integer; File_handle should not be negative. If file_handle is negative or invalid, the command is ignored and -1 is returned. Offset indicates the number of bytes to move from the origin specified. Origin can be one of three values: 0 for beginning of file, 1 for current position, and 2 for end of file. If there is an error, -1 is returned, else the current file pointer position is returned.

Example

See fcreate command.

FTOA ftoa(real float_no, var string buffer) : integer; Converts float_no into a sequence of decimal digits and copies it to buffer. If the number is converted and copied to buffer, 1 is returned; otherwise 0 is returned.

Example /* This script illustrates the ftoa command. */ proc main; real x; string str; x = 1024.345; ftoa(x, str); fdisplay("Number converted is %f, converted string is ➥ ‘%s’^J^M", x, str); endproc

260 8 RASExpress Script Language

FWRITE fwrite(integer file_handle, string buffer, integer count) : integer; Writes count bytes from buffer to the file specified by file_handle. The number of bytes written is returned as the value of the function.

Example

See fcreate command.

GETFILEATTR getfileattr(string file_name) : integer; Gets the attribute of the file specified by file_name if the file is present; otherwise -1 is returned. The attribute value is as returned by the DOS Int 21 Fn 4300h call.

Example

See getfiledate command.

GETFILEDATE getfiledate(string file_name, var string buffer) : integer; Gets the date on the file specified by file_name if present, and copies it to buffer (in mm:dd:yy format). If the file is present, 1 is returned, else 0 is returned.

Example /* This script illustrates the getfiledate, getfiletime, */ /* getfileattr, setfiledate, setfiletime, and setfileattr */ /* commands. */ proc main; string buffer; string file_name; string date; string time; integer attribute; integer len; integer size; len = 45; display("Example for getfiledate, getfiletime, getfileattr,^J^M"); display("setfiledate, setfiletime, and setfileattr commands^J^M"); display("Enter file name : "); if getstr(file_name, len) then if getfiledate(file_name, date) then fdisplay("^J^MFile date is : %s^J^M", date); else display("^J^MError getting file date^J^M"); endif if getfiletime(file_name, time) then fdisplay("File time is : %s^J^M", time); else display("Error getting file time^J^M"); endif size = getfilesize(file_name); if size != -1 then fdisplay("File size is : %d^J^M", size); else display("Error getting file size^J^M"); endif attribute = getfileattr(file_name); if attribute != -1 then fdisplay("Attribute is : %d^J^M", attribute); else

261 RASExpress User Guide

display("Error getting file attribute^J^M"); endif display("Enter date to set to : "); if getstr(buffer, len) then if setfiledate(file_name, buffer) then getfiledate ➥ (file_name, buffer); fdisplay("^J^MFile date is set to : %s^J^M", buffer); else display("^J^MError setting file date^J^M"); endif endif display("Enter time to set to : "); if getstr(buffer, len) then if setfiletime(file_name, buffer) then getfiletime ➥ (file_name, buffer); fdisplay("^J^MFile time is set to : %s^J^M", buffer); else display("^J^MError setting file time^J^M"); endif endif display("Enter attribute to set to : "); attribute = getint; if setfileattr(file_name, attribute) then attribute = getfileattr(file_name); if attribute != -1 then fdisplay("^J^MFile attribute ➥ set to : %d^J^M", attribute); else display("^J^MError setting file attribute^J^M"); endif else display("^J^MError setting file attribute^J^M"); endif endif display("Enter file name to delete : "); if getstr(file_name, len) then if delete(file_name) then fdisplay("^J^M%s deleted^J^M", file_name); else fdisplay("^J^M%s could not be deleted^J^M", file_name); endif endif endproc

GETFILESIZE getfilesize(string file_name) : integer; Gets the size of the file specified by file_name in bytes if the file is present, else -1 is returned.

Example

See getfiledate command.

262 8 RASExpress Script Language

GETFILETIME getfiletime(string file_name, var string buffer) : integer; Gets the time of the file specified by file_name if the file is present, and copies it to buffer (in hh:mm:ss format). If the file is present 1 is returned, else 0 is returned.

Example

See getfiledate command.

HANGUP hangup; Hangs up the modem.

Example /* This script illustrates the hangup command. */ proc main; display("Example for hangup command^J^M"); if connected then display("Will hang up the modem, press any key..."); getkey; hangup; display("^J^M"); else display("Connection not made, command ignored^J^M"); endif endproc

INC inc(var integer integer_variable); Increments integer_variable by 1.

Example

See dec command.

ISFILE isfile(string path_name) : integer; Verifies that path_name is a directory. If path_name is a directory, 0 is returned; otherwise 1 is returned.

Example See fcreate command.

263 RASExpress User Guide

ITOA itoa(integer number, var string buffer [, integer radix]); Converts number to a sequence of characters according to radix and copies it to buffer. If radix is not given, 10 (decimal) is assumed. If number is converted and buffer is updated, 1 is returned; otherwise 0 is returned.

Example /* This script illustrates the itoa command. */ proc main; integer i; string str; display("Example for itoa command^J^M"); display("Enter an integer (in decimal) : "); i = getint; itoa(i, str); fdisplay("^J^MValue in decimal is : %s^J^M", str); itoa(i, str, 16); fdisplay("Value in hex is : %s^J^M", str); endproc

MKDIR mkdir(string) : integer; Creates the directory in the path specified by path_name. If creation of the directory is successful, 1 is returned; else 0 is returned.

Example /* This script illustrates the mkdir command. */ proc main; string name; integer len; len = 45; display("Example for mkdir command^J^M"); display("Enter directory name to create : "); if getstr(name, len) then if mkdir(name) then fdisplay("^J^M%s created^J^M", name); else fdisplay("^J^M%s could not be created^J^M", name); endif endif endproc

MOD mod(integer number1, number2) : integer; Divides number1 by number2 and returns the remainder. If number2 is zero, script execution is terminated.

Example

See dec command.

264 8 RASExpress Script Language

PARITY parity(string option) : integer; Sets the parity for the communication channel. The option that is passed should be one of the following : NONE, ODD, or EVEN. If connection is not initialized or an invalid option is passed, the command is ignored and 0 is returned. If a valid option is passed, the parity is set and 1 is returned.

Example

See baudrate command.

PROC PROC procedure_name [ (parameter_list) ] [ : var_type] ; This statement declares the beginning of a procedure, which will be executed until ENDPROC is encountered. Execution of a script file starts at PROC MAIN, which cannot have any arguments. All procedures must be declared before they are used.

Example /* This script illustrates the proc command. */ proc main; display("This is a simple procedure.^M") ; endproc proc xplusy (integer x, y): integer; integer sum; sum=x+y' return(sum) ; endproc

QUIT quit; Terminates the execution of the script.

Example /* This script illustrates the quit command. */ proc main; display("Press any key to exit the program..."); getkey; display("^J^M"); quit; endproc

265 RASExpress User Guide

RGETC rgetc(var string buffer [, integer timeout]) : integer; Gets a character from the remote machine. Timeout is optional and should be in seconds. If the connection is not initialized, the command is ignored and 0 is returned. If the connection is initialized, the command waits for a character from the remote. If a character is received, it is copied into buffer (which is terminated with a null) and 1 is returned; otherwise 0 is returned. If timeout is specified and no characters are received within that period, 0 is returned. If timeout is not specified it waits until a character is received, or until the connection is dropped.

Example /* This script illustrates the rgetc command. */ proc main; string s; integer timeout; timeout = 5; fdisplay("Waiting for a character, timeout is : %d ➥ seconds...", timeout); if rgetc(s, timeout) then fdisplay("Character received is : %s^J^M", s); else display("No character received^J^M"); endif endproc

RMDIR rmdir(string path_name) : integer; Removes the directory from the path specified by path_name. If the directory deletion is successful, 1 is returned, else 0 is returned.

Example /* This script illustrates the rmdir command. */ proc main; string name; integer len; len = 45; display("Example for rmdir command^J^M"); display("Enter directory name to remove : "); if getstr(name, len) then if rmdir(name) then fdisplay("^J^M%s removed^J^M", name); else fdisplay("^J^M%s could not be removed^J^M", name); endif endif endproc

266 8 RASExpress Script Language

SETFILEATTR setfileattr(string file_name, integer attribute) : integer; Sets the attribute for the file specified by file_name. If the attribute is set successfully, 1 is returned, else 0 is returned. The attribute should be according to DOS Int 21 Fn 4301h call.

Example

See getfiledate command.

SETFILEDATE setfiledate(string file_name, file_date) : integer; Sets the date for the file specified by file_name. If the date is set successfully, 1 is returned, else 0 is returned. The date should be given in mm-dd-yy or mm/dd/yy format. If there is any error in the date string, 0 is returned, and the command is ignored.

Example

See getfiledate command.

SETFILETIME setfiletime(string file_name, file_time) : integer; Sets the time for the file specified by file_name. If the time is set successfully, 1 is returned, else 0 is returned. The time should be given in hh:mm:ss format. If there is any error in the time string, 0 is returned, and the command is ignored.

Example

See getfiledate command.

STOPBITS stopbits(integer no_of_bits) : integer; Sets the number of stop bits for the communication channel. The no_of_bits passed should be 1 or 2. If the connection is not initialized or no_of_bits is not within this range, the command is ignored and 0 is returned; otherwise 1 is returned.

Example

See baudrate command.

STRCAT strcat(var string first_string, second_string) : integer; Concatenates second_string to first_string. If there is any concatenation error, 0 is returned; otherwise 1 is returned.

Example

See strlen command.

267 RASExpress User Guide

STRCMP strcmp(string first_string, second_string) : integer; Compares first_string to second_string. If they are the same, 0 is returned. If first_string is less than second_string (i.e., earlier in the alphabet or number line), a negative value is returned; otherwise a positive value is returned.

Example

See strlen command.

STRCPY strcpy(var string target_string, source_string); Copies source_string to target_string. If there is any error in copying, 0 is returned; otherwise 1 is returned.

Example

See strlen command.

STRFMT strfmt(var string buffer, string format_string {, integer | real | string argument}) ➥ : integer; Formats the arguments according to format_string and copies to buffer. There should be a one-to-one correspondence between the format control characters in the format string and the provided arguments. If a provided argument does not match the corresponding format control character, it is ignored in the conversion. The number of converted arguments is returned. For a detailed description of the format control characters, see “Format String and Format Control Characters” on page 241.

Example

See strlen command.

STRLEN strlen(string buffer) : integer; Returns the string length of buffer.

Example /* This script illustrates the strlen, strcat, strcmp, */ /* strcpy, and strfmt commands. */ proc main; string str; string tail; string str1; string str2; str = "test string"; display("Example of strlen command^J^M"); fdisplay("str value is : %s^J^Mlength of the string is ➥ %d^J^M", str, strlen(str)); display("Example of strcat command^J^M"); fdisplay("str value is : %s^J^M", str); tail = " for strcat"; fdisplay("str value after concatenating with ‘%s’ is ➥ : ^J^M", tail); strcat(str, tail); fdisplay("%s^J^M^J^M", str); display("Example of strcmp command^J^M"); str1 = "string";

268 8 RASExpress Script Language

str2 = "string"; fdisplay("str1 : %s^J^Mstr2 : %s^J^M", str1, str2); if !strcmp(str1, str2) then display("str1 and str2 are same^J^M^J^M"); else display("str1 and str2 are different^J^M^J^M"); endif str1 = "string1"; str2 = "string2"; fdisplay("str1 : %s^J^M", str1); fdisplay("str2 : %s^J^M", str2); if !strcmp(str1, str2) then display("str1 and str2 are same^J^M"); else display("str1 and str2 are different^J^M"); endif display("Example of strcpy command^J^M"); str = "first string"; str1 = "second string"; fdisplay("str value before strcpy is : ‘%s’^J^M", str); strcpy(str, str1); fdisplay("str value after strcpy is : ‘%s’^J^M", str); display("Example of strfmt command^J^M"); display("constants 120 & 150 will be"); display(" concatenated into a string and shown^J^M"); strfmt(str, "%d %d^J^M", 120, 150); display(str); display("^J^MEnd of script, press any key..."); getkey; display("^J^M"); endproc

TOLOWER tolower(var string buffer); Converts the string variable to lower case.

Example /* This script illustrates the tolower command. */ proc main; string str; integer len; display("Example for tolower command^J^M"); display("Enter string to convert : "); len = 20; if getstr(str, len) then fdisplay("^J^MString read is : %s^J^M", str); tolower(str); fdisplay("Converted string is : %s^J^M", str); endif endproc

269 RASExpress User Guide

TOUPPER toupper(var string buffer); Converts the string variable to upper case.

Example /* This script illustrates the toupper command. */

proc main; string str; integer len; display("Example for toupper command^J^M"); display("Enter string to convert : "); len = 20; if getstr(str, len) then fdisplay("^J^MString read is : %s^J^M", str); toupper(str); fdisplay("Converted string is : %s^J^M", str); endif endproc

TRANSMIT transmit(string key_sequence) : integer; Sends out the characters specified in key_sequence. Key_sequence should be null terminated. If connection is not initialized, the command is ignored and 0 is returned. If all the keys given in key_sequence are sent out successfully, 1 is returned; otherwise 0 is returned.

Example /* This script illustrates the transmit command. */ proc main; string s; integer i; s = " example string "; fori=0to100do if transmit(s) then display("Transmit successful\x0d\x0a"); else display("Transmit failed\x0d\x0a"); endif endfor endproc

WAIT wait(integer delay); Suspends the script execution for the time in seconds specified by delay. Characters typed on the keyboard will be sent to the remote and the incoming characters will also be shown on the terminal.

Example /* This script illustrates the wait command. */ proc main; integer duration; display("Enter wait duration in seconds : "); duration = getint; fdisplay("^J^MWait starts (duration = %d seconds)^J^M", duration); wait(duration); display("Wait ends^J^M"); endproc

270 8 RASExpress Script Language

WAITFOR waitfor(string pattern [, integer timeout]) : integer; Waits for a pattern from the remote machine. Timeout is optional. It waits for pattern to be received from the remote machine or timeout to occur (if specified), whichever is earlier. The pattern match is not case sensitive. If the connection is not initialized or pattern is not received, 0 is returned; otherwise 1 is returned.

Example /* This script illustrates the waitfor command. */ proc main; string pat; integer timeout; pat = "abcdef"; timeout = 10; fdisplay("wait for ‘%s’ starts (timeout = %d seconds)^J^M", ➥ pat, timeout); if (waitfor(pat, timeout)) then display("Pattern got, wait ends^J^M"); else display("Pattern not got, wait failed^J^M"); endif endproc

271 RASExpress User Guide

272 Appendixes

273 RASExpress User Guide

274 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Appendix A Reinstalling RASExpress

Introduction

The RASExpress software package includes programs for installation on the communications server, on client computers, and on remote computers. The RASExpress server programs are sold preinstalled. This appendix describes how to reinstall the RASExpress server programs and how to configure and manage RASExpress using these programs. To configure and manage RASExpress using Telnet, a browser, or the MultiManager SNMP program, see the other chapters of this manual. The RASExpress server software includes the server program, RASEXP.EXE; the local configuration utility, RASCON.EXE; and the color utility, SETCOLOR.EXE, which the system administrator can use to adjust the color of the server screens. All three are DOS programs.

Reinstalling RASExpress

• The RASExpress server software must be installed on a hard drive. • A client calling into the RASExpress server is referred to as the client PC or as the user.

• In many cases, you can use the INSERT key to toggle between insert mode and overwrite mode when editing data in a field. Insert mode lets you insert characters into a line of text. Overwrite mode lets you replace existing characters with new characters. • HIMEM.SYS must be loaded by the RASExpress server’s CONFIG.SYS file. Make sure there are no network drivers loaded before you start the installation. We also recommend removing any reference to SMARTDRV.EXE from the RASExpress server’s AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

To Reinstall RASExpress 1. To ensure the correct environment for a reinstallation, at the C:\ prompt, type the following commands: copy config.000 config.sys copy autoexec.000 autoexec.bat 2. Reboot the server.

Note: You may alternately restore RASExpress to its factory settings by typing restore at the C:\ prompt. However, this command will also lose all your custom settings and user names. To retain your settings, follow the steps in this procedure.

3. Insert the compact disc that came with your RASExpress server into the server’s CD-ROM drive.

275 RASExpress User Guide

4. In the DOS command line, select the drive containing the compact disc, and navigate to the directory \SOFTWARE\RASEXPRS\DISK1. 5. Type install. 6. The Install Options window appears.

In the Operating System field, select the operating system on which the installation is to be performed. Press ENTER to see the options, which are Novell and Any Other. If you select Novell, you can install RASExpress Server to a network drive or to a local drive. If you select Any Other, you can install only to a local drive; TCP/IP will be supported, but not IPX. In the Install on network drive field, select No to install the RASExpress Server on the local drive if you selected Novell in the Operating System field. Press ESC when finished. 7. The Ethernet Card Information window appears.

Select the Card Type field and press ENTER to see the list of network interface card (NIC) types for which RASExpress can be installed. To install RASExpress with the EN301CT16D network interface card, choose the NE2000 option.

In the I/O Port field, press ENTER to see a list of valid ports where an NIC card can be installed. Choose the port where your NIC card is installed.

In the Interrupt field, press ENTER to see a list of valid interrupts. Choose the interrupt for your installed NIC card. In the Frame Type field, choose a default frame type. This field is not available if you selected Any Other in step 4.

Press ESC when finished. 8. In the Enter path name for Server files field, type the path to the destination directory where you want to install RASExpress, then press ENTER. By default, the drivers are copied to C:\RAS560. To accept the path name and continue with the installation, press ESC. 9. A window appears that shows the progress of the files as they are copied from the source directory to the destination directory. 10. The RASExpress Server Configuration utility starts. Use the utility to configure the RASExpress server, as explained beginning on the next page.

11. Press ESC when you finish configuring the RASExpress server. A message about your AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files appears. Press any key after you

276 A Reinstalling RASExpress

have read the message. The original files are saved as AUTOEXEC.000, .001, .002, etc., and CONFIG.000, .001, .002, etc. 12. The Licensing Information window appears.

In the Name field, type the name of the person for whom you installed the RASExpress server. It can be up to 17 characters long. In the Organization field, type the name of the organization for which you installed the RASExpress server. It can be up to 50 characters long.

Press ESC to continue. 13. The following message appears: RASExpress Server Installation Completed. 14. Installation of the RASExpress server is complete. Press any key to continue. 15. A Restart Computer? message appears. We recommend that you select Yes to have your configuration changes take effect immediately.

277 RASExpress User Guide

RASExpress Server Configuration Utility

The RASExpress Server Configuration utility (RASCON.EXE) is a DOS program for configuring the RASExpress server. It starts automatically following installation of the RASExpress Server software. You can also run it any time the server is off-line by changing to the RASExpress directory (C:\RAS560) and typing rascon. You can also configure the RASExpress server using terminal and Telnet menus(Chapter 3), Telnet commands (Appendix D), a Web browser (Chapter 4), or MultiManager, a Windows SNMP remote configuration utility that can be used to configure any RASExpress server on the network from a client PC (Chapter 5) .

Note: Because of the 640K memory limitation in DOS, the User Setup and Modem Setup menus cannot be loaded while the network files are running. To unload the network files, from the C:\ prompt type mtslsl -u . Alternately, reboot the server and bypass AUTOEXEC.BAT by pressing F5 when the message Starting MS-DOS appears. Then change to the RASExpress directory and type rascon to start RASCON.

Main Menu

When you run RASCON, the Main Menu appears. The Main Menu is the starting point for configuring the RASExpress server. To select a submenu, highlight it using the arrow keys, and press ENTER. To close a menu and most configuration windows, press ESC.

278 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Server Setup

To open the Server Setup menu, select Server Setup from the Main Menu. From the Server Setup menu, you can open several windows that configure the RASExpress server’s network operations.

General Setup To open the General Setup window, select General Setup from the Server Setup menu.

In the General Setup window, you can change the following parameters:

Supervisor Password Use this field to assign a supervisor password. The password is case-sensitive. For security, the actual characters are replaced by asterisks. This password locks the local console and prevents regular users from running MultiManager and making changes to the RASExpress server.

279 RASExpress User Guide

Log Status This field turns the call log on and off. When On is selected, RASExpress logs all calls for one hour in the file yyyymmdd.LOG, where yyyymmdd is the year, month, and day the log was created. The 24 saved logs for each date are given the extensions .L00– .L23. When Off is selected, RASExpress does not log calls.

Log Start Date You can start the call log automatically, if it is off, by entering the start date in the format month-day-year. When the date arrives, the log starts at the time specified in the Log Start Time field.

Log Start Time Enter the time at which you want the log to start, if it is off, in the format hours:minutes:seconds.

Write Error Messages into File This field turns the message log on and off. Select On to have RASExpress save all error and other messages it receives into a file. Select Off to disable the log.

Message File If On is selected in the previous field, you can use this field to assign a name to the message file. The default file name is SERVER.MSG.

PPP Connection Log This field turns the PPP connection log on and off.

Screen Saver RASExpress Server has a built-in screen saver. Select Off if you do not want the screen saver. Select On if you do want to use the screen saver.

Connection Manager Menu Select On to display the Connection Manager menu to a user calling into the RASExpress server for remote control operation. Select Off to display the Host List to the user.

Command to MultiModemManager Select On to have the RASExpress server send the LOGON user name to a Multi- ModemManager rack or PC. You can then determine, via the Call Status window in MultiCommManager, which users are dialing out. Select Off if MultiCommManager is not installed.

Press ESC when finished.

280 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Administrator Setup To open the List of Administrators window, select Administrator Setup from the Server Setup menu.

The List of Administrators lists the users who have administrative rights. To add an administrator to the list, press INSERT; to edit an entry, press ENTER. Both actions open a dialog box in which you can edit the administrator’s user name, password, and configuration and management permissions.

User Name The administrator’s user name.

User Password The administrator’s password. You must type the password twice to confirm it

Configuration Permissions If enabled, permits the administrator to configure the RASExpress server.

Management Permissions If enabled, permits the administrator to manage the RASExpress server.

281 RASExpress User Guide

IP Remote Access Configuration To open the IP Remote Access Configuration window, select IP Remote Access from the Server Setup menu.

Use the IP Remote Access Configuration window to set up parameters that apply to IP routing on all ports.

IP Remote Access This field shows the IP remote access status. When it is enabled, the RASExpress server provides remote access on IP. This allows any remote PPP-compatible client to call in and access local TCP/IP hosts, such as WWW, FTP, Telnet, etc.

IP Address This field shows the IP network address for the RASExpress server’s Ethernet interface. It can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled. The IP address must be assigned by the system administrator, and it must be unique on the TCP/IP network.

IP Subnet Mask This field shows the IP subnet mask of the RASExpress server. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled. The mask shown in the example is the standard mask for a Class C network.

IP Default Route This field shows the IP default route on the network on which the RASExpress server is installed. Any IP packets that cannot be routed by the RASExpress server are sent to this address. If there is no router on the network, the address should be filled with zeroes. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

IP RIP Enables or disables the IP Routing Information Protocol (RIP-2). Enable IP RIP if you want the RASExpress server to use RIP-2 for IP routing.

IP Learn Default Gateway Enables or disables RASExpress to learn the correct default gateway if you have configured the default gateway incorrectly or if the configured gateway goes down and a different router starts acting as a default router. This feature requires a RIP-2 router that supports default gateway broadcasting.

282 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Primary Name Server This field shows the address of the primary name server that is used by the RASExpress server to resolve names to IP addresses for Telnet and RLOGIN clients dialing in from a dumb terminal. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

Secondary Name Server This field shows the address of the secondary name server that is used by the RASExpress server to resolve names to IP addresses for Telnet and RLOGIN clients dialing in from a dumb terminal. The secondary name server is used when the primary name server does not respond. This field can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled.

DNS Caching Server Enable to have the RASExpress server act as a DNS server. When this option is enabled, the RASExpress server gives out its IP address as the DNS server to dialing PPP clients.

IP Frame Type This field shows the RASExpress server’s IP frame type. It can be edited only if IP Remote Access is enabled. Two frame types are available: TYPE_II (default) and SNAP.

Remote Client IP Addresses This field shows how the RASExpress server allocates IP addresses to remote client- to-LAN users. Select Use DHCP if you have a DHCP server on your LAN. Select Use address pool if the IP addresses you assign to the clients are continuous. Select Configure per port (the default) if you want to assign a specific address to each of the remote ports. Select Use Radius if you want to use your RADIUS server to assign IP addresses. For LAN-to-LAN ports you must configure all IP addresses manually.

Static Routes Press ENTERto display a list of the static routes used when WAN ports are set up for LAN-to-LAN operation. Because of DOS memory constraints, static routes cannot be added, deleted, or modified in this interface.

Press ESC when finished.

IPX Remote Access Configuration To open the IPX Remote Access Configuration window, select IPX Remote Access from the Server Setup menu.

283 RASExpress User Guide

From the IPX Remote Access Configuration window, you can change the following parameters:

IPX Remote Access Select Enabled to allow the RASExpress server to use the IPX protocol for remote access.

Learning Network Numbers Select Enabled to allow the RASExpress server to automatically detect and use the network’s numbers.

Internal Network Number Type the IPX internal network number for the RASExpress server. This number should be unique on the network.

Route NetBIOS Over IPX Packets This option enables the routing of NetBIOS over IPX packets. Select Yes if you are running applications on NetBIOS over IPX. Select No if you do not need this option.

802.3 Select Yes to enable routing of 802.3 IPX packets on the LAN, then type a network number for the 802.3 frame type.

802.2 Select Yes to enable routing of 802.2 IPX packets on the LAN, then type a network number for the 802.2 frame type.

Type_II Select Yes to enable routing of Ethernet_II IPX packets on the LAN, then type a network number for the Ethernet_II frame type .

SNAP Select Yes to enable routing of Ethernet SNAP IPX packets on the LAN, then type a network number for the Ethernet SNAP frame type.

Press ESC when finished.

284 A Reinstalling RASExpress

PPP Configuration To open the PPP Configuration window, select Point-to-Point Protocol Setup from the Server Setup menu.

From the PPP Configuration window, you can edit the following PPP parameters for a selected WAN port. To choose a port to edit, select Port Name and press ENTER. A List of Lines menu appears, from which you can select the desired port.

Port Name Shows the name of the port you are configuring. Press ENTER to select another port to configure.

Port Type Select the type of connection the port is to be used for: Client-to-LAN or LAN-to- LAN. Select Client-to-LAN if the PPP peer is a dial-up client. Select LAN-to-LAN if the PPP peer is a dial-up client or another router. If you change the connection type, be sure to change the IP address also.

SLIP This field shows the status of the Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) for the selected port. Enable SLIP if you have SLIP clients dialing into the RASExpress server)

Data Compression Select Enable to enable PPP data compression for the port. Enable data compression only if the data link is slower than 57,600 bps and the modem is not doing any data compression. Disable it if the data link is 57,600 bps or faster or if the modem is doing data compression.

Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) This field shows the PPP maximum receive unit (MRU) for the port, in the range 0– 1534. The MRU is the packet size in bits.

Async Control Map (ACCM) This field shows the PPP Asynchronous Control Character Map (ACCM) for the port, in the range 0–FFFFFFFF.

285 RASExpress User Guide

PPP Connection Log Select On to enable a PPP connection log. All information on the connection is included in the log, which is stored in the RASExpress working directory.

Authentication Protocol This field shows the PPP authentication protocol for the port. You can choose PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol), or None.

User Name Type a user name here for use in LAN-to-LAN security. For a client-to-LAN configuration, leave this field blank.

Password Type a password here for use in LAN-to-LAN security. The password is case- sensitive, and must match the password at the other end of the PPP connection. For a client-to-LAN configuration, leave this field blank.

IPXCP Select Enabled to enable IPX for the selected port. Select Disabled to disable IPX, so that it will be unavailable for remote dial-in clients. IPXCP is a PPP network control protocol for IPX. It is responsible for configuring, enabling, and disabling the IPX protocol modules on both ends of the point-to-point link.

Node Number This field shows the IPX remote node number of the port. Each port must have a unique node number. You can edit this field only if IPXCP is enabled.

CIPX Compression Select Enable to enable CIPX (Compressed Internetwork Packet Exchange) compression of IPX headers for the port. Select Disable if you do not want CIPX compression. If you select Enable, CIPX compression must also be enabled on the server for your choice to have an effect. You can edit this field only if IPXCP is enabled.

NetBIOS over IPX This field allows you to enable or disable routing of NetBIOS over IPX packets through the port. Enable it if you are using applications that require NetBIOS over IPX support. You can edit this field only if IPXCP is enabled.

BCP This field shows the status of the Bridge Control Protocol (BCP) for the port. Enable BCP if the other end of the PPP link supports BCP.

IPCP This field enables IP for the port. Select Disabled if TCP/IP or PPP is not to be used.

286 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Local Address This field shows the IP local network address of the port. This field can be edited only for LAN-to-LAN ports, and only if IPCP is enabled. For all client-to-LAN connections, the local address is the same as the IP address of the LAN port. For LAN-to-LAN ports, make sure the IP address is on a different network or a subnet of any of the existing networks.

Remote Address This field shows the IP network address of the port. It is the address assigned to the remote PPP client. It must be on the same network as the IP local address. This field can be edited only if IPCP is enabled. It cannot be edited for client-to-LAN ports if DHCP is enabled.

Subnet Mask This field contains the mask used to specify the subnetwork part of the IP address. For all client-to-LAN connections it is the same as the LAN network. See “IP Addressing” on page 8.

Forward Broadcasts This field allows you to enable or disable forwarding of UDP broadcast packets onto the port. Enable it if your UDP applications depend on the broadcasts. When forwarding is enabled, the RASExpress server forwards to the selected port all UPD broadcast packets that come from the LAN and from the client-to-LAN ports. For- warding broadcasts on remote links increases the traffic on the links, so enable forwarding only if necessary.

Multilink PPP To open the Multilink PPP window, select Multilink PPP from the Server Setup menu.

Use this window to set up Multilink PPP on the RASExpress server. The Multilink PPP protocol bonds two physical ports to one IP address for greater bandwidth.

Note: RASExpress has MultiChassis Multilink support, which enables the bundling of multilink connections across different RASExpress servers. All MultiChassis Multilink servers must have IP and PPTP turned on to enable the servers to talk to each other. Also, all MultiChassis Multilink servers should point to the same RADIUS or TACACS+ server.

287 RASExpress User Guide

Multilink PPP Status Select Enabled to enable Multilink PPP (MLPPP) support on the RASExpress server. RASExpress supports Multilink PPP for both analog and ISDN channels.

Bundle Server UDP Port Identifies the UDP port number that the RASExpress server uses to communicate between itself and the Bundle Server.

MAC Layer Bridging Select MAC Layer Bridging from the Server Setup menu to open the MAC Layer Bridging window. Use this window to configure MAC (Media Access Control) layer bridging for the RASExpress server.

Bridging Select Enabled to enable the server to bridge all MAC layer packets. The default is Disabled. If you do not use networking protocols other than IP and IPX, you should disable bridging, since it slows down the RASExpress server by requiring the router to examine each and every packet on the connected LAN segment. However, you will need bridging to support networking protocols like NetBIOS. Note that if you enable bridging for the RASExpress server but disable routing of IP or IPX on a specific port, bridging of those protocol packets will not take place on that port. However, if you disable IP or IPX entirely for the RASExpress server, then those packets will be bridged.

Spanning Tree Spanning Tree bridging is used to detect looped back links. The default is Disabled. This option is unavailable when Bridging is disabled.

288 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Telnet Select Telnet from the Server Setup menu to open the Telnet Options window.

Telnet Administration Select Enabled if you want to be able to configure and manage the RASExpress server from any Telnet client.

Telnet Client Select Enabled to allow a remote user who has dialed in to the RASExpress server to Telnet to different hosts on the network.

Telnet Dialout Select Enabled to allow users to use any Telnet client to select a modem on the RASExpress server and dial out to UNIX hosts and BBSs.

Telnet Auto Dialout Select Enabled to allow a Telnet client to connect to the TCP port number in Auto Dialout Port Number and use any free modem on the RASExpress server.

Auto Dialout Port Number Type the TCP port number that is to be used for Telnet auto dialout.

Message Update Port Number Type the message port number for the RASExpress server. You can then Telnet to this port to see current status messages

Interface Type Choose the Telnet interface type; the choices are Menu and Command. Menu mode allows the RASExpress server to be configured using the menus in Chapter 3. Command mode allows the RASExpress server to be configured by typing Telnet commands (see Appendix C).

289 RASExpress User Guide

SNTP Client Select SNTP Client from the Server Setup menu to open the SNTP Client Configuration window.

The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is used to synchronize computer clocks in the Internet. RASExpress uses SNTP time signals to synchronize server clocks for accounting accuracy.

SNTP Client Select Enable to enable the RASExpress server to synchronize its clock using SNTP signals.

SNTP Server Address Type the IP address of the SNTP server you want to use as a time source.

Time Zone Type a one- to three-letter abbreviation for the time zone of the RASExpress server that you are configuring. It is used for display purposes only.

U.S. time zone Offset from UTC Eastern Standard (EST) -05:00 Central Standard (CST) -06:00 Mountain Standard (MST) -07:00 Pacific Standard (PST) -08:00

Daylight Savings Select Enable to make RASExpress automatically adjust the clock for daylight-saving time.

Move Clock By Type the number of minutes that the clock changes during the shifts to and from daylight-saving time. In most parts of the world it is 60 minutes.

290 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Start Ordinal Daylight-saving time usually starts at the same time on the same day of the week in the same month every year. Each day of the week occurs four or five times a month. Select on which occurrence daylight-saving time starts: the first, second, third, fourth, or the last of the month. In the U.S.A., daylight-saving time starts at 2:00 A.M. on the first Sunday in April.

Start Day Select the day of the week on which daylight-saving time starts.

Start Month Select the month in which daylight-saving time starts.

Start Time Type the time of day that daylight-saving time starts.

End Ordinal Select on which occurrence of the selected day of the week that daylight-saving time ends: the first, second, third, fourth, or last of the month. In the U.S.A., daylight-saving time ends at 2:00 A.M. on the last Sunday in October.

End Day Select the day of the week on which daylight-saving time ends.

End Month Select the month in which daylight-saving time ends.

End Time Type the time of day that daylight-saving time ends.

SNMP Agent Select SNMP Agent from the Server Setup menu to open the SNMP Agent Configuration window.

The RASExpress server can be managed or configured by any standard Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) manager.

SNMP Agent Select Enabled to enable SNMP agent support, Disabled to disable it.

291 RASExpress User Guide

SNMP Trap Manager IP Address Type the IP address of the SNMP trap manager.

SNMP Trap Manager Community Name Type the community name of the SNMP trap manager. Any SNMP traps that are generated by the RASExpress server will be sent to this manager.

SNMP Trap Manager Port Number Type the port number of the SNMP trap manager. The default port number is 162.

SNMP Reboot Required Trap Enable to send a trap to the manager whenever a configuration change is made that requires a reboot of the server.

SNMP Authentication Select whether SNMP authentication is simple or encrypted. Set authentication to Simple if you are usingMultiCommManager or a third party manager. This uses plain text for Get and Set community names. You may also set authentication to Simple if you are using Multi-Tech MultiManager. Set authentication to Encrypted only if you are using MultiManager. When authentication is encrypted, the administrative user name and password and the PDU ID (a field in the SNMP request to the agent) are used to prepare an encrypted sequence used for authentication of the SNMP request by the agent (RAS). It is a combination understood only between the RAS and MultiManager.

SNMP Get Community Name The RASExpress server can be configured for Get and Set communities. Type the name of the Get community here. The default is public.

SNMP Get Community Permission Select the Get community permission. The choices are readonly and readwrite. The default is readonly.

SNMP Set Community Name Type the name of the Set community. The default is supervisor.

SNMP Set Community Permission Select the Set community permission. The choices are readonly and readwrite. The default is readwrite.

292 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Virtual Port Information To open the Virtual Port Information window, select Virtual Port Information from the Server Setup menu.

Use the Virtual Port Information window to configure an individual WAN port.

Port Name Displays the name of the port for which the information is displayed. To select another port, press ENTER. A List of Lines window appears from which you can select the new port.

Idle Timeout Type the number of minutes of no activity that is allowed before RASExpress disconnects the port. A value of 0 disables idle timeout.

Session Timeout Type the number of minutes allowed per session. When this time is exceeded, RASExpress automatically disconnects the port. A value of 0 disables session timeout.

PPP Detect Select Enabled to enable automatic PPP connections on the port. Select Disabled to disable automatic PPP connections. When Disabled is selected, a PPP client is presented with a menu on connection.

Host IP Address Type the Telnet or Rlogin host IP address to be used when PPP Detect is enabled. This field can be edited only if the Auto Login Protocol field is set to Telnet or Rlogin.

293 RASExpress User Guide

Filter Template Name Type the name of the filter template for the port. For more information about filter templates, see Appendix D.

Tunnel Protocol Select PPTP to enable tunneling on the port. Select None to disable tunneling.

Tunnel Server IP Address Type the IP address of the server used for PPTP tunneling. This field is inactive if tunneling is disabled.

Connect Type Select the type of LAN-to-LAN connection. The options are Answering and Dialing. For a client-to-LAN connection, Answering is the only option.

Dial Type Select whether the server will make an analog or an ISDN call. For a client-to-LAN connection, this field is unavailable.

Telephone Number Type the number the server will dial for a LAN-to-LAN connection. For a client-to- LAN connection, this field is unavailable.

Bundling for LAN to LAN Select Enabled to bundle the port with a PPP port configured for LAN-to-LAN operation. Any call on such a reserved port is mapped to the bundled PPP port. You can do multilink PPP on LAN-to-LAN connections by reserving multiple virtual ports for a single PPP port.

Bundled Port for LAN to LAN Select the PPP port to be bundled with the virtual port.

Physical Port Information To open the Physical Port Information window, select Physical Port Information from the Server Setup menu.

Use the Physical Port Information window to configure an individual physical port.

294 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Port Name Displays the name of the selected port. To select another port, press ENTER. A List of Lines window appears from which you can select the new port. The port name consists of a general name ("MODEM") and a specific name ("B1_5634_PCI_1").

Auto Dialout Select Enabled to enable auto dialout for the port. Select Disabled to disable auto dialout.

Auto Dialout TCP Port Number Displays the auto dialout TCP port number. To edit it, click in the box and type a new TCP port number. This field is unavailable if Auto Dial Out is disabled.

Raw TCP Connection Select Disabled to disable all Telnet negotiations on the port, so that the connection is treated as a “raw” TCP data stream. When a standard Telnet connection is made, certain parameters are negotiated, such as terminal type and screen size. However, some applications use Telnet for faxing or credit card validation for which negotiation is neither required nor recommended. It is for such applications that you should disable this option.

SMTP Client To open the SMPT Client Configuration window, select SMPT Client from the Server Setup menu. Use this window to configure SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) service on the RASExpress server.

SMTP Client Select Enabled to enable SMTP service. Select Disabled to disable SMTP service. This option must be enabled to make the other options in the window accessible.

SMTP Server IP Address Type the IP address of the SMTP server.

SMTP Sender E-Mail Address Type the e-mail address of the RASExpress server.

List of Recipients Select this field and press ENTER to see the list of e-mail recipients. E-mail alert messages are sent to these recipients if any of the four following options are enabled

295 RASExpress User Guide

and the conditions are met. To add a new recipient, press INSERT and type the recipient’s e-mail address. Press ENTER to confirm the entry, then press ESC to close the window. To delete an entry from the list, select the entry and press DELETE.

Send Mail on Message File Full Select Enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the Recipient list when the message file is full.

Send Mail on Log File Full Select Enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the Recipient list when the log file is full.

Send Mail on Debug Log Full Select Enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the List of Recipients when the debug log is full.

Send Mail After Server Upgrade Select Enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the Recipient list when the server is upgraded.

Send Mail on At Command Execution Select Enabled if you want the RASExpress server to send an e-mail alert to the addresses in the List of Recipients when an At command has been executed. At commands are Telnet commands that run at a specified date and time. For more information, see Appendix C.

Applications To open the Applications window, select Applications from the Server Setup menu. Use this window to enable or disable several applications that are installed with RASExpress Server.

Web Server Enable this option to allow the RASExpress server to be managed by a Web browser.

FTP Server Enable this option to allow File Transfer Protocol (FTP) file transfers between the RASExpress server and the management console. You can use FTP to send the upgrade files to the RASExpress server (see Appendix B). Unlike TFTP, FTP has password protection.

296 A Reinstalling RASExpress

RLOGIN Client Enable this option to allow the RASExpress server to be used as an RLOGIN client for connecting to an RLOGIN server.

Security To open the Security window, select Security from the Server Setup menu. Use this window to configure the RASExpress server to work with your security servers. The RASExpress server supports the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) and TACACS+ protocols for authentication.

Security Protocol Use this field to select the security protocol you are using on your network. If you do not have a security server on your network, select Local. The other two options are RADIUS and TACACS+.

Shared Secret Type the shared secret used for communication between the RASExpress server and the security server. It must match the shared secret configured at the security server.

TACACS+ Encryption Select Enabled to enable encryption of TACACS+ packets between the RASExpress server and the TACACS+ security server. Enable only if your TACACS+ server supports encryption.

Primary Server Address Type the IP address of your primary security server.

297 RASExpress User Guide

Backup Server Address Type the IP address of your backup security server. You can specify up to three backup security servers.

Remote User Enter Number Attribute Value Enter the value you have chosen for the Remote User Enter Number attribute. You must set up the same attribute in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique attribute value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS attributes or any other custom attributes. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

Protocol Permissions Attribute Value Enter the value you have chosen for the Protocol Permissions attribute. You must set up the same attribute in the dictionary file of your RADIUS server. Make sure that you select a unique attribute value. The value must not clash with any of the standard RADIUS attributes or any other custom attributes. Consult your RADIUS server documentation before making any changes.

298 A Reinstalling RASExpress

OSPF Configuration To open the OSPF Configuration window, select OSPF Configuration from the Server Setup menu. Use this window to create an OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) database for the RASExpress server.

OSPF Routing Select Enabled to enable OSPF routing on the server.

Router ID Type the identifier for the OSPF router. It has the same format as an IP address, but identifies the router independent of its IP Address.

Area Configuration Use Area Configuration to review or configure OSPF areas. An OSPF area is made up of internal routers linked to other areas within an autonomous system (AS) by area border routers.

To review or configure OSPF areas, press ENTER to open the List of Areas. To edit an area in the List of Areas, select it and press ENTER. To create a new area, press INSERT. In both cases the Area Configuration window opens with the following options:

299 RASExpress User Guide

List of Address Ranges The List of Address Ranges specifies the address ranges in an OSPF area. Although an area can be loosely defined as a collection of networks, in actuality an area is specified as a list of address ranges. Each address range is defined as an address and mask pair. Many separate networks may be contained in a single address range, just as a subnetted network is composed of many separate subnets. To open the List of Address Ranges window, select an area in the List of Areas window and press F2. To edit an address range, select it and press ENTER. To add a new address range, press INSERT. In both cases the Address Range Configuration window opens with the following options.

Address. Type the IP address part of the IP address and IP mask pair. The IP address and IP network mask pair specify the IP addresses contained in the address range. For example, the class B address range of X.X.X.X with a network mask of 255.255.0.0 includes all IP addresses from X.X.0.0 to X.X.255.255. Mask. Type the IP mask part of the IP address and IP mask pair. Advertise. Indicates whether the networks contained in the address range will be advertised or hidden from other areas.

Interface Configuration Press ENTER to review or configure the OSPF interface.

Port Name. Displays the name of the port for which the information is displayed. To select another port, press ENTER. A List of Lines window appears from which you can select the new port. Interface Enabled. Indicates whether OSPF routing is enabled on this interface. OSPF can be enabled on LAN and WAN ports of type LAN-toLAN. Area ID. The area to which this interface belongs. Metric. Indicates the cost of sending a packet on the interface, expressed in the link state metric. Router Dead Interval. The number of seconds to wait before the neighbors should declare the OSPF router down if they do not receive any hello packets from it.

300 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Transmit Delay. The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link State Update packet over this interface. Priority. Indicates the priority for the OSPF router to become the Designated Router on the connected interface. Hello Interval. The number of seconds between the hello packets sent on the interface by the OSPF router. Retransmit Interval. The number of seconds between link state advertisement transmissions. Authentication Type. The authentication scheme used on the attached network. The choices are Simple and None. Plain Text Password. The simple password to be used for the attached network.

301 RASExpress User Guide

User Setup

Select User Setup from the Main Menu to manage user profiles. A List of Users window appears from which you can select individual user profiles for editing, providing you have added users to the list. To edit a user profile, select a user name and perform one of the following actions.

Note: Because of the 640K memory limitation in DOS, the User Setup menu cannot be accessed while the network files are running. To unload the network files, from the C:\ prompt, type mtslsl -u . Alternately, reboot the server. When the message Starting MS-DOS appears, press F5 to bypass AUTOEXEC.BAT. Then change to the RASExpress directory and type rascon to start RASCON.

• To remove a selected user name from the List of Users window, press DELETE.

• To add a user name, press INSERT. The User Information window appears.

• To edit a user name, press ENTER. The User Information window appears. • To edit user permissions, press F2. The Access List menu appears. • To import user names from the network, press F3. The List of Servers appears.

User Information The User Information window displays basic information about the user.

User Name This field shows the name a remote user uses to log in to the RASExpress server. The user name may not duplicate any other user name. To change the name, select User Name and type a different name.

Password This field shows the password the user uses to log into the RASExpress server. The password is case-sensitive. It should be unique and easy for the user to remember. To

302 A Reinstalling RASExpress

change the password, select Password, type a different password, and press ENTER. You must then reenter the password correctly before it is accepted.

Remote User Enter Number Select On to indicate that the user is mobile. When the user calls into the RASExpress server, RASExpress prompts the user to type the user’s local telephone number. The server then disconnects and calls back the user at that number after the delay specified in the Call Back Delay field. If the Remote User Enter Number field is set to Off, you can enter a fixed callback number in the Call Back Number field. If the Remote User Enter Number is set to On, then the Call Back Number field is unavailable because the remote number is variable.

Call Back Number To enable callback security, type the user’s callback security phone number in this field. When the user calls in with a valid user name and password, the RASExpress server hangs up. Then, after the delay specified in the Call Back Delay field, the RASExpress server calls back the user at the callback number. This field is valid only if the Remote User Enter Number field is disabled by selecting Off.

Call Back Delay This field sets the time in seconds that must elapse before the RASExpress server calls back the remote user. This field is active only if the Remote User Enter Number field is set to On, or if a phone number has been entered in the Call Back Number field. To change the time, select Call Back Delay and type a different time.

Static IP Address The user’s static IP address. A value of 000.000.000.000 indicates no static address.

Number of Concurrent Logins The number of concurrent logins the user is permitted. A value of 0 indicates that there is no limit on the number of concurrent logins.

Note: For multilink connections, the number of concurrent logins permitted should be at least the number of links in the multilink bundle.

Press ESC when finished.

303 RASExpress User Guide

Access List To edit user permissions, select the user name and press F2. The Access List appears.

Mode Permissions Select Mode Permissions from the Access List. The Modes Permitted window appears.

The Modes Permitted window lists the types of connections the user is permitted to use. The options are Dial Out, Dial In Remote Node, Dial in Remote Control, Telnet, and Rlogin. If there are no modes listed in the Modes Permitted list, or if you want to add a mode that is not listed, press INSERT. The Add Permission window appears with any options that are not already on the Modes Permitted list. Select any mode in the list and press ENTER to add it to the Modes Permitted list. Press ESC to close the Add Permission list. To delete a line from the Modes Permitted list, select the line and press DELETE; the line will be deleted with no additional prompting. Press ESC to quit the Modes Permitted list.

Line Permissions Select Line Permissions from the Access Listto open the Lines Permitted window.

The Lines Permitted window lists the WAN ports the user is permitted to use. Press INSERT to add a port to the list. The Add Permission window appears. Select any port listed in the window and press ENTER to add it to the Lines Permitted list. If there are no more ports to add to the list, then the message All lines already allowed appears at the bottom of your screen. To delete a selected port from the Lines Permitted

304 A Reinstalling RASExpress

list, press DELETE; the port will be deleted with no additional prompting. Press ESC to quit the Lines Permitted list.

Protocol Permissions Select Protocol Permissions from the Access List. The Protocols Permitted window appears.

The Protocols Permitted window lists the network protocols the user is permitted to use If you would like to add to the list of protocols, press INSERT. The Add Permis- sion window appears. Select any protocol listed in the window and press ENTER to add it to the Protocols Permitted list. If there are no more protocols to add to the list, then the message All protocols already allowed appears at the bottom of your screen. To delete a protocol from the Protocols Permitted list, select it and press DELETE; the protocol will be deleted with no additional prompting. Press ESC to quit the Protocols Permitted list.

Time of Day Logins Select Time of Day Logins from the Access List. The Time of Day Logins Setup Window appears.

The Time of Day Logins Setup Window shows the times that the user is allowed to dial in or dial out. RASExpress divides the week into half-hour blocks, starting at midnight. A block indicates that the user is allowed to call during that half hour. A line indicates that the user is not allowed to call during that half hour. To change the permission of a time block, select it with the arrow keys and press the space bar. To save your changes, press ENTER. By default, the user is allowed to call at any time.

Connection Time Limit Select Connection Time Limits from the Access List. The Connection Time Limit window appears.

305 RASExpress User Guide

Use the Connection Time Limit window to limit how long the user can remain connected. A value of zero (the default) indicates no time limit. If the user exceeds the time limit shown in this window, the RASExpress server automatically disconnects the user. To save your changes, press ENTER.

Terminal Login Select Terminal Login from the Access List. The Auto Login Setup window appears.

Select Auto Login Protocol to choose which protocol will be used to automatically log in to a host computer. You can choose Telnet, Rlogin, or None. None disables auto login altogether. In Host Name, type the IP address of the host computer you want the user to automatically log in to.

Tunneling Select Tunneling from the Access List. The Tunneling window appears.

Select Tunnel Protocol to choose a tunneling protocol for the user. You can choose PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) or None, which disables tunneling altogether. In Tunnel Server IP Address, type the IP address of the tunnel server (this field is inactive if tunneling is disabled).

Communication Setup

Select Communication Setup from the Main Menu.

From the Communication Types menu, select the type of communications card you want to configure: Intelligent Serial Interface (ISI) (analog modem) or ISDN Primary Rate Interface.

306 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Intelligent Serial Interface (ISI) When you select Intelligent Serial Interface (ISI) from the Communication Types menu, the ISI Card Setup window appears. This window shows the base address, IRQ level, and number of ports for each installed ISI card. To edit a card setup, select the card and press ENTER.

The Board Information window appears. This window shows the base address, IRQ number, and number of ports for the selected modem card. To change one of these options, select the field and type a new value.

Note: Setting the wrong base address and IRQ value can lead to unpredictable results.

Base Address This is the base I/O address for the modem card in hexadecimal format. It provides the RASExpress server with information about card activity, and allows the card to use one interrupt for all ports on the card. Each card must have a unique base I/O address.

IRQ Number This is the IRQ number for the modem card. The IRQ number used for each modem card must be unique to the card. The IRQ requests the attention of RASExpress and the computer’s microprocessor.

Number of Ports This is the number of ports on the modem card.

Press ESC to return to the ISI Card Setup window. To add a new card to this window, press INSERT and enter the base address, IRQ number, and number of ports in the Board Information window. To remove an ISI card from the ISI Card Setup window, select the card and press DELETE.

307 RASExpress User Guide

Line Information To edit line information for an ISI card, select the card in the ISI Card Setup window and press F2. The List of Lines window that appears lists the physical ports, or lines, served by the RASExpress server. Select any line in the list and press F2 to test it, or ENTER to configure it. The Line Information window that appears lists the parameters that can be configured for the selected port. To edit a parameter, use the up and down arrow keys to select the parameter, then press ENTER and type the new value.

Line Status This field shows whether the port is enabled or disabled.

General Name This field describes the general name for the port. The general name is used by the workstation MCSI software to take the line.

Specific Name This field shows the specific name for the port. It identifies the port by modem card number, modem card type, and modem number.

Modem Name This field shows the model name of the modem that is connected to the port. To change the modem name, select Modem Name and press ENTER. When the List of Modems window appears, select the new modem name and press ENTER.

Connection Started By This field selects how the RASExpress server detects a dial-in connection. When the Modem Response option is selected, the server starts a dial-in connection when the modem responds with a CONNECT string. When the Data Carrier Detect option is selected, the server starts a dial-in connection when the DCD signal goes high.

Baud Rate This field selects the baud rate used to communicate with the port. You can select a rate up to 460800 bps.

Data Bits This field selects the number of data bits used by the port.

Stop Bits This field selects the number of stop bits used by the port.

Parity This field selects the type of parity used by the port.

308 A Reinstalling RASExpress

RTS/CTS Flow Control This field selects RTS/CTS hardware flow control on the port. The options are Enabled and Disabled.

ISDN Primary Rate Interface When you select ISDN Primary Rate Interface from the Communication Types menu, the ISDN Primary Rate Interface window appears.

Use the ISDN Primary Rate Interface window to modify settings for the RASExpress server’s ISDN PRI communication card. To change a setting, select the field and type a new value.

ISDN Primary Rate Interface Use this field to enable or disable ISDN PRI support by the RASExpress server. Enable it only if an ISDN PRI card is installed in the server

I/O Address This is the base I/O address for the PRI card in hexadecimal format. It provides the RASExpress server with information about card activity, and allows the card to use one interrupt for all 23 ports on the card. Only one PRI card can be used in a RAS- Express server. The I/O address must be unique.

IRQ Number This is the interrrupt (IRQ) number for the PRI card. The IRQ number must be unique to the card. The IRQ requests the attention of RASExpress and the server’s microprocessor.

Memory Address The PRI card shares memory with the RASExpress server for internal communication. Type the shared memory address in hexadecimal format in this field.

Number of Ports Select the number of ports available to the ISDN PRI card. In North America, 23 data channels are standard; in Europe 30 data channels are standard.

309 RASExpress User Guide

Modem Setup

Note: Because of the 640K memory limitation in DOS, the Modem Setup menu cannot be accessed while the network files are running. To unload the network files, from the C:\ prompt, type mtslsl -u . Alternately, reboot the server. When the message Starting MS-DOS appears, press F5 to bypass AUTOEXEC.BAT. Then change to the RASExpress directory and type rascon to start RASCON.

Select Modem Setup from the Main Menu. The List of Modems window appears. You can add a modem to this list, delete it, or modify the default settings of the modem. If your modem type is not listed, press INSERT and, when the Modem Information window appears, type your modem’s name.

Select the modem that you want to configure and press ENTER. The Modem Information window appears with the following options.

Modem Name Shows the model name of the modem. Enter a new modem name only if it is not listed in the List of Modems window.

Initializing String 1–5 These fields display the initialization string or strings used to configure the modem when power is applied or the modem is reset.

Caution: Changing preconfigured modem strings is not recommended. If you want to use a custom initialization string, create and name a new modem configuration. Then copy information from one of the listed modems and modify the string as required.

Dial Prefix This field displays the dial prefix, which is automatically sent to the modem before the phone number. The default prefix is the tone dialing command ATDT.

Dial Suffix This field displays the dial suffix, which is automatically sent to the modem after the phone number. This field is normally empty.

Hangup String This field displays the string used to end a call.

310 A Reinstalling RASExpress

NO CARRIER string, NO DIALTONE string, NO ANSWER string, Connect Response string, OK string, ERROR string, RING string, BUSY string These fields display the modem’s result codes, which are used by RASExpress to monitor calls. They should be spelled exactly the same as the modem sends them. By default, these fields are set for verbose responses. If your modem is set for terse responses, refer to the modem’s owner’s manual for information about the responses.

Filter Setup

Select Filter Setup from the Main Menu to add, edit, or delete a filter template. A filter template can be used to selectively forward or filter inbound and/or outbound packets. When you select Filter Setup, the List of Templates window appears:

To add a filter template to the list, press INSERT. To edit an existing filter template, select it and press ENTER. Both actions open the Filter Template Setup window, in which you can edit the filter template name, description, and pattern:

If you are adding a new filter template, type its name and description. To edit the filter template’s pattern list, press ENTER. If you are editing an existing filter template, a list of patterns appears:

311 RASExpress User Guide

To add a new pattern to the list, press INSERT. To edit an existing pattern, select it and press ENTER. Both actions open the Pattern Setup window, in which you can edit the filter pattern. The pattern options that appear depend on your selection; the following one is for an IP filter:

To change a pattern option, select it and press ENTER, and then select the appropriate option from the menu that appears, or type the appropriate number. When you are done, the filter template will automatically be saved and stored on the server. For more information about filter templates, see Appendix D, “Creating Filter Templates.”

312 A Reinstalling RASExpress

RASExpress Server

To start RASExpress Server, change to the directory in which you installed RASEx- press, the default being C:\RAS560. Then type RASEXP. The RASExpress Server main window that appears is your control center for the RASExpress server.

Line Name This column shows the names of the modem lines.

Type This column shows each line’s type, which can be RN, for remote node; IN, for inbound; or OUT, for outbound.

Status This column shows the status of each line, which can be WAITING FOR CALL, ON LINE, WAITING TO CALL, CALLING BACK, OUT OF SERVICE, INITIALIZING, or TELNET ON LINE.

User Name This column shows who is currently using the RASExpress server.

Connect Time This column shows the time at which the line connected.

Last Messages This box displays the most recent error messages and messages related to general usage.

313 RASExpress User Guide

Function Keys

There are two function keys that the system administrator can use while the RASExpress server is running: F1—Display online help. F2—Display the Options menu.

Options Menu

You must enter a password to access the Options menu, if you selected one during installation. However, the default is that no password is required. The following topics describe submenus that can be selected from the Options menu.

Server Information

Supervisor Password This field is disabled. To change the supervisor password, use General Setup in the RASExpress Server Configuration Utility (RASCON.EXE). See page 279.

Log Status Use this field to turn the call log on or off. The default is OFF. When ON is selected, RASExpress logs all calls for one hour in the file yyyymmdd.LOG, where yyyymmdd is the year, month, and date the log was created. The 24 saved logs for each date are given the extensions .L00–.L23. This is the only field that can be changed in this menu.

Write Error Messages to File When ON is selected, RASExpress saves all messages it receives into a message file. The default is OFF.

314 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Message File This field shows the name and path of the message file. The default file name is SERVER.MSG.

Screen Saver This field shows the status of the RASExpress screen saver.

Connection Manager Menu When this field is ON, the Connection Manager menu is displayed to a user calling into the RASExpress server for remote control operations. When it is OFF, the Host List is displayed to the user.

Command to MultiModemManager Select ON to have the RASExpress server send the LOGON user name to a Multi- ModemManager rack or PC. You can then determine, via the Call Status window in MultiCommManager, which users are dialing out.

Note: This option applies only to RNI08 and RNGCOM servers connected to MultiModemManager racks. It does not apply to MiniArray, MultiArray, or CommPlete servers.

User Information

Select a user name in the List of Users menu to make the User Information window appear. To add a user to the list, press INSERT. To delete a user, select it and press DELETE. By default the List of Users is empty.

User Information Window

User Name This field shows the name that the user will use to log into the RASExpress Server. The user name must be unique.

315 RASExpress User Guide

Password This field shows the password the user will use to log into the RASExpress server. The password is case-sensitive. It should be unique, and easy for the use to remember. To enter a new password, type the new password and press ENTER, then type it again to verify it.

Call Back Delay This field determines the length of time the RASExpress Server waits before calling back a user. The value entered in this field is only valid if a phone number has been entered in the previous field.

Static IP Address The user’s static IP address. A value of 000.000.000.000 indicates no static address.

Number of Concurrent Logins The number of concurrent logins the user is permitted. A value of 0 indicates that there is no limit on the number of concurrent logins.

Note: For multilink connections, the number of concurrent logins permitted should be at least the number of links in the multilink bundle.

Access List To edit user permissions, select the user name and press F2. The Access List appears.

316 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Mode Permissions Select Mode Permissions from the Access List. The Modes Permitted window appears.

The Modes Permitted window lists the types of connections the user is permitted to use. The options are Dial Out, Dial In Remote Node, Dial in Remote Control, Telnet, and Rlogin. If there are less than five modes listed in the Modes Permitted list, you can add a missing mode by pressing INSERT. The Add Permission window appears with a list of any options that are not already on the Modes Permitted list. Select any mode in the list and press ENTER to add it to the Modes Permitted list. Press ESC to close the Add Permission list. To delete a line from the Modes Permitted list, select the line and press DELETE; the line will be deleted with no additional prompting. Press ESC to quit the Modes Permitted list.

Line Permissions Select Line Permissions from the Access List. The Lines Permitted window appears.

The Lines Permitted window lists the WAN ports the user is permitted to use. Press INSERT to add to the list of lines. The Add Permission window appears. Select any line listed in the window and press ENTER to add it to the Lines Permitted list. If there are no more lines to add to the list, then the message All lines already allowed appears at the bottom of your screen. To delete a selected line from the Lines Permitted list, press DELETE; the line will be deleted with no additional prompting. Press ESC to quit the Lines Permitted list.

317 RASExpress User Guide

Protocol Permissions Select Protocol Permissions from the Access List. The Protocols Permitted window appears.

The Protocols Permitted window lists the network protocols the user is permitted to use. If you would like to add to the list of protocols, press INSERT. The Add Permis- sion window appears. Select any protocol listed in the window and press ENTER to add it to the Protocols Permitted list. If there are no more protocols to add to the list, then the message All protocols already allowed appears at the bottom of your screen. To delete a protocol from the Protocols Permitted list, select it and press DELETE; the protocol will be deleted with no additional prompting. Press ESC to quit the Protocols Permitted list.

Time of Day Logins Select Time of Day Logins from the Access List. The Time of Day Logins Setup Window appears.

The Time of Day Logins Setup Window shows the times that the user is allowed to dial in or dial out. RASExpress divides the week into half-hour blocks. A rectangle indicates that the user is allowed to call during that half hour. A line indicates that the user is not allowed to call during that half hour. To change the permission of a time block, select it with the arrow keys and press the space bar. To save your changes, press ENTER. By default, the user is allowed to call at any time.

Connection Time Limit Select Connection Time Limits from the Access List. The Connection Time Limit window appears.

Use the Connection Time Limit window to limit how long the user can remain connected. A value of zero indicates no time restriction. If the user exceeds the time limit shown in this window, the RASExpress server automatically disconnects the user. To save your changes, press ENTER. By default, the user has no time limit.

318 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Terminal Login Select Terminal Login from the Access List. The Auto Login Setup window appears.

Tunneling Select Tunneling from the Access List. The Tunneling Setup window appears.

Select Tunnel Protocol to choose a tunneling protocol for the user. You can choose PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) or None, which disables tunneling altogether. In Host Name, type the IP address of the tunnel server (this field is inactive if tunneling is disabled).

Serial Line Control

Disconnect Line Select this option to disconnect a line on the RASExpress server . When the Line Con- trol menu disappears, select the line that you would like to disconnect by using the up and down arrow keys or the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys, then press ENTER to disconnect it. Return to the Line Control menu by pressing ESC. If no line is connected, the Line Control menu will remain on the screen.

Reset Line Select this option to reset a line on the RASExpress server. When the Line Control menu disappears, select the line that you would like to reset by using the up and down arrow keys or the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys, then press ENTER. Return to the Line Control menu by pressing ESC.

Put Line Out of Service Select this option to take a line on the RASExpress server out of service. When the Line Control menu disappears, select the line that you would like to take out of service by using the up and down arrow keys or the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys, then press ENTER. Return to the Line Control menu by pressing ESC.

319 RASExpress User Guide

Enable Line Select this option to put a line back into service that has been taken out of service. When the Line Control menu disappears, select the line that you would like to enable by using the up and down arrow keys or the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys, then press ENTER. Return to the Line Control menu by pressing ESC.

Press ESC to return to the Options menu.

Shutdown Server

To shut down the RASExpress server, select Shutdown Server and answer Yes to the confirmation question.

Display Statistics To view the RASExpress server’s statistics, select Display Statistics from the Options menu. From the Statistics menu, select General Statistics, Router Statistics, or PPP Statistics.

General Statistics

The General Statistics screen displays current statistics for each active line. The Port Throughput columns display throughput activity (in bytes per second in near real- time) when sending and receiving data to and from the port. The Pending Bytes columns display the number of bytes that are waiting to be processed. The Total Bytes columns display the total number of bytes that have been sent to and received

320 A Reinstalling RASExpress from the port during the current connection. When the line is waiting for a call or is idle, all values in these columns are zero. Press ESC to return to the Statistics menu.

Router Statistics

The Router Statistics screen displays the number of IPX and IP packets sent or received for each active WAN port. Information is displayed only for remote node lines. For remote control connections, all values are zero. Press ESC to return to the Statistics menu.

PPP Statistics

Press ESC to return to the Options menu.

321 RASExpress User Guide

Display EIA Signals

Display Port Addresses

The Port Addresses screen displays the IPX and IP addresses for each of the RASEx- press server’s ports. The IPX Network Address is that of the remote node client connecting to the port. The IP Local Address is the IP address for the server side of the connection. The IP Remote Address is the IP address of the client. Note that these parameters are displayed only for remote node (PPP) connections. Press ESC to return to the Options menu.

Inbound User List Select Inbound User List to display a list of users waiting for a remote control session. Press ESC to return to the Options menu. If there are users waiting for a dial-in remote control session on the RASExpress server, then a list appears telling you who and how many users are waiting. If no users are waiting, a message appears that says so. This option applies only to remote control. The listed users are the logon names of users waiting to be taken over. These names would also be displayed in the Host List if you dialed in for a remote control session.

322 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Reset SBC Processors This option is no longer functional.

323 RASExpress User Guide

RASExpress Server Color Utility

To run the RASExpress Color Utility, change to the RAS560 directory (e.g., C:\RAS560) on the RASExpress server, and type SETCOLOR.

General Setup

This option creates settings that apply to all RASExpress windows. When you select General Setup, the following window appears, which displays the current settings.

Shade Windows Determines whether the windows have a shadow.

Beep on Entering/Exiting Windows Determines whether there should be a beep when a window is opened or closed.

Color for Active Window Border Sets the color for the border of the active window.

Press ESC to return to the Main Menu.

324 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Menu Color Setup

The Menu Color setup window configures the colors for RASExpress Server menus.

Color for Window Border Sets the border color of the menus in RASExpress.

Color for Window Background Sets the background color of the menus in RASExpress.

Color for Fields in Menu Sets the color of the fields in menus in RASExpress.

Color for Menu Bar Sets the color of the menu bars in RASExpress.

Press ESC to return to the Main Menu.

325 RASExpress User Guide

Form Color Setup

The Form Color setup window configures the colors for RASExpress forms.

Color for Window Border Sets the border color of the forms in RASExpress.

Color for Window Background Sets the background color of the forms in RASExpress.

Color for Labels in Form Sets the color of the labels in forms in RASExpress.

Color for Bar Cursor Sets the color of the bar cursors in forms in RASExpress.

Color for Fields in Form Sets the color of the fields in forms in RASExpress.

Press ESC to return to the Main Menu.

326 A Reinstalling RASExpress

Directory Color Setup

The Directory Color setup window configures the colors for RASExpress directories.

Color for Window Border Sets the border color of the directories in RASExpress.

Color for Window Background Sets the background color of the directories in RASExpress.

Color for Fields in Directory Sets the color of the fields in the directories in RASExpress.

Color for Bar Cursor Sets the color of the bar cursors in directories in RASExpress.

Color for Headers in Directory Sets the color of the headers in directories in RASExpress.

Press ESC to return to the Main Menu.

Press ESC to leave the Color Utility program. A window appears that asks if you want to save changes to disk. Select No or Yes and press ENTER, or press Y or N.

327 RASExpress User Guide

Appendix B Upgrading RASExpress

Introduction

As part of its continuing effort to improve its products and provide added value to its customers, Multi-Tech Systems from time to time releases upgraded versions of RASExpress. Because these upgrades can be installed through the Internet, you can upgrade all your RASExpress servers, wherever they might be, from a single workstation. RASExpress upgrades can be downloaded from the Multi-Tech Web site at http://www.multitech.com/SUPPORT/CommPlete4000/software.asp.

Before You Start

The entire installation can be accomplished from a workstation or personal computer with access to the Internet. Typically, it would be the workstation on which MultiManager is installed. Before you start, please make sure you have the following: • An FTP (File Transfer Protocol) or TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) file transfer program. This must be supplied by you. • FTP Server or TFTP Server in the Applications menu, as appropriate, is enabled on all servers that are to be updated.

How to Upgrade RASExpress

1. Download the RASExpress upgrade .EXE file from the Multi-Tech Web site or BBS. The file name includes the version number, e.g., 570UPGRADE.EXE. 2. Copy the upgrade file to the directory where the FTP or TFTP file transfer program is installed. 3. Change the name of the upgrade file to UPGRADE.EXE. 4. If necessary, ping the RASExpress server that is to be upgraded to make sure you have a good connection. 5. Using FTP or TFTP, transfer the compressed file to the server. In the following example, the TFTP syntax is tftp -b SourceFileName ServerIPAddress= DestinationFileName. The source file name is the name of the upgrade file. The destination file name is upgrade.exe. Example: tftp -b upgrade.exe 200.2.9.1=upgrade.exe. If you use TFTP, the compressed file is automatically placed in the RASExpress directory on the server. If you use an FTP program, you must specify the current RASExpress directory (e.g., C:\RAS560).

328 B Upgrading RASExpress

6. When the transfer is complete, use Telnet to access the server (see Chapter 3). The Telnet main menu now includes a fourth option:

Services provided by the telnet server [ 1] Dial out [ 2] Management of RASExpress server [ 3] Configuration of RASExpress server [ 4] Upgrade Server [Esc] Close the telnet session Enter your choice[1 to 4] :

7. Type 4 and press ENTER to select the fourth option, Upgrade Server. The following messages appear:

Enter your choice[1 to 4] : 4 [ESC] to go to previous menu Enter your upgrade key :

8. Type anything you like for the key, and then press ENTER. The connection is broken, and RASExpress is automatically upgraded. When RASExpress is upgraded, the file UPGRADE.LOG is created on the server in the RASExpress directory. This file contains details of the upgrade that can be reviewed using any ASCII text viewer, such as Notepad. 9. The upgrade is complete. To upgrade another RASExpress server, repeat steps 4–9.

329 RASExpress User Guide

Appendix C Telnet Commands

Introduction

You can select the Telnet interface for the RASExpress server to be either menu mode or command mode. This appendix documents the grammar and syntax of the commands and parameters used in Telnet command mode. Telnet commands are not case-sensitive. Command elements that appear in bold must be typed exactly as they appear. Elements that appear in italic are placeholders that must be replaced by actual information. Brackets [ ] enclose optional items. Braces { } enclose a set of choices from which you must choose only one; choices are separated by a vertical bar |. The equals sign = means “consists of,” and an ellipsis … indicates that an argument can be repeated. A superscripted number indicates a required number of repetitions (e.g., required number of digits).

Telnet Configuration Commands

General Commands

ServerName SET ServerName string GET ServerName The Set command requires a server reboot.

Password SET Password GET Password

LogStatus SET LogStatus {ENABLED|DISABLED} GETLogStatus

LogNumberOfDays SET LogNumberOfDays integer GET LogNumberOfDays

LogStartTime SET LogStartTime time GET LogStartTime

330 C Telnet Commands

LogStartDate SET LogStartDate date GET LogStartDate

MsgStatus SET MsgStatus {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET MsgStatus

ScreenSaver SET ScreenSaver {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET ScreenSaver

CntMgrMenu SET CntMgrMenu {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET CntMgrMenu

ComMdmMgr SET ComMdmMgr {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET ComMdmMgr

MsgFilename SET MsgFilename filename GET MsgFilename

MsgFileSize SET MsgFileSize filesize GET MsgFileSize

ServerTime SET ServerTime time GET ServerTime

Application Commands

All SET Application commands require a server reboot.

Application WEB SET Application WEB {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Application WEB

Application FTP SET Application FTP {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Application FTP

331 RASExpress User Guide

Application TFTP SET Application TFTP {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Application TFTP

Application RLOGIN SET Application RLOGIN {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Application RLOGIN

IP Commands

All SET IP commands require a server reboot.

IP RemoteAccess SET IP RemoteAccess {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET IP RemoteAccess

IP Address SET IP Address ipaddress GET IP Address

IP SubnetMask SET IP SubnetMask ipaddress GET IP SubnetMask

IP RIP SET IP RIP {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET IP RIP

IP AutoLearnDefaultGateway SET IP AutoLearnDefaultGateway {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET IP AutoLearnDefaultGateway

IP DefaultRoute SET IP DefaultRoute ipaddress GET IP DefaultRoute

IP PrimaryDNS SET IP PrimaryDNS ipaddress GET IP PrimaryDNS

IP SecondaryDNS SET IP SecondaryDNS ipaddress GET IP SecondaryDNS

332 C Telnet Commands

IP FrameType SET IP FrameType {TYPE_II|SNAP} GET IP FrameType

IP RemoteClientAddress SET IP RemoteClientAddress {DHCP|AddressPool|ConfigurePerPort|Radius} GET IP RemoteClientAddress

IP IncludeAddressPool SET IP IncludeAddressPool ipaddress - ipaddress GET IP IncludeAddressPool

IP ExcludeAddressPool SET IP ExcludeAddressPool {1|2} ipaddress - ipaddress GET IP ExcludeAddressPool {1|2}

IP DNSCachingServer SET IP DNSCachingServer {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET IP DNSCachingServer

IP StaticRoute Gateway SET IP StaticRoute address mask Gateway ipaddress GET IP StaticRoute address mask Gateway

IP StaticRoute Metric SET IP StaticRoute address mask Metric integer GET IP StaticRoute address mask Metric

IP StaticRoute ADD IP StaticRoute address mask gateway metric DELETE IP StaticRoute address mask

IPX Commands

All SET IPX commands require a server reboot.

IPX Remoteaccess SET IPX Remoteaccess {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET IPX Remoteaccess

IPX LearnNetworkNumbers SET IPX LearnNetworkNumbers {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET IPX LearnNetworkNumbers

333 RASExpress User Guide

IPX RouteNetbiosOverIPX SET IPX RouteNetbiosOverIPX {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET IPX RouteNetbiosOverIPX

IPX InternalNetworkNumber 8 SET IPX InternalNetworkNumber {hexdigit} GET IPX InternalNetworkNumber

IPX NetworkNumber 8 SET IPX NetworkNumber frametype {hexdigit} GET IPX NetworkNumber frametype

IPX Routing SET IPX Routing frametype {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET IPX Routing frametype

Multilink PPP Commands

The SET Multilink commands all require a server reboot.

MLPPP MultiLink SET MLPPP MultiLink {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET MLPPP MultiLink

MLPPP GroupEPD SET MLPPP GroupEPD integer GET MLPPP GroupEPD

MLPPP BundleServerIPAddress SET MLPPP BundleServerIPAddress ipaddress GET MLPPP BundleServerIPAddress

MLPPP BundleServerUDPPort SET MLPPP BundleServerUDPPort integer GET MLPPP BundleServerUDPPort

MAC Layer Commands

The SET MACLayer commands all require a server reboot.

MACLayer Bridging SET MACLayer Bridging {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET MACLayer Bridging

334 C Telnet Commands

MACLayer SpanningTree SET MACLayer SpanningTree {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET MACLayer SpanningTree

Telnet Commands

Telnet Administrator SET Telnet Administrator {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Telnet Administrator

Telnet Client SET Telnet Client {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Telnet Client

Telnet DialOut SET Telnet DialOut {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Telnet DialOut

Telnet AutoDialOut SET Telnet AutoDialOut {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Telnet AutoDialOut

Telnet AutoDialOutPortNumber SET Telnet AutoDialOutPortNumber integer GET Telnet AutoDialOutPortNumber The SET command requires a server reboot.

Telnet CommandLineTCPPortNumber SET TELNET CommandLineTCPPortNumber integer GET TELNET CommandLineTCPPortNumber The SET command requires a server reboot.

Telnet DiagnosticTCPPortNumber SET TELNET DiagnosticTCPPortNumber integer GET TELNET DiagnosticTCPPortNumber The SET command requires a server reboot.

Telnet MessageUpdatePortNumber SET TELNET MessageUpdatePortNumber integer GET TELNET MessageUpdatePortNumber The SET command requires a server reboot.

335 RASExpress User Guide

Telnet Interfacetype SET Telnet Interfacetype {MENU|COMMAND} GET Telnet Interfacetype

SNTP Commands

SNTP Client SET SNTP Client {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SNTP Client The SET command requires a server reboot.

SNTP ServerAddress SET SNTP ServerAddress ipaddress GET SNTP ServerAddress

SNTP TimeZone SET SNTP TimeZone string GET SNTP TimeZone

SNTP UTCoffset SET SNTP UTCoffset [+|-]hour:minute GET SNTP UTCoffset

SNTP DaylightSavings SET SNTP DaylightSavings {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SNTP DaylightSavings

SNTP DaylightOffset SET SNTP DaylightOffset integer GET SNTP DaylightOffset

SNTP Ordinal SET SNTP {Start|End} Ordinal ordinal GET SNTP {Start|End} Ordinal

SNTP WeekDay SET SNTP {Start|End} WeekDay dayofweek GET SNTP {Start|End} WeekDay

SNTP Month SET SNTP {Start|End} Month monthofyear GET SNTP {Start|End} Month

336 C Telnet Commands

SNTP Time SET SNTP {Start|End} Time time GET SNTP {Start|End} Time

SNMP Commands

SNMP Agent SET SNMP Agent {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SNMP Agent The SET command requires a server reboot.

SNMP TrapMgrCommunityName SET SNMP TrapMgrCommunityName string GET SNMP TrapMgrCommunityName

SNMP TrapMgrIPAddress SET SNMP TrapMgrIPAddress ipaddress GET SNMP TrapMgrIPAddress

SNMP TrapMgrPortNumber SET SNMP TrapMgrPortNumber integer GET SNMP TrapMgrPortNumber

SNMP CommunityName SET SNMP CommunityName {1|2} string GET SNMP CommunityName {1|2}

SNMP Permission SET SNMP Permission {1|2} {READONLY|READWRITE} GET SNMP Permission {1|2}

SNMP RebootRequiredTrap SET SNMP RebootRequiredTrap GET SNMP RebootRequiredTrap

SNMP Authentication SET SNMP Authentication {SimpleCommunityName|EncryptedNamePassword} GET SNMP Authentication

337 RASExpress User Guide

Security Commands

Security Protocol SET Security Protocol {LOCAL|RADIUS|TACACS} GET Security Protocol

Security Accounting SET Security Accounting {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Security Accounting

Security AllowOnServerFail SET Security AllowOnServerFail {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Security AllowOnServerFail

Security TACACSEncryption SET Security TACACSEncryption {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Security TACACSEncryption

Security SharedSecret SET Security SharedSecret GET Security SharedSecret

Security PrimaryServerAddress SET Security PrimaryServerAddress ipaddress GET Security PrimaryServerAddress

Security BackupServerAddress SET Security BackupServerAddress {1|2|3} ipaddress GET Security BackupServerAddress {1|2|3}

Security CallBackDelay SET Security CallBackDelay integer GET Security CallBackDelay

Security RemoteUserNumber SET Security RemoteUserNumber integer GET Security RemoteUserNumber

Security ProtocolPermission SET Security ProtocolPermission integer GET Security ProtocolPermission

Security ShellUserServiceType SET Security ShellUserServiceType integer GET Security ShellUserServiceType

338 C Telnet Commands

Security InboundUserServiceType SET Security InboundUserServiceType integer GET Security InboundUserServiceType

Security RAR SET Security RAR {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET Security RAR Enables or disables retransmissions of accounting records. The default is DISABLED. This parameter is not saved in the configuration file, so every time the server reboots the value returns to DISABLED.

PPP Commands

PPP Slip SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] Slip {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] Slip

PPP DataCompression SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] DataCompression {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] DataCompression The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP DialOnDemand SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] DialOnDemand {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] DialOnDemand The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP LogConnectionTrace SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] LogConnectionTrace {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] LogConnectionTrace The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP IPXCP SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] IPXCP {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] IPXCP The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP IPCP SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] IPCP {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] IPCP The SET command requires a server reboot.

339 RASExpress User Guide

PPP BCP SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] BCP {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] BCP The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP CIPXCompression SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] CIPXCompression {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] CIPXCompression The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP VJCompression SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] VJCompression {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] VJCompression The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP ForwardBroadcast SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] ForwardBroadcast {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] ForwardBroadcast The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP NetbiosOverIPX SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] NetbiosOverIPX {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] NetbiosOverIPX The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP NetworkNumber 8 SET PPP wan_virtual_port NetworkNumber {hexdigit} GET PPP wan_virtual_port NetworkNumber The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP NodeNumber 12 SET PPP wan_virtual_port NodeNumber {hexdigit} GET PPP wan_virtual_port NodeNumber The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP LocalAddress SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] LocalAddress ipaddress GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] LocalAddress The SET command requires a server reboot.

340 C Telnet Commands

PPP RemoteAddress SET PPP wan_virtual_port RemoteAddress ipaddress GET PPP wan_virtual_port RemoteAddress The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP SubnetMask SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] SubnetMask ipaddress GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] SubnetMask The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP PortType SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] PortType {Client_To_Lan|Lan_To_Lan} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] PortType The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP MRU SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] MRU mrurange GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] MRU The SET command requires a server reboot.

PPP Username SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] Username username GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] Username

PPP UserPassword SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] UserPassword GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] UserPassword

PPP ACCM 8 SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] ACCM {hexdigit} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] ACCM

PPP AuthenticationProtocol SET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] AuthenticationProtocol {PAP|CHAP|NONE} GET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] AuthenticationProtocol

341 RASExpress User Guide

ISI Commands

ADD ISI ADD ISI baseaddress irqnumber {8|16} Requires a server reboot.

DELETE ISI DELETE ISI cardno Requires a server reboot.

LIST ISI LIST ISI

FLASH ISI FLASH ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] FileName [-b]

ISI LineStatus SET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] LineStatus {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] LineStatus The SET command requires a server reboot.

ISI GeneralName SET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] GeneralName string GET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] GeneralName The SET command requires a server reboot.

ISI SpecificName SET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] SpecificName string GET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] SpecificName The SET command requires a server reboot.

ISI ModemName SET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] ModemName modemname GET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] ModemName

ISI ConStartedby SET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] ConStartedby {ModemResponse|DCD} GET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] ConStartedby

ISI Baud SET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] Baud baudrate GET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] Baud

342 C Telnet Commands

ISI Data SET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] Data {5|6|7|8} GET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] Data

ISI Stop SET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] Stop {1|2} GET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] Stop

ISI Parity SET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] Parity {NONE|ODD|EVEN} GET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] Parity

ISI FlowControl SET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] FlowControl {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET ISI [Cardno_range [Lineno_range]] FlowControl

ISI BaseAddress SET ISI Cardno BaseAddress baseaddress GET ISI [Cardno_range] BaseAddress The SET command requires a server reboot.

ISI IRQ SET ISI Cardno IRQ irqnumber GET ISI [Cardno_range] IRQ The SET command requires a server reboot.

ISI NumberOfPorts SET ISI Cardno NumberOfPorts {8|16} GET ISI [Cardno_range] NumberOfPorts The SET command requires a server reboot.

343 RASExpress User Guide

ISDN Commands

ISDN PRI SET ISDN PRI {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET ISDN PRI The SET command requires a server reboot.

ISDN IOAddress SET ISDN IOAddress {0x100—0x3FF} GET ISDN IOAddress The SET command requires a server reboot.

ISDN IRQNumber SET ISDN IRQNumber irqnumber GET ISDN IRQNumber The SET command requires a server reboot.

ISDN MemoryAddress SET ISDN MemoryAddress {hexdigit …} GET ISDN MemoryAddress The SET command requires a server reboot.

ISDN NoOfPorts SET ISDN NoOfPorts {23|30} GET ISDN NoOfPorts The SET command requires a server reboot.

Trace ISDN Trace ISDN // Dumps the PRI 64k trace.

344 C Telnet Commands

Virtual Port Commands

VirtualPort IdleTimeOut SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] IdleTimeOut integer GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] IdleTimeOut

VirtualPort SessionTimeOut SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] SessionTimeOut integer GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] SessionTimeOut

VirtualPort PPPDetect SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] PPPDetect {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] PPPDetect

VirtualPort AutologinProtocol SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] AutologinProtocol {NONE|RLOGIN|TELNET} GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] AutologinProtocol

VirtualPort AutoLoginAddress SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] AutoLoginAddress string GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] AutoLoginAddress

VirtualPort TunnelingProtocol SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] TunnelingProtocol {NONE|PPTP} GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] TunnelingProtocol

VirtualPort TunnelServerAddress SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] TunnelServerAddress string GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] TunnelServerAddress

VirtualPort FilterTemplateName SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] FilterTemplateName string GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] FilterTemplateName The SET command requires a server reboot.

VirtualPort DialType SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] DialType {ANALOG|ISDN} GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] DialType The SET command requires a server reboot.

VirtualPort ConnectType SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] ConnectType {ANSWERING|DIALING} GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] ConnectType The SET command requires a server reboot.

345 RASExpress User Guide

VirtualPort TelephoneNumber SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] TelephoneNumber integer GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] TelephoneNumber

VirtualPort ScriptFileName SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] ScriptFileName integer GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] ScriptFileName

VirtualPort BundledPort SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] BundledPort [wan_virtual_port] GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] BundledPort

VirtualPort BundlingEnabled SET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] BundlingEnabled {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET VirtualPort [wan_virtual_port_range] BundlingEnabled

Physical Port Commands

PhysicalPort RawTCPConnection SET PhysicalPort [analog_port_range] RawTCPConnection {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PhysicalPort [analog_port_range] RawTCPConnection

PhysicalPort AutoDialOut SET PhysicalPort [analog_port_range] AutoDialOut {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PhysicalPort [analog_port_range] AutoDialOut The SET command requires a server reboot.

PhysicalPort TcpPortNumber SET PhysicalPort [analog_port_range] TcpPortNumber integer GET PhysicalPort [analog_port_range] TcpPortNumber The SET command requires a server reboot.

PhysicalPort MonitorCD SET PhysicalPort [analog_port_range] MonitorCD {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET PhysicalPort [analog_port_range] MonitorCD

346 C Telnet Commands

SMTP Commands

LIST SMTP LIST SMTP

ADD SMTP ADD SMTP string

DELETE SMTP DELETE SMTP string

SMTP Client SET SMTP Client {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SMTP Client

SMTP ServerAddress SET SMTP ServerAddress ipaddress GET SMTP ServerAddress

SMTP SenderEmailId SET SMTP SenderEmailId string GET SMTP SenderEmailId

SMTP MessageFull SET SMTP MessageFull {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SMTP MessageFull

SMTP LogFull SET SMTP LogFull {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SMTP LogFull

SMTP DebugLogFull SET SMTP DebugLogFull {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SMTP DebugLogFull

SMTP ServerUpgrade SET SMTP ServerUpgrade {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SMTP ServerUpgrade

SMTP ATCommandExecution SET SMTP ATCommandExecution {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SMTP ATCommandExecution

347 RASExpress User Guide

SMTP RasAlive SET SMTP RasAlive {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SMTP RasAlive

SMTP ServerCrash SET SMTP ServerCrash {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SMTP ServerCrash Enables or disables sending of e-mail if the server crashes with a core dump. Sends the e-mail to the internal recipient name.

SMTP ISIReload SET SMTP ISIReload {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SMTP ISIReload Enables or disables sending of e-mail if the server reloads firmware on an ISI card.

SMTP SecurityDead SET SMTP SecurityDead {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET SMTP SecurityDead Enables or disables sending of e-mail if the server is unable to talk to the RADIUS server.

SMTP IntRecipient SET SMTP IntRecipient string GET SMTP IntRecipient Gets or sets the internal recipient e-mail address. Only this recipient receives the Core file mail.

Statistics Commands

Summary SHOW Summary RESET Summary

Version SHOW Version

LogStartTime SHOW LogStartTime

LogStopTime SHOW LogStopTime

348 C Telnet Commands

LogTimeLeft SHOW LogTimeLeft

GenStatistics SHOW GenStatistics RESET GenStatistics [real_port_range]

IP ARP SHOW IP ARP

IP General SHOW IP General

IP ICMP SHOW IP ICMP

IP RIP SHOW IP RIP

IP UDP SHOW IP UDP

IP TCP SHOW IP TCP

IP RoutingTable SHOW IP RoutingTable

IPX RoutingTable SHOW IPX RoutingTable

IPX SAPTable SHOW IPX SAPTable

LineStatistics SHOW LineStatistics [real_port_range] RESET LineStatistics [real_port_range]

PPP SHOW PPP [wan_virtual_port_range] RESET PPP [wan_virtual_port_range]

349 RASExpress User Guide

IPStat SHOW IPStat [virtual_port_range] RESET IPStat [virtual_port_range]

IPXStat SHOW IPXStat [virtual_port_range] RESET IPXStat [virtual_port_range]

DialIn SHOW DialIn

DialOut SHOW DialOut

LineUsageStatistics SHOW LineUsageStatistics

Address SHOW Address

EIA SHOW EIA

InboundList SHOW InboundList

ConnectStringTable SHOW ConnectStringTable

LineInformation SHOW LineInformation

CallHistory SHOW CallHistory [real_port_range]

LineUtilization SHOW LineUtilization [analog_port_range]

IP TCPConnectionTable SHOW IP TCPConnectionTable

BondingTable SHOW BondingTable

350 C Telnet Commands

Server Commands

LOCK LOCK

UNLOCK UNLOCK

REBOOT REBOOT

RESTART RESTART

Line Commands

DISABLE DISABLE [analog_port_range]

DISCONNECT DISCONNECT [real_port_range]

ENABLE ENABLE [analog_port_range]

RESET RESET [analog_port_range]

UPGRADE UPGRADE key

351 RASExpress User Guide

User Commands

ADD User ADD User username

DELETE User DELETE User username

LIST User LIST User [username]

User Password SET User username Password GET User username Password

User RemoteUserNumber SET User username RemoteUserNumber {ON|OFF} GET User username RemoteUserNumber

User CallBackNumber SET User username CallBackNumber integer GET User username CallBackNumber

User CallBackDelay SET User username CallBackDelay integer GET User username CallBackDelay

User LinePermission SET User username LinePermission {+|-}wan_virtual_port_range GET User username LinePermission

User ModePermission SET User username ModePermission modepermission GET User username ModePermission

User ProtocolPermission SET User username ProtocolPermission protocolpermission GET User username ProtocolPermission

User ConTimelimit SET User username ConTimelimit integer GET User username ConTimelimit

352 C Telnet Commands

User TDL SET User username TDL {+|-}dayofweek_range slot_range GET User username TDL

User AutoLoginProtocol SET User username AutoLoginProtocol {NONE|TELNET|RLOGIN} GET User username AutoLoginProtocol

User LoginHostName SET User username LoginHostName ipaddress GET User username LoginHostName

User TunnelingProtocol SET User username TunnelingProtocol {NONE|PPTP} GET User username TunnelingProtocol

User TunnelServerAddress SET User username TunnelServerAddress string GET User username TunnelServerAddress

User ConcurrentLogins SET User username ConcurrentLogins integer GET User username ConcurrentLogins

User StaticIPAddress SET User username StaticIPAddress ipaddress GET User username StaticIPAddress

Administrator Commands

ADD RasAdmin ADD RasAdmin username

DELETE RasAdmin DELETE RasAdmin username

LIST RasAdmin LIST RasAdmin [username]

RasAdmin Password SET RasAdmin username Password GET RasAdmin username Password

353 RASExpress User Guide

RasAdmin Permissions SET RasAdmin username Permissions {+|-}admin_permissions GET RasAdmin username Permissions

Modem Commands

ADD Modem ADD Modem modemname

DELETE Modem DELETE Modem modemname

LIST Modem LIST Modem [modemname]

Modem InitStr SET Modem modemname InitStr {1|2|3|4|5} string GET Modem modemname InitStr {1|2|3|4|5}

Modem DialPrefix SET Modem modemname DialPrefix string GET Modem modemname DialPrefix

Modem DialSuffix SET Modem modemname DialSuffix string GET Modem modemname DialSuffix

Modem HangupStr SET Modem modemname HangupStr string GET Modem modemname HangupStr

Modem NoCarrierStr SET Modem modemname NoCarrierStr string GET Modem modemname NoCarrierStr

Modem NoAnswwerStr SET Modem modemname NoAnswwerStr string GET Modem modemname NoAnswwerStr

Modem ConnectResponseStr SET Modem modemname ConnectResponseStr string GET Modem modemname ConnectResponseStr

354 C Telnet Commands

Modem OkStr SET Modem modemname OkStr string GET Modem modemname OkStr

Modem ErrStr SET Modem modemname ErrStr string GET Modem modemname ErrStr

Modem RingStr SET Modem modemname RingStr string GET Modem modemname RingStr

Modem BusyStr SET Modem modemname BusyStr string GET Modem modemname BusyStr

OSPF Commands

OSPF Routing SET OSPF Routing {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET OSPF Routing The SET command requires a server reboot.

OSPF RouterID SET OSPF RouterID router_id GET OSPF RouterID The SET command requires a server reboot.

ADD OSPF Area ADD OSPF Area area_id Requires a server reboot.

DELETE OSPF Area DELETE OSPF Area area_id Requires a server reboot.

LIST OSPF Area LIST OSPF Area

OSPF Area StubArea SET OSPF Area area_id StubArea {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET OSPF Area area_id StubArea The SET command requires a server reboot.

355 RASExpress User Guide

OSPF Area InjectDefaultRoute SET OSPF Area area_id InjectDefaultRoute {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET OSPF Area area_id InjectDefaultRoute The SET command requires a server reboot.

OSPF Area StubMetric SET OSPF Area area_id StubMetric integer GET OSPF Area area_id StubMetric The SET command requires a server reboot.

ADD OSPF Range ADD OSPF Range area_id address mask Requires a server reboot.

DELETE OSPF Range DELETE OSPF Range area_id address mask Requires a server reboot.

LIST OSPF Range LIST OSPF Range area_id

OSPF Range Status SET OSPF Range area_id address mask Status {ADVERTISE|DONOTVERTISE} GET OSPF Range area_id address mask Status The SET command requires a server reboot.

OSPF Port InterfaceEnabled SET OSPF Port virtual_port_range InterfaceEnabled {ENABLED|DISABLED} GET OSPF Port virtual_port_range InterfaceEnabled The SET command requires a server reboot.

OSPF Port AreaId SET OSPF Port virtual_port_range AreaId area_id GET OSPF Port virtual_port_range AreaId The SET command requires a server reboot.

OSPF Port Metric SET OSPF Port virtual_port_range Metric integer GET OSPF Port virtual_port_range Metric The SET command requires a server reboot.

356 C Telnet Commands

OSPF Port RouterDeadInterval SET OSPF Port virtual_port_range RouterDeadInterval integer GET OSPF Port virtual_port_range RouterDeadInterval

OSPF Port TransmitDelay SET OSPF Port virtual_port_range TransmitDelay integer GET OSPF Port virtual_port_range TransmitDelay

OSPF Port HelloInterval SET OSPF Port virtual_port_range HelloInterval integer GET OSPF Port virtual_port_range HelloInterval

OSPF Port Priority SET OSPF Port virtual_port_range Priority integer GET OSPF Port virtual_port_range Priority

OSPF Port RetransmitInterval SET OSPF Port virtual_port_range RetransmitInterval integer GET OSPF Port virtual_port_range RetransmitInterval

OSPF Port Authentication SET OSPF Port virtual_port_range Authentication {NONE|SIMPLE} GET OSPF Port virtual_port_range Authentication

OSPF Port PlainTextPassword SET OSPF Port virtual_port_range PlainTextPassword GET OSPF Port virtual_port_range PlainTextPassword

Filter Commands

LIST Filters LIST Filters

LIST FiltPattern LIST FiltPattern [filtername]

ADD Filter ADD Filter filtername filterdescription

ADD FiltPattern ADD FiltPattern filtername pattern_lists

357 RASExpress User Guide

DELETE Filter DELETE Filter filtername

DELETE FiltPattern DELETE FiltPattern filtername [pattern_list]

Filter FilterDescription SET Filter filtername FilterDescription string GET Filter filtername FilterDescription

FiltPattern Usage SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index usage usage_type GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index usage

FiltPattern Action SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index action action_type GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index action

FiltPattern src_addr_mask SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_addr_mask ipaddress GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_addr_mask

FiltPattern src_addr_result SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_addr_result ipaddress GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_addr_result

FiltPattern dst_addr_mask SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_addr_mask ipaddress GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_addr_mask

FiltPattern dst_addr_result SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_addr_result ipaddress GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_addr_result

FiltPattern protocol SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index protocol protocol_type GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index protocol

FiltPattern src_port_begin SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_port_begin integer GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_port_begin

FiltPattern src_port_end SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_port_end integer GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_port_end

358 C Telnet Commands

FiltPattern dst_port_begin SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_port_begin integer GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_port_begin

FiltPattern dst_port_end SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_port_end integer GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_port_end

FiltPattern operation SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index operation operation_type GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index operation

FiltPattern src_net_mask 4 SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_net_mask hexdigit GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_net_mask

FiltPattern src_net_result 4 SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_net_result hexdigit GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_net_result

FiltPattern src_node_mask 6 SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_node_mask hexdigit GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_node_mask

FiltPattern src_node_result 6 SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_node_result hexdigit GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_node_result

FiltPattern src_socket_begin SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_socket_begin integer GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_socket_begin

FiltPattern src_socket_end SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_socket_end integer GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index src_socket_end

FiltPattern dst_net_mask 4 SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_net_mask hexdigit GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_net_mask

FiltPattern dst_net_result 4 SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_net_result hexdigit GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_net_result

359 RASExpress User Guide

FiltPattern dst_node_mask 6 SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_node_mask hexdigit GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_node_mask

FiltPattern dst_node_result 6 SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_node_result hexdigit GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_node_result

FiltPattern dst_socket_begin SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_socket_begin integer GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_socket_begin

FiltPattern dst_socket_end SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_socket_end integer GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index dst_socket_end

FiltPattern offset SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index offset integer GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index offset

FiltPattern length SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index length integer GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index length

FiltPattern mask SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index mask hexdigit[hexdigit] GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index mask

FiltPattern value SET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index value hexdigit[hexdigit] GET FiltPattern filtername pattern_index value

360 C Telnet Commands

Miscellaneous Commands

DebugLevel SET DebugLevel {0—3} GET DebugLevel Changes the debug level.

MsgFileSize SET MsgFileSize {1—1024} GET MsgFileSize Sets the size of the message file in units of 1 KB. The maximum debug file size is 1 MB (1024×1024). The default is 100 KB. This parameter is not saved in the configuration file, so every time the server reboots the file size returns to 100K.

Memory SET Memory [selector]:offset count data GET Memory [selector]:offset count Dumps the selected memory location.

Ping Ping hostname [-c count] [-s size] [-t timeout]

At At [date] time [Repeat timer] command Sets a Telnet command to start at a specified date and time.

LIST At LIST At Lists current At commands.

DELETE At DELETE At command_no Deletes a specific At command. The command number is found by using the LIST At command.

LIST ConfigFile LIST ConfigFile [filename]

SET ConfigFile SET ConfigFile [filename]

361 RASExpress User Guide

Variable Definitions

baudrate = {150|300|600|1200|2400|4800|9600|19200|38400|57600|115200| 230400|460800} frametype = {TYPE_II|SNAP|802.2|802.3} mrurange = {0–1534} hexdigit = {0–9|A–F|a–f} 3 baseaddress = hexdigit irqnumber = {2–5|7|9–12|15} char = {a–z|A–Z|0–9} string = char… filename = string filesize = {1–1024} // The unit is 1024 bytes (1K) username = string modemname = string integer = {0–9}… Lineno = integer Lineno_range = Lineno[,Lineno…|-Lineno] // The range of lines on an ISI card. cardno = integer Cardno_range = cardno[,cardno…|-cardno] // The range of ISI cards. wan_virtual_port = integer virtual_port = integer analog_port = integer real_port = integer wan_virtual_port_range = wan_virtual_port [,wan_virtual_port…|- wan_virtual_port] // The range of virtual WAN ports. virtual_port_range = virtual_port [,virtual_port…|-virtual_port] // The range of the virtual LAN port and the virtual WAN ports. analog_port_range = analog_port [,analog_port…|-analog_port] // The range of ISI ports. real_port_range = real_port [,real_port…|-real_port] // The range of ISI and ISDN ports. dayofweek = {Sunday|Monday|Tuesday|Wednesday|Thursday|Friday|Saturday} monthofyear = {January|February|March|April|May|June|July|August| September|October|November|December} ordinal = {First|Second|Third|Fourth|Last} days = integer

3 Three digits.

362 C Telnet Commands day = {0–31} month = {0–12} year = {1980–2099} hour = {0–23} minutes = {0–59} seconds = {0–59} time = hour:minute:second duration = days:hours:minutes:seconds date = day-month-year timeout = integer size = integer count = integer timer = integer command_no = integer ipadd = {0–255} ipaddress = ipadd.ipadd.ipadd.ipadd router_id = ipaddress area_id = ipaddress address = ipaddress mask = ipaddress modepermission = mode… mode = {+|-}{Dialout|DialinRemoteNode|DialinRemoteControl|Telnet|Rlogin} protocolpermission = protocol… protocol = {+|-}{IP|IPX|STP} adminpermissions = {management|configuration} dayofweek_range = dayofweek[,dayofweek…|-dayofweek] slot_range = slot[,slot…|-slot] slot = {1–48} // The day is divided into 48 slots of 30 minutes each, beginning at midnight. protocol_type = {TCP|UDP|integer} operation_type = {none |and|or|invert} action_type = {forward|filter} usage_type = {none|input|output|input_output} filtername = string filterdescription = string pattern_list = pattern[;pattern…]

363 RASExpress User Guide

pattern = {generic_pattern|ip_pattern|ipx_pattern} generic_pattern = generic,usage_type,action_type[,Offset=integer],Length=integer, Mask=hex_string,Value=hex_string,operation=operation_type ip_pattern = IP,usage_type,action_type[,SrcAddrMask=ipaddress][,SrcAddrResult=ipaddress] [,DstAddrMask=ipaddress][,DstAddrResult=ipaddress],Protocol=protocol [,SrcPort=integer[integer…]][,DstPort=integer[integer…]],operation=operation_type ipx_pattern = IPX,usage_type,action_type[,SrcNetMask=net_address][,SrcNetResult=net_address] [,SrcNodeMask=node_address][,SrcNodeResult=node_address][,SrcSocket=integer [integer…]][,DstNetMask=net_address][,DstNetResult=net_address] [,DstNodeMask=node_address][,DstNodeResult=node_address][,DstSocket=integer [integer…]],operation=operation_type net_address = hexdigit4 node_address = hexdigit6 hex_string = hexdigit[hexdigit…] pattern_index = integer // Index number of pattern from the LIST FiltPattern command results. command = string // Telnet command. command_no = integer // Index number of command from the LIST At command results.

364 D Creating Filter Templates

Appendix D Creating Filter Templates

Introduction

A filter template (also simply called a filter) can be used to selectively forward or filter inbound and/or outbound packets. It can be associated with either a user or a port; however, a filter associated with a user overrides a filter associated with a port. When a filter is associated with a user or port, all packets are compared with the filter patterns in the filter; if there is a match, the specified action is taken. In the absence of a user or port filter, all packets are forwarded. Filter templates are stored in the FILTER.INI file on the RASExpress server. A filter template is composed of ASCII text consisting of a filter name, a description, and a pattern list. The filter name should uniquely identify the template. The description is a text string that describes the purpose of the filter in plain language. The pattern list consists of one or more patterns separated by semicolons. A colon is required at the end of a template to separate it from the next template in the file. You can use any text editor to write a filter template. You must then FTP the edited FILTER.INI file to the RASExpress server. As an alternative to writing the file manually, you can select the filter requirements in the Filter Setup dialog boxes and menus provided in the RASExpress and MultiManager configuration utilities. The utilities then write the file with the appropriate grammar and FTP it to the RASExpress server.

Patterns

Patterns are applied in the order they are written. The first pattern decides the default action. If the Action parameter of the first pattern is filter, then packets that match the pattern are filtered and packets that do not match the pattern are forwarded. If the Action parameter of the first pattern is forward, then packets that match the pattern are forwarded and packets that do not match the pattern are filtered. If the Usage parameter is set to none, the filter is not used. If it is set to input, the filter is applied only to the input stream. If it is set to output, the filter is applied only to the output stream. If it is set to input_output, the filter is applied to both the input and the output streams. There are three types of patterns: Generic, IP, and IPX, each of which has a different definition. Each consists of a list of required parameters separated by commas, which together define the match that is is being looked for and the type of packet in which the match is being sought. Generic Pattern: The Generic pattern applies the Mask parameter at the Offset parameter for Length parameter bytes to the raw data packet from the address header, and checks to see if it matches the Result parameter. If it matches, it is successful, else it is not successful. The Generic pattern is used only on bridging ports. IP Pattern: The IP pattern applies the SrcAddrMask parameter to the source address and the DstAddrMask parameter to the destination address, and compares them with

365 RASExpress User Guide

the SrcAddrResult and DstAddrResult parameters respectively. An equality check with the Protocol, SrcPort, and DstPort parameters is also done. If any of these fields is set to zero, it is not included in the check. IPX Pattern: The IPX pattern applies a check similar to the IP pattern. The Operation parameter uses logical operators to extend the check to more than one pattern. If it is set to none, no further check is done for the following patterns in the list. If it is set to invert, the result of the check is logically negated to decide the action to be taken. If it is set to and or or, the result of the check is logically ANDed or ORed with that of the next pattern. The evaluation is carried out in the order in which the patterns are specified. This field is optional, and if it is not provided, a default value of or is assumed. For all the optional parameters a default value of 0 is assumed and hence is not included in the comparison. Also, for the port addresses and the socket addresses, one number or a range of numbers is allowed.

Definitions

The following list defines the grammar and syntax of the filter template, its patterns, and its parameters. Filter elements that appear in bold must be typed exactly as they appear. Elements that appear in italic are placeholders that must be replaced by actual information. Brackets [ ] enclose optional items. Braces { } enclose a set of choices from which you must choose only one; choices are separated by a vertical bar |. The characters ::= mean “consists of,” and an ellipsis … indicates that an argument can be repeated. A superscripted number indicates a required number of repetitions.

Template ::= Filter_Name,Description,Pattern_List: Description ::= “An ASCII string of no more than 80 characters that describes the template” Pattern_List ::= Pattern[;Pattern…] Pattern ::= {Generic_Pattern|IP_Pattern|IPX_Pattern} Generic_Pattern ::= generic,Usage,Action[,Offset=integer],Length=integer, Mask=hex_string,Value=hex_string,operation=Operation IP_Pattern ::= IP,Usage,Action[,SrcAddrMask=ip_address][,SrcAddrResult= ip_address][,DstAddrMask=ip_address][,DstAddrResult= ip_address],Protocol=Protocol[,SrcPort= integer[integer…]][,DstPort=integer[integer…]],operation= Operation IPX_Pattern ::= IPX,Usage,Action[,SrcNetMask=net_address][,SrcNetResult= net_address][,SrcNodeMask=node_address][,SrcNodeResult= node_address][,SrcSocket=integer[integer…]][,DstNetMask= net_address][,DstNetResult=net_address][,DstNodeMask= node_address][,DstNodeResult=node_address][,DstSocket= integer[integer…]],operation=Operation Usage ::= {none|input|output|input_output} Action ::= {forward|filter} Operation ::= {none|and|or|invert}

366 D Creating Filter Templates

Protocol ::= {TCP|UDP|integer} hex_string ::= hex_digit[hex_digit…] hex_digit ::= {0–9|a–f|A–F} ip_address ::= dec_number.dec_number.dec_number.dec_number dec_number ::= 0–9[0–9[0–9]] integer ::= 0–9[0–9…] net_address ::= {hex_digit}4 node_address ::= {hex_digit}6

Examples

Example 1: Filters all SNMP traffic between a manager and an agent. The manager address is 200.200.150.120 and the agent address is 200.200.150.110. There are two patterns used in the pattern list, the first one for the packets from the manager to the agent, and the second one for the packets from the agent to the manager. The first pattern has or as the operation, whereas it is set to none in the second pattern. Filter_SNMP=“Filter SNMP packets”,IP,input,filter, SrcAddrMask=255.255.255.255,SrcAddrResult=200.200.150.120, DstAddrMask=255.255.255.255,DstAddrResult=200.200.150.110, Protocol=UDP,SrcPort=0,DstPort=161,operation=or; IP,input,filter,SrcAddrMask=255.255.255.255, SrcAddrResult=200.200.150.110,DstAddrMask=255.255.255.255, DstAddrResult=200.200.150.120,Protocol=UDP,SrcPort=161,DstPort=0, operation=none:

Example 2: Filters all Web traffic between a browser and a Web server. The Web server address is 200.200.150.120 and the browser address is 200.200.150.110. There are two patterns used in the pattern list, the first one for the packets from the server to the browser, and the second one for the packets from the browser to the server. Filter_Web=“Filter Web packets”,IP,input,filter, SrcAddrMask=255.255.255.255,SrcAddrResult=200.200.150.120, DstAddrMask=255.255.255.255,DstAddrResult=200.200.150.110, Protocol=TCP,SrcPort=80,DstPort=0,operation=or; IP,input,filter,SrcAddrMask=255.255.255.255, SrcAddrResult=200.200.150.110,DstAddrMask=255.255.255.255, DstAddrResult=200.200.150.120, Protocol=TCP,SrcPort=0,DstPort=80, operation=none:

Example 3: Forwards only Web traffic on the RAS. There are two patterns, one that allows Web requests to pass through and the other to allow the responses. Forward_only_Web=“Forward Web packets”,IP,input_output,forward, Protocol=TCP,SrcPort=80, operation=or; IP,input_output,forward,Protocol=TCP,DstPort=80:

Example 4: Filters Telnet packets on the network. Only one pattern is needed to block all received packets that have a destination port number of 23. Telnet_Filter=“Filter all Telnet packets”,IP,input,filter, Protocol=TCP,DstPort=23:

367 RASExpress User Guide

Appendix E Error Messages

Server Error Messages

“Attempt to connect with invalid password” Explanation: The user tried to connect with an invalid password. Action: Ask the user to set up the correct password and try again.

“Attempt to connect with invalid user name” Explanation: The user tried to connect with an invalid user name. Action: Ask the user to set up the correct user name and try again.

“Can not open file ISI2.BIN” Explanation: The server has been set up for a two-port ISI card, and ISI2.BIN file was not found in the RASExpress Server directory. Action: Copy the file again.

“Can not open file ISI8.BIN” Explanation: The server has been set up for an eight-port ISI card, and ISI8.BIN file was not found in the RASExpress Server directory. Action: Copy the file again.

“Carrier was lost” Explanation: The carrier was lost. Action: The user must call again.

“Client did not respond in time” Explanation: There was no response from the client side in specified time. Action: The client must call again.

“Connection was aborted by the user” Explanation: Connect was aborted by the user.

“Dialtone was not found” Explanation: There was no dialtone when the server tried to call. Action: Make sure the telephone line is connected properly to the modem.

“Error creating error window” Explanation: There has been an internal error in server. Action: Restart server.

“Error creating log file” Explanation: There was an error creating the log file. Action: Make sure you have write permission in the log file directory. Try changing the log filename if you still get the error.

368 E Error Messages

“Error creating root window” Explanation: There has been an internal error in server. Action: Restart server.

“Error detected while loading firmware” Explanation: There was an error while loading the firmware. Action: Recopy the .BIN file and try again.

“Error detected while verifying firmware” Explanation: There was an error while verifying the firmware. Action: Make sure your ISI card setup is correct.

“Error displaying EIA screen” Explanation: There has been an internal error in server. Action: Restart server.

“Error displaying main screen” Explanation: There has been an internal error in server. Action: Restart server.

“Error displaying statistics screen” Explanation: There has been an internal error in server. Action: Restart server.

“Error in reading configuration file SERVER.CFG” Explanation: The configuration file SERVER.CFG is missing or corrupted. Action: Delete the file if present and run RASCON again.

“Error initializing ISI card” Explanation: The ISI card setup is incorrect. Action: Make sure the base address, number of ports, and IRQ are correct.

“Error initializing Memory Manager” Explanation: There has been an internal error in server. Action: Contact Multi-Tech Technical Support.

“Error initializing packet driver” Explanation: The packet driver being used is not compatible with RASExpress Server. Action: Use the driver shipped with RASExpress Server.

“Error initializing UART driver” Explanation: There has been an internal error in server. Action: Contact Multi-Tech Technical Support.

“Error initializing User Interface” Explanation: There has been an internal error in server. Action: Contact Multi-Tech Technical Support.

369 RASExpress User Guide

“Error opening modem setup file MODEMS.CNF” Explanation: The configuration file MODEMS.CNF is missing. Action: Copy it from the RASExpress Server diskette.

“Error opening setup file SERVER.CFG” Explanation: The configuration file SERVER.CFG is missing. Action: Run RASCON again.

“Error reading modem setup file MODEMS.CNF” Explanation: The configuration file MODEMS.CNF is missing or corrupted. Action: Copy it from the RASExpress Server diskette.

“Error reading setup file SERVER.CFG” Explanation: The configuration file SERVER.CFG is missing or corrupted. Action: Run RASCON again.

“Flow control signal (CTS) did not go high” Explanation: The port is set up for RTS/CTS flow control, but the CTS signal did not go high. Action: Make sure the modem is connected properly and the cable is good if it is a direct connection.

“General error” Explanation: An unknown error occurred at the port.

“Inactivity timer expired” Explanation: The inactivity timer for the user has expired. Action: The client must call again to continue using the server.

“Initialization string for modem is too long” Explanation: The initialization string for the modem was too long. Action: Break it up in smaller strings and try again.

“Initialization was aborted by the user” Explanation: The user aborted the initialization process.

“Invalid log period, Press any key to continue” Explanation: The log period entered either had invalid characters or was beyond the allowed range. The log period must be less than 4 days. Action: Retype the log period.

“IPX/SPX was not found” Explanation: IPX/SPX was not loaded before running server. Action: Load IPX/SPX before using the remote console.

“ISI card did not reset correctly” Explanation: The ISI card setup is incorrect. Action: Make sure the base address, number of ports, and IRQ are correct.

370 E Error Messages

“Line dialed is busy” Explanation: The number called by the server is currently busy. Action: The client must call again later.

“Modem did not respond in time” Explanation: There was a modem initialization error. Action: Make sure that the modem is connected to the port. If you do not want a modem there, change the port setup for a direct connection.

“Modem returned error” Explanation: Modem has returned an error. Action: Make sure your modem setup is correct for the specified modem.

“Not enough memory” Explanation: There has been an internal error in server. Action: Contact Multi-Tech Technical Support.

“Other side did not answer the call” Explanation: The client modem did not answer the call back. Action: The client must call again after a while.

“Packet Driver not found” Explanation: You must have a packet driver running before you load the server. Action: Make sure you run a packet driver before you run the server.

“There is no port at specified base address” Explanation: There was no port found at the address that was set up. Action: Make sure you have set up the correct base address for the COM port and try again.

“There was a critical communication error” Explanation: There was a critical error while the server was trying to send or receive. Action: The connection has been dropped. The other side should call again.

“There was no response for connect request” Explanation: The other side did not respond for the connect request. Action: Make sure the modem setup is correct.

“You need DOS version 3.20 or later for running SERVER” Explanation: RASExpress Server will not run for DOS versions below 3.20. Action: Upgrade your machine for DOS 3.20 or later.

371 RASExpress User Guide

RASCON Error Messages

“Cannot insert any more cards” Explanation: You have reached the limit of four cards supported on the server. Action: None.

“Duplicate User Name” Explanation: The user name that was typed already exists. Action: Type a new name that is unique.

“Error in reading configuration file” Explanation: The configuration file SERVER.CFG does not exist or is corrupted. Action: Delete the CFG file and run RASCON again.

“Illegal user” Explanation: The user name that was typed is not allowed. Action: Type a new name that is allowed.

“Invalid entry” Explanation: You have typed an invalid entry. Action: Refer to your manual to get the valid range for the field.

“Modem information not found. Run Modem Setup” Explanation: MODEMS.CNF was not found. Action: Copy it from the original diskette or run Modem Setup for a fresh modem setup. Action: Type a valid filename and try again.

“No memory for saving the screen” Explanation: There has been an internal error in SERLOG. Action: Contact Multi-Tech Technical Support.

RASExpress Install Error Messages

“Bad path name” Explanation: Invalid pathname was entered. Action: Enter a valid DOS pathname.

“Destination File Open Error” Explanation: Destination pathname may be incorrect or may not have write permission. Action: Make sure you give the correct destination pathname.

“Error Copying File. Hit ANY key to exit” Explanation: There has been an error while copying the file. Action: Abort the installation and run it fresh after cleaning up the destination directory.

372 E Error Messages

“Error creating error window” Explanation: There has been an internal error in INSTALL. Action: Contact Multi-Tech Technical Support.

“Error creating root window” Explanation: There has been an internal error in INSTALL. Action: Contact Multi-Tech Technical Support.

“Error displaying window” Explanation: There has been an internal error in INSTALL. Action: Contact Multi-Tech Technical Support.

“Error initializing Memory Manager” Explanation: There has been an internal error in INSTALL. Action: Contact Multi-Tech Technical Support.

“Error initializing User Interface” Explanation: There has been an internal error in INSTALL. Action: Contact Multi-Tech Technical Support.

“Error opening file. Hit ANY key” Explanation: There has been an error in opening the destination file. There may be a problem in the directory you have chosen. Action: Press a key to abort, choose a different directory, and try again.

“Error renaming file. Hit ANY key” Explanation: There has been an error in renaming SYSTEM.INI file. There may be a problem in the directory you have chosen. Action: Press a key to abort, choose a different directory, and try again.

“Error writing to file. Hit ANY key” Explanation: There has been an error in opening the destination file. There may be a problem in the directory you have chosen. Action: Press a key to abort, choose a different directory, and try again.

“Invalid installation disk” Explanation: The installation disk does not have the required files. Action: Make sure you have the correct diskette, and try again.

“Please enter full pathname” Explanation: You did not enter the full pathname. Action: Enter the full pathname with drive letter and back slashes.

“Source File Open Error” Explanation: There probably is a problem in the source disk. Action: Try a different copy of the software.

373 RASExpress User Guide

Appendix F Warranty and Technical Support

Limited Warranty

Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. (“MTS”) warrants that this product will be free from defects in material or workmanship for a period of two years from the date of purchase, or, if proof of purchase is not provided, two years from date of shipment. MTS MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. This warranty does not apply to any products which have been damaged by light- ning storms, water, or power surges or which have been neglected, altered, abused, used for a purpose other than the one for which they were manufactured, repaired by the customer or any party without MTS’s written authorization, or used in any man- ner inconsistent with MTS’s instructions. MTS’s entire obligation under this warranty shall be limited (at MTS’s option) to repair or replacement of any products which prove to be defective within the warranty period, or, at MTS’s option, issuance of a refund of the purchase price. Defective products must be returned by Customer to MTS’s factory, transportation prepaid. MTS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL ITS LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS.

Online Warranty Registration

If you have access to the World Wide Web, you can register your Multi-Tech product online at the following URL: http://www.multitech.com/register/

Technical Support

Multi-Tech Systems has an excellent staff of technical support personnel available to help you get the most out of your Multi-Tech product. If you have any questions about the operation of this unit, please call 800 972-2439 (USA and Canada) or 763 785-3500 (international and local). Please have modem information available. You can also contact Technical Support by e-mail at the following addresses: U.S. & Canada: [email protected] France: [email protected] India: [email protected] U.K. & Europe: [email protected]

374 F Warranty and Technical Support

Internet Sites

Multi-Tech is a commercial provider on the Internet. Multi-Tech has a Web site at http://www.multitech.com/ and an ftp site at ftp://ftp.multitech.com/

375 RASExpress User Guide

376 Index

377 RASExpress User Guide

Symbols authentication, configuring browser, 90 802.2 frame type, enabling DOS, 286 browser, 88 MultiManager, 166 MultiManager, 165 Telnet/terminal, 29 Telnet/terminal, 28 authentication, SNMP 802.3 frame type, enabling browser, 101 browser, 88 DOS, 292 DOS, 284 MultiManager, 176 MultiManager, 164 Telnet/terminal, 35 Telnet/terminal, 28 auto dialout browser, 96 A DOS, 295 MultiManager, 172 ACC (Address and Control Compression) Telnet/terminal, 38 MultiManager, 222 Auto Group tool, MultiManager, 157 ACCM (Asynchronous Control Character Map) Auto LAN Links tool, MultiManager, 157 in PPP Link Configuration Table auto login protocol MultiManager, 223 browser, 81, 95 in PPP Link Status Table DOS, 293, 306, 319 MultiManager, 222 MultiManager, 174 setting Telnet/terminal, 37, 47 browser, 90 Auto WAN Links tool, MultiManager, 157 DOS, 285 autodetection of servers, MultiManager, 146, 148 MultiManager, 166 AUTOEXEC.BAT, 276 Telnet/terminal, 29 adding a server to the network map, 154 B address mask, setting browser, 85, 91 base address, setting DOS, 282, 287 browser, 106, 107, 109 MultiManager, 162, 167, 218 DOS, 307, 309 Telnet/terminal, 20, 25, 30 MultiManager, 170, 171, 175 address pool, configuring Telnet/terminal, 48, 50 browser, 85 baud rate, setting DOS, 283 browser, 108 MultiManager, 162 DOS, 308 Telnet/terminal, 20, 26 MultiManager, 172 administrator setup Telnet/terminal, 50 browser, 82 BCP (Bridge Control Protocol), enabling DOS, 281 browser, 91 MultiManager, 192 DOS, 286 Telnet/terminal, 52 MultiManager, 166 applications configuration Telnet/terminal, 30 browser, 103 boot history, MultiManager, 198 DOS, 296 BRI card setup. See ISI card setup MultiManager, 184 bridge configuration Telnet/terminal, 38 browser, 93 ARP statistics DOS, 288 browser, 130 MultiManager, 169 MultiManager, 202, 214 Telnet/terminal, 31 Telnet/terminal, 61 browser management of RASExpress servers, ARP Table 72–112 MultiManager, 227

378 Index browser management, enabling MultiManager, 166 browser, 103 Telnet/terminal, 29 DOS, 296 clocks, synchronizing MultiManager, 184 browser, 98 Telnet/terminal, 38 DOS, 290 bundle information MultiManager, 177 MultiManager, 200 Telnet/terminal, 33 Bundle Server color of network map, changing, 158 browser, 93 color utility, DOS, 324–27 DOS, 288 ComMap for Windows, 235 MultiManager, 168 communication setup Telnet/terminal, 31 browser, 106 bundling a port DOS, 306–9 browser, 95 MultiManager, 170 DOS, 294 Telnet/terminal, 48–50 MultiManager, 174 compression, data Telnet/terminal, 38 browser, 90 DOS, 285 C MultiManager, 166 Telnet/terminal, 29 call history compression, enabling browser, 136 browser, 91 MultiManager, 210 DOS, 286 Telnet/terminal, 68 MultiManager, 167 call statistics per port Telnet/terminal, 30 browser, 127 computer requirements, 11 MultiManager, 207, 214 concurrent logins Telnet/terminal, 66 browser, 79 callback delay DOS, 303, 316 browser, 79 MultiManager, 188 DOS, 303, 316 Telnet/terminal, 44 MultiManager, 188 CONFIG.SYS, 276 Telnet/terminal, 44 configuration files callback security, 7 browser, 120 browser, 78 MultiManager, 193 DOS, 303, 316 Telnet/terminal, 24, 41 MultiManager, 188 configuration, initial, 14, 19 Telnet/terminal, 44 MultiManager, 148 CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication connect string graph Protocol) MultiManager, 212 browser, 90 connect string table DOS, 286 browser, 128 MultiManager, 166 MultiManager, 208 Telnet/terminal, 29 Telnet/terminal, 67 CIPX compression, enabling connection log, enabling browser, 91 DOS, 286 DOS, 286 Connection Manager, 7 MultiManager, 167 browser, 76, 122 Telnet/terminal, 30 DOS, 280, 315 Client for Microsoft Networks, 230 MultiManager, 161 client-to-LAN operation Telnet/terminal, 24, 56 browser, 90 DOS, 285

379 RASExpress User Guide connection status Telnet/terminal, 29 browser, 128 dial prefix, setting Telnet/terminal, 67 browser, 111 connection trace, enabling DOS, 310 browser, 92 MultiManager, 191 DOS, 286 Telnet/terminal, 51 MultiManager, 166 dial suffix, setting Telnet/terminal, 29 browser, 111 connection type DOS, 310 LAN-to-LAN MultiManager, 191 browser, 95 Telnet/terminal, 51 DOS, 294 dial-in operation, 5, 7 MultiManager, 173 dialing modes Telnet/terminal, 37 browser, 79 mapped port, 236 DOS, 304, 317 setting MultiManager, 189 browser, 90 Telnet/terminal, 45 DOS, 285 dial-out operation, 5, 6, 21 MultiManager, 166 Dial-Up Networking, 2, 230 Telnet/terminal, 29 disabling a line creating a group, 156, 157 browser, 124 creating a label, 156 DOS, 319 current activity MultiManager, 195 browser, 125 Telnet/terminal, 59 DOS, 321 disconnecting a line MultiManager, 195, 196, 202 browser, 124 Telnet/terminal, 60 DOS, 319 customizing the MultiManager toolbars, 150 MultiManager, 195 Telnet/terminal, 59 D displaying server files MultiManager, 149 data bits, setting displaying traps browser, 109 MultiManager, 199 DOS, 308 DNS server, setting MultiManager, 172 browser, 85 Telnet/terminal, 50 DOS, 283 data compression, enabling MultiManager, 162 browser, 90 Telnet/terminal, 20, 26 DOS, 285 download status MultiManager, 166, 167 MultiManager, 150 Telnet/terminal, 29 drawing daylight-saving time, setting a group, 156, 157 browser, 99 a LAN link, 155, 157 DOS, 290 a WAN link, 155, 157 MultiManager, 177 drawing tools, MultiManager, 153–58 Telnet/terminal, 33 DCD signal, 49, 108, 172, 308 E detection of servers, MultiManager, 146, 148 device tree, MultiManager, 142 editing objects in the network map, 154 dial on demand, enabling EIA signals browser, 90 browser, 133 DOS, 286 DOS, 322 MultiManager, 166 MultiManager, 196

380 Index

Telnet/terminal, 68 FTP enabling a line enabling browser, 124 browser, 104 DOS, 320 DOS, 296 MultiManager, 195 MultiManager, 184 Telnet/terminal, 59 Telnet/terminal, 39 EPD (End Point Descriminator) password browser, 92 MultiManager, 145 DOS, 288 requirement, 328 Telnet/Terminal, 31 function keys, DOS, 314 error messages, 368–73 browser, 76, 122 G DOS, 280, 313, 314 MultiManager, 160 general statistics Telnet/terminal, 24, 56 browser, 125 Ethernet configuration, 276 DOS, 321 Ethernet interface MultiManager, 202 browser, 84 Telnet/terminal, 60 DOS, 282 Group tool, MultiManager, 156 MultiManager, 161 group, drawing a, 156, 157 Telnet/terminal, 19, 25 Ethernet_II frame type, enabling H browser, 88 DOS, 284 hangup string, setting MultiManager, 165 browser, 111 Telnet/terminal, 28 DOS, 310 MultiManager, 191 F Telnet/terminal, 51 Host List, 5, 7, 69, 134, 322 FCS (Frame Check Sequence) displaying MultiManager, 223, 224 browser, 76, 122 filter setup DOS, 280, 315 browser, 117 MultiManager, 161 DOS, 311 Telnet/terminal, 24, 56 MultiManager, 151 Telnet/terminal, 53 I filter template, 365–67 browser, 95 ICMP statistics DOS, 294 MultiManager, 203 MultiManager, 173 icon colors Telnet/terminal, 37 MultiManager, 154 first-time detection of servers idle timeout MultiManager, 148 browser, 94 flow control, enabling DOS, 293 browser, 109 MultiManager, 173 DOS, 309 Telnet/terminal, 37 MultiManager, 172 inactivity timeout. See idle timeout Telnet/terminal, 50 inbound users list frame type, setting browser, 134 browser, 85 DOS, 322 DOS, 276, 283 Telnet/terminal, 69 MultiManager, 162 initial configuration of RASExpress, 14, 19 Telnet/terminal, 20, 26

381 RASExpress User Guide initial configuration of servers port address display MultiManager, 148 browser, 134 initialization strings, setting DOS, 322 browser, 111 Telnet/terminal, 69 DOS, 310 port statistics MultiManager, 191 browser, 132 Telnet/terminal, 51 DOS, 321 Install Options window, 276 MultiManager, 205, 214 INT6B, 5 Telnet/terminal, 59, 65 Internet, 2, 375 remote address, setting IP address browser, 91 map, 227 DOS, 287 mask, 8 MultiManager, 167 MIB table, 219 Telnet/terminal, 30 IP protocol, 8, 282 RIP access, enabling browser, 85 browser, 84 DOS, 282 DOS, 282 MultiManager, 162 MultiManager, 161, 225 Telnet/terminal, 20, 25 Telnet/terminal, 19, 25 routing configuration address mask, setting browser, 84 browser, 85, 91 DOS, 282 DOS, 282, 287 MultiManager, 161, 217 MultiManager, 162, 167, 218 Telnet/terminal, 19, 25 Telnet/terminal, 20, 25, 30 routing information address overview, 8 browser, 131 addresses, allocating MultiManager, 217 browser, 85 Telnet/terminal, 62 DOS, 283 IPCP protocol MultiManager, 162 configuration Telnet/terminal, 20, 26 MultiManager, 225 default gateway enabling browser, 85 browser, 91 DOS, 282 DOS, 286 Telnet/terminal, 20, 26 MultiManager, 167 default route, setting Telnet/terminal, 30 browser, 85 status DOS, 282 MultiManager, 224 MultiManager, 162 IPX protocol Telnet/terminal, 20, 25 enabling general statistics browser, 87 MultiManager, 205 DOS, 284 local address, setting MultiManager, 164 browser, 91 Telnet/terminal, 27 DOS, 287 node number, setting MultiManager, 167 browser, 91 Telnet/terminal, 30 DOS, 286 network address, setting MultiManager, 167 browser, 84 Telnet/terminal, 30 DOS, 282 port address display MultiManager, 161 browser, 134 Telnet/terminal, 19, 25 DOS, 322 Telnet/terminal, 69

382 Index

port statistics MultiManager, 206 browser, 132 Telnet/terminal, 64 MultiManager, 206, 214 Line Color tool, MultiManager, 158 Telnet/terminal, 59, 65 line control remote access, configuring browser, 124 browser, 87 DOS, 319 DOS, 283 MultiManager, 195 MultiManager, 164 Telnet/terminal, 58–59 Telnet/terminal, 27 line information, editing routing statistics browser, 108 browser, 129 DOS, 308 Telnet/terminal, 63 MultiManager, 171, 173 SAP information Telnet/terminal, 49–50 browser, 130 line permissions Telnet/terminal, 64 browser, 80 IPXCP protocol, enabling DOS, 304, 317 browser, 90 MultiManager, 190 DOS, 286 Telnet/terminal, 45 MultiManager, 166 line setup Telnet/terminal, 29 browser, 108 IRQ number, setting DOS, 308 browser, 106, 107, 109 MultiManager, 170 DOS, 307, 309 Telnet/terminal, 49–50 MultiManager, 170, 171, 175 line statistics Telnet/terminal, 48, 50 browser, 132, 135, 136 ISDN configuration MultiManager, 210 browser, 92, 109 Telnet/terminal, 59, 68 DOS, 287, 309 line status MultiManager, 171, 174, 175 MultiManager, 207 Telnet/terminal, 31, 50 line usage statistics ISI card configuration browser, 127 browser, 106 MultiManager, 207 DOS, 306 Telnet/terminal, 66 MultiManager, 170 line utilization Telnet/terminal, 48 browser, 135 Telnet/terminal, 67 L Link Quality Report (LQR) MultiManager, 226 labels, creating, 156 locking a server LAN Link tool, MultiManager, 155 MultiManager, 194 LAN link, drawing, 155, 157 log files LAN operation, 6 download directory LAN-to-LAN operation MultiManager, 145 browser, 90, 95 viewing DOS, 285, 286, 294 MultiManager, 149 MultiManager, 166, 173 log status information, 57 Telnet/terminal, 29, 37 logging server activity LCP (Link Control Protocol) browser, 75, 76, 122 configuration DOS, 280, 314 MultiManager, 223 MultiManager, 160 statistics Telnet/terminal, 24, 55 browser, 126 DOS, 321

383 RASExpress User Guide login permissions DOS, 304, 317 browser, 81 MultiManager, 189 DOS, 306, 319 Telnet/terminal, 45 MultiManager, 189 modem card setup. See ISI card setup Telnet/terminal, 45, 47 modem configuration logins, concurrent browser, 110 browser, 79 DOS, 310–11 DOS, 303, 316 MultiManager, 190–91 MultiManager, 188 Telnet/terminal, 51–52 Telnet/terminal, 44 moving objects in the network map, 153 MRU (Maximum Receive Unit) M in PPP Link Configuration Table MultiManager, 223 MAC layer bridging configuration in PPP Link Status Table browser, 93 MultiManager, 222 DOS, 288 setting MultiManager, 169 browser, 90 Telnet/terminal, 31 DOS, 285 Magic Number MultiManager, 166 MultiManager, 224 Telnet/terminal, 29 managing a RASExpress server MultiChassis Multilink setup browser, 121–37 browser, 92 DOS, 313–23 DOS, 287 MultiManager, 194–99 Telnet/terminal, 31 Telnet/terminal, 18–69, 55–69 MultiCommManager, 25, 56, 76, 122, 161, 280, mask, address, 8, 219 315 browser, 85 Multilink PPP configuration DOS, 282 browser, 92 MultiManager, 162 DOS, 287 Telnet/terminal, 20, 25 MultiManager, 168 mask, address, setting Telnet/terminal, 31 browser, 91 MultiManager, 140–228 DOS, 287 MultiModemManager, 25, 56, 76, 122, 161, 280, MultiManager, 167, 218 315 Telnet/terminal, 30 Multi-Tech Internet sites, 375 Maximum Slot ID MultiManager, 225 N MCSIWSN redirector, 5, 6 message file NCP (Network Control Protocol) statistics browser, 76, 122 browser, 126 DOS, 280, 315 DOS, 321 MultiManager, 160 MultiManager, 206 Telnet/terminal, 24, 56 Telnet/terminal, 64 messages, status NetBIOS, 32, 93, 169, 288 browser, 97 enabling DOS, 289 browser, 87, 91 MultiManager, 183 DOS, 284, 286 Telnet/terminal, 32 MultiManager, 164, 167 metric, 218 Telnet/terminal, 27, 30 MIB tables NetWare, 230 MultiManager, 216–27 network interface, 276 mode permissions network interface card (NIC), 5, 7 browser, 79

384 Index network map, MultiManager, 142, 143, 144, 153 DOS, 308 editing objects, 154 MultiManager, 172 selecting objects, 153 Telnet/terminal, 50 network number password, assigning automatic detection browser, 75 browser, 87 DOS, 279 DOS, 284 MultiManager, 159 MultiManager, 164 Telnet/terminal, 24 Telnet/terminal, 27 password, FTP setting MultiManager, 145 browser, 90 password, user DOS, 286 browser, 90 MultiManager, 167 DOS, 286 Telnet/terminal, 29 MultiManager, 147, 166 NIC configuration, 276 Telnet/terminal, 29 Novell NetWare, 276 permissions, user browser, 79–81 O DOS, 304–6, 316 MultiManager, 187–90 offline statistics Telnet/terminal, 45–47 MultiManager, 211 physical port configuration online statistics browser, 96 MultiManager, 214 DOS, 294 OSPF configuration MultiManager, 171 browser, 112–17 Telnet/terminal, 38 DOS, 299–301 port addresses display MultiManager, 180 browser, 134 Telnet/terminal, 41–43 DOS, 322 out of service, setting line Telnet/terminal, 69 browser, 124 port configuration DOS, 319 browser, 94, 96, 108 MultiManager, 195 DOS, 308 Telnet/terminal, 59 DOS, 293, 294 overview of RASExpress, 2, 5–7 MultiManager, 170, 171, 173 Telnet/terminal, 36, 38, 49–50 P port control browser, 124 packet filters DOS, 319 browser, 117 MultiManager, 195 DOS, 311 Telnet/terminal, 58–59 MultiManager, 151 port information Telnet/terminal, 53 MultiManager, 209, 220 packet statistics per port port status MultiManager, 208, 209 MultiManager, 207 PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) PPP connection log browser, 90 DOS, 286 DOS, 286 PPP protocol MultiManager, 166 configuration Telnet/terminal, 29 browser, 88–92 Paper Color tool, MultiManager, 158 DOS, 285–87 parity type MultiManager, 165–67, 223, 225 browser, 109 Telnet/terminal, 28–30

385 RASExpress User Guide

enabling detection of RASCON, 278–312 browser, 95 RASEXP, 313–23 DOS, 293 RASExpress Server Configuration utility, 276, MultiManager, 174 278–312 Telnet/terminal, 37 RASExpress server defined, 18 IP Table RASExpress server operation MultiManager, 224 browser, 72–73 Link Status Table DOS, 313–23 MultiManager, 221 rebooting a server LQR Table browser, 124 MultiManager, 226 MultiManager, 194, 198 statistics Telnet/terminal, 57 DOS, 321 redirection, 5, 6 MultiManager, 206 registering your product, 374 Telnet/terminal, 64 remote control operation, 5 PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) browser, 79 browser, 81, 95 DOS, 304, 317 DOS, 294, 306, 319 MultiManager, 189 MultiManager, 174, 189 remote node operation, 5, 230 Telnet/terminal, 37, 47 browser, 79 PRI configuration DOS, 304, 317 browser, 109 MultiManager, 189 DOS, 309 remote user number MultiManager, 174 browser, 78 Telnet/terminal, 50 DOS, 303, 316 primary name server, setting MultiManager, 188 browser, 85 Telnet/terminal, 44 DOS, 283 requirements, computer, 11 MultiManager, 162 Reset SBC Processors option Telnet/terminal, 20, 26 DOS, 323 protocol compression resetting a line MultiManager, 222 browser, 124 protocol permissions DOS, 319 browser, 80 MultiManager, 195 DOS, 305, 318 Telnet/terminal, 59 MultiManager, 189 resetting a processor Telnet/terminal, 46 MultiManager, 194, 198 restarting a server Q browser, 124 MultiManager, 195 quick configuration procedure, 14, 19 Telnet/terminal, 57 result codes, setting R browser, 112 DOS, 311 RADIUS security. See also security configuration MultiManager, 191 browser, 105, 106 Telnet/terminal, 52 DOS, 297, 298 RIP (Routing Information Protocol) MultiManager, 185, 186 browser, 85 Telnet/terminal, 39, 40 DOS, 282 RAS tool, MultiManager, 154 MultiManager, 162, 203 RAS, adding to the network map in Telnet/terminal, 20, 25 MultiManager, 154

386 Index

RLOGIN protocol commands browser, 79, 81, 95, 104 atof, 251 DOS, 39, 293, 297, 304, 306, 317, 319 atoi, 251 MultiManager, 174, 184, 189 baudrate, 252 Telnet/terminal, 37, 45, 47 ceil, 252 router, 9, 25, 85, 282 connected, 253 statistics databits, 253 Telnet/terminal, 61 dec, 253 routing delete, 254 information diskfree, 254 browser, 131 display, 254 MultiManager, 217 dropconnection, 255 Telnet/terminal, 62 endproc, 255 IPX packets exit, 255 browser, 88 fclose, 255 DOS, 284 fcreate, 256 MultiManager, 164, 165 fdisplay, 257 Telnet/terminal, 28 fgetc, 258 statistics fgets, 258 browser, 126 findfirst, 258 DOS, 321 findnext, 259 MultiManager, 203, 205 floor, 259 RS-232 signals fopen, 259 browser, 133 fputc, 259 DOS, 322 fputs, 260 MultiManager, 196 fread, 260 Telnet/terminal, 68 fseek, 260 RTS/CTS flow control, enabling ftoa, 260 browser, 109 fwrite, 261 DOS, 309 getfileattr, 261 MultiManager, 172 getfiledate, 261 Telnet/terminal, 50 getfilesize, 262 getfiletime, 263 S hangup, 263 inc, 263 SAP information isfile, 263 browser, 130 itoa, 264 Telnet/terminal, 64 mkdir, 264 saving a configuration mod, 264 MultiManager, 194 parity, 265 screen saver proc, 265 browser, 76, 122 quit, 265 DOS, 280, 315 rgetc, 266 MultiManager, 160 rmdir, 266 Telnet/terminal, 24, 56 setfileattr, 267 script file, selecting setfiledate, 267 browser, 95 setfiletime, 267 DOS, 294 stopbits, 267 MultiManager, 173 strcat, 267 Telnet/terminal, 37 strcmp, 268 script language, 239–71 strcpy, 268 command format, 244 strfmt, 268 command summary, 245–50

387 RASExpress User Guide

strlen, 268 DOS, 293 tolower, 269 MultiManager, 173 toupper, 270 Telnet/terminal, 37 transmit, 270 SETCOLOR command, 324 wait, 270 setting traps waitfor, 271 MultiManager, 196 format characters, 241 shared secret. See security configuration overview, 240–43 shutting down the server secondary name server, setting DOS, 320 browser, 85 SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol) DOS, 283 configuration MultiManager, 162 MultiManager, 165 Telnet/terminal, 20, 26 enabling security, 7 browser, 89 browser, 78 DOS, 285 DOS, 303, 316 MultiManager, 165 MultiManager, 188 Telnet/terminal, 28 Telnet/terminal, 44 SMTP configuration security configuration browser, 102 browser, 90, 104 DOS, 295 DOS, 286, 297–98 MultiManager, 179 MultiManager, 166, 185–86 Telnet/terminal, 35 Telnet/terminal, 29, 39–40 SNAP frame type, enabling Selection tool, MultiManager, 153 browser, 88 serial line control DOS, 284 browser, 124 MultiManager, 165 DOS, 319 Telnet/terminal, 28 MultiManager, 195 SNMP configuration Telnet/terminal, 58–59 browser, 100 server configuration DOS, 291 browser, 75 MultiManager, 175 DOS, 279–98, 314 Telnet/terminal, 34 MultiManager, 159, 194 SNTP configuration Telnet/terminal, 23–52 browser, 98 server files, viewing in MultiManager, 149 DOS, 290 server information MultiManager, 177 browser, 72, 122 Telnet/terminal, 33 DOS, 313, 314 Spanning Tree bridging, enabling MultiManager, 159 browser, 93 Telnet/terminal, 55–57, 58–59 DOS, 288 server name, assigning MultiManager, 169 browser, 75 Telnet/terminal, 32 DOS, 279 specifications, 10–12 MultiManager, 159 static IP address Telnet/terminal, 24 browser, 79 server statistics DOS, 303, 316 browser, 125–37 MultiManager, 188 DOS, 320–22 Telnet/terminal, 45 MultiManager, 201–10, 202 static routes Telnet/terminal, 56 browser, 86 server, adding to the network map, 154 DOS, 283 session timeout MultiManager, 163 browser, 94 Telnet/terminal, 21, 26

388 Index statistics Telnet/terminal, 61 ARP storing a statistical analysis browser, 130 MultiManager, 215 MultiManager, 202, 214 summary Telnet/terminal, 61 browser, 129 calls per port MultiManager, 201 browser, 127 TCP MultiManager, 207, 214 browser, 131, 137 Telnet/terminal, 66 MultiManager, 204, 209, 214 connect string Telnet/terminal, 62, 63 MultiManager, 208, 215 Telnet/terminal interface, 56, 60–68 DOS interface, 320–22 throughput per port general MultiManager, 202, 214 browser, 125 UDP DOS, 321 browser, 131 MultiManager, 202 MultiManager, 204, 214 Telnet/terminal, 60 Telnet/terminal, 62 ICMP status messages MultiManager, 203 browser, 97 IP general DOS, 289 MultiManager, 205 MultiManager, 183 IP port Telnet/terminal, 32 browser, 132 stop bits MultiManager, 205, 214 browser, 109 Telnet/terminal, 59, 65 DOS, 308 IPX port MultiManager, 172 browser, 132 Telnet/terminal, 50 MultiManager, 206, 214 storing a statistical analysis Telnet/terminal, 59, 65 MultiManager, 215 IPX routing string options, setting browser, 129 browser, 112 Telnet/terminal, 63 DOS, 311 line usage MultiManager, 191 browser, 127 Telnet/terminal, 52 MultiManager, 207 subnet mask, setting Telnet/terminal, 66 browser, 85, 91 MultiManager, 201–10, 211–14 DOS, 282, 287 offline MultiManager, 162, 167 MultiManager, 211 Telnet/terminal, 20, 25, 30 online supervisor password, assigning MultiManager, 214 browser, 75 packets per port DOS, 279 MultiManager, 208, 209 MultiManager, 159 PPP Telnet/terminal, 24 DOS, 321 synchronizing computer clocks MultiManager, 206 browser, 98 Telnet/terminal, 64 DOS, 290 RIP MultiManager, 177 MultiManager, 203 Telnet/terminal, 33 router system table browser, 126 MultiManager, 216 DOS, 321 MultiManager, 203, 205

389 RASExpress User Guide

T time limits, user browser, 80 TACACS+ security. See security configuration DOS, 305, 318 TCP MultiManager, 189 port information Telnet/terminal, 46 MultiManager, 209, 220 time of day logins raw connection browser, 80 browser, 96 DOS, 305, 318 DOS, 295 MultiManager, 189 MultiManager, 172 Telnet/terminal, 46 Telnet/terminal, 38 time, changing server statistics browser, 122 browser, 131, 137 Telnet/terminal, 57 MultiManager, 204, 209, 214 timeouts Telnet/terminal, 62, 63 browser, 94, 173 TCP/IP protocol, 8 DOS, 293 technical support, 374 MultiManager, 173 Telnet, 6 Telnet/terminal, 37 browser, 79, 81, 95 toolbars, customizing DOS, 293, 304, 306, 317, 319 MultiManager, 150 management of RASExpress, 18–69 traps MultiManager, 174, 189 MultiManager, 196, 199 Telnet/terminal, 37, 45, 47 tunneling protocol Telnet commands, 330–64 browser, 81, 95 browser, 103 DOS, 294, 306, 319 DOS, 296 MultiManager, 174, 189 MultiManager, 180 Telnet/terminal, 37, 47 Telnet/terminal, 36 Type_II frame type, enabling Telnet configuration browser, 88 browser, 96, 97 DOS, 284 DOS, 289, 295 MultiManager, 165 MultiManager, 172, 183, 184 Telnet/terminal, 28 Telnet/terminal, 32, 38 typographic conventions, 4 terminal management of RASExpress, 18–69 Text tool, MultiManager, 156 U TFTP enabling UDP browser, 104 broadcast packets, enabling DOS, 297 browser, 92 MultiManager, 184 DOS, 287 Telnet/terminal, 39 MultiManager, 167 requirement, 328 Telnet/terminal, 30 throughput statistics MIB table browser, 125 MultiManager, 221 DOS, 321 statistics MultiManager, 202, 214 browser, 131 Telnet/terminal, 60 MultiManager, 204, 214 time limit, setting Telnet/terminal, 62 browser, 81 unlocking a server DOS, 305, 318 MultiManager, 194 MultiManager, 189 UPGRADE.LOG file, 329 Telnet/terminal, 47 upgrading RASExpress, 328–29

390 Index user configuration V browser, 77 DOS, 302–6 version information MultiManager, 187 browser, 145 Telnet/terminal, 43–47 MultiManager, 216, 228 user information Telnet/terminal, 57 browser, 78, 123 viewing server files DOS, 302, 315–19 MultiManager, 149 MultiManager, 187 virtual port configuration Telnet/terminal, 58 browser, 94 user name DOS, 293 displaying MultiManager, 173 browser, 73, 77 Telnet/terminal, 36 DOS, 302, 315 VJ compression MultiManager, 187 enabling Telnet/terminal, 43, 58 browser, 91 specifying DOS, 287 browser, 78, 90 MultiManager, 167, 225 DOS, 286, 302 Telnet/terminal, 30 MultiManager, 166 status Telnet/terminal, 29, 44 MultiManager, 225 user password, specifying browser, 78 W DOS, 303 MultiManager, 147, 188 WAN Link tool, MultiManager, 155, 156 Telnet/terminal, 44 WAN link, drawing, 157 user permissions warranty, 374 browser, 79–81 Web browser management of RASExpress DOS, 304–6 servers, 72–112 MultiManager, 187–90 Web browser management, enabling Telnet/terminal, 45–47 browser, 103 users, inbound DOS, 296 browser, 134 MultiManager, 184 DOS, 322 Telnet/terminal, 38 Telnet/terminal, 69 WinMCSI redirector, 5, 6, 234–38 installation, 234–35 operation, 235–38

391 S0000118